TM120 Optimizer Planning and Executio in SAP Transportation Managemet
233 Pages • 44,738 Words • PDF • 24.4 MB
Uploaded at 2021-09-24 15:39
This document was submitted by our user and they confirm that they have the consent to share it. Assuming that you are writer or own the copyright of this document, report to us by using this DMCA report button.
TM120
Optimizer Planning and Executio in SAP Transportation Manageme
. .
PARTICIPANT HANDBOOK INSTRUCTOR-LED TRAINING . Course Version: 16 Course Duration: 5 Day(s) e-book Duration: 25 Hours 45 Minutes Material Number: 50131927
SAP Copyrights and Trademarks
© 2018 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered http://global12.sap.com/ trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other countries. Please see corporate-en/legal/copyright/index.epx for additional trademark information and notices. Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. National product specifications may vary. These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP SE or its affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. In particular, SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation, or to develop or release any functionality mentioned therein. This document, or any related presentation, and SAP SE’s or its affiliated companies’ strategy and possible future developments, products, and/or platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time for any reason without notice. The information in this document is not a commitment, promise, or legal obligation to deliver any material, code, or functionality. All forward-looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations. Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements, which speak only as of their dates, and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions.
Typographic Conventions American English is the standard used in this handbook. The following typographic conventions are also used.
This information is displayed in the instructor’s presentation
Demonstration
Procedure
Warning or Caution
Hint
Related or Additional Information
Facilitated Discussion
User interface control
Example text
Window title
Example text
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
iii
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
iv
Contents vii
Course Overview
1
Unit 1:
2 5 8 17 21 30
Lesson: Lesson: Lesson: Lesson: Lesson: Unit 2:
31 34 45
Unit 3:
Unit 4:
Unit 5:
84 90 97 102 106
143
Transportation Unit Planning
Carrier Selection Lesson: Lesson: Lesson: Lesson: Lesson:
Unit 6:
113 120 126 142
Advanced Transportation Network
Lesson: Creating Passive Vehicle Resources Lesson: Planning Transportation Units with Passive Vehicle Resources Lesson: Planning Transportation Units with the Optimizer Lesson: Planning Transportation with Container Units
68 71
112
Optimizer Applications
Lesson: Creating Schedules Lesson: Analyzing the Results of the Path Finder
56 64
83
Describing Optimizer Planning Applying Optimizer Planning Settings Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios Applying Short-Cut Planning Creating Pooled Shipments
Lesson: Creating a Transportation Proposal Lesson: Describing Load Optimization Processes
46 51 55
Optimizer Planning
Explaining the Carrier Selection Process Selecting Carriers Based on Costs and Priorities Using Allocations Using Business Shares Improving Carrier Utilization
Freight Tendering Lesson: Explaining the Tendering Process Lesson: Configuring the Tendering Plan Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
Unit 7:
Freight Orders in Transportation Management Lesson: Creating Freight Orders
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
v
151
Unit 8:
Freight Order Setup
152
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Types
158 160
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Type Determination Lesson: Determining Business Partners
170
Unit 9:
171 175 184 197 203
Lesson: Lesson: Lesson: Lesson: Unit 10:
204 213
Unit 11:
231 239 251 252 261 269
Integrating Freight Orders with Shipments Creating Shipments from Freight Orders Creating Freight Orders from Shipments Communicating Freight Orders to Other Companies
Transportation Event Monitoring Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events Lesson: Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility Lesson: Handling Events in the Collaboration Portal
223 230
Freight Order Integration
Transportation Execution Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Output Lesson: Managing Freight Order Discrepancies
Unit 12:
Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM based on Shipments Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM Based on Deliveries Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM for Transit Warehousing
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
vi
Course Overview
TARGET AUDIENCE This course is intended for the following audiences: ●
Application Consultant
●
Business Process Architect
●
Business Process Owner/Team Lead/Power User
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
vii
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
viii
UNIT 1 Optimizer Planning
Lesson 1 Describing Optimizer Planning
2
Lesson 2 Applying Optimizer Planning Settings
5
Lesson 3 Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
8
Lesson 4 Applying Short-Cut Planning
17
Lesson 5 Creating Pooled Shipments
21
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
Describe optimizer planning
●
Create planning cost settings
●
Execute planning to determine the means of transport
●
Execute planning to consolidate deliveries
●
Execute planning to enforce minimum shipping requirements
●
Describe short-cut planning
●
Maintain integration settings for short-cut planning
●
Maintain configuration and execute short-cut planning
●
Model the transportation network for pooled shipments
●
Create pooled freight orders
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
1
Unit 1 Lesson 1 Describing Optimizer Planning
LESSON OVERVIEW This lesson examines how the vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimizer considers routes and locations in transportation planning to minimize costs and operate within constraints. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Describe optimizer planning
Route Optimization
Figure 1: SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) Document Flow
The vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimizer considers routing and the sequence in which resources arrive at certain locations. The VSR optimizer also considers the scheduling of tasks that are running in parallel. It evaluates potential changes to the routing and the
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
2
Lesson: Describing Optimizer Planning
effect such changes have on scheduling, helping to avoid the possibility of delayed deliveries and follow-on costs. Mathematical Model The goal of the optimizer is to assign tasks to vehicles and determine the route and sequence of tasks per vehicle so that all constraints are met and total costs are minimized. The optimizer achieves this goal by evolutionary local search, a population-based meta-heuristic that borrows selection principles from evolutionary algorithms and relies heavily on local optimization.
Figure 2: Mathematical Model
A more concrete example of the workings of the optimizer is its handling of potential date changes, which it handles by applying each date change to all tasks on the affected resource or dependent tasks on any other resources to derive the most appropriate choice. The consideration of several aspects in parallel is repeated for other variables, such as transshipment locations, and is necessary to create effective plans or to make improvements to existing plans. Costs and Constraints The total cost, which the optimizer is designed to minimize, is a weighted sum of the following items: ●
Non-delivery/execution penalty (per freight unit (FU))
●
Earliness and lateness penalty (per FU)
●
Fixed cost (per vehicle or tour)
●
Travel-dependent costs (per vehicle), for example, distance and duration.
●
Load-dependent costs (per vehicle and tour)
●
Sustainability costs such as CO2 emissions (from SAP TM 8.0 by BAdI)
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
3
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Describe optimizer planning
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
4
Unit 1 Lesson 2 Applying Optimizer Planning Settings
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, we examine the use of optimization costs in the planning process. You learn about the different kinds of planning costs that the vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimizer uses in an optimization run. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Create planning cost settings
Optimization Costs Fixed costs are calculated once by the system for each capacity used in the VSR optimization run. Capacities include vehicle resources and schedules. For schedules, the fixed costs are incurred per departure. In addition to fixed costs, other variable costs can be applied. The following are the variable transportation costs per unit for the following dimensions: ●
Duration
●
Distance
●
Transported quantity per distance
●
Intermediate stop
These costs refer to the use of the dimensions of a capacity, including empty runs, during the VSR optimization run. Duration and Distance Costs You can define the costs per duration for each VSR optimization run. You can also define a maximum value and a unit. The unit refers to both the costs and the maximum value. If you do not specify a unit, the system measures duration in seconds. You can define the costs per distance for each VSR optimization run. You can also define a maximum value and a unit. The unit refers to both the costs and the maximum value. If you do not specify a unit, the system measures distance in kilometers. You can also specify the cost basis. This determines if the system uses the costs per distance from costs theper distance field in the planning profile or from the transportation lane. Alternatively, you can specify that the system is to take the sum of both values into account. Transported Quantity per Distance and Intermediate Stop Costs You can define the costs per quantity for each VSR optimization run. You must also define a unit. You cannot define a maximum value for the costs per quantity. However, you can specify if the system is to use the costs per quantity from the transportation lane or from the costs per quantity specified in the planning profile.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
5
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
For costs per quantity from the transportation lane, you can specify if the system is to calculate the costs in a distance-independent way or if it is to multiply them by the distance.
Figure 3: Quantity and Distance
For costs per quantity from the planning costs, you can specify if the system is to calculate the costs in a distance-independent way per transportation lane or if it is to multiply them by the distance. The system determines the costs per stage if costs are calculated in a distanceindependent way. You are not allowed to define a unit. If multiplying by the distance, the system uses the fixed value that you have defined in the costs per quantity field. You can define the maximum number of intermediate stops and the costs per additional stop. Route-based Versus Destination-based Cost
Figure 4: Route-based Versus Destination-based Cost
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
6
Lesson: Applying Optimizer Planning Settings
The figure, Route-based Versus Destination-based Cost, illustrates the route-based and destination-based costs as follows: ●
Destination-based cost: -
Freight order A ( → B → C) = DistanceA( → B → C) * Cost (A → C) = 300 * 1.5 = $450.
-
Freight order A ( → C → B) = DistanceA( → C → B) * Cost (A → B) = 250 * 1.9 = $475.
●
Route-based cost: -
-
Freight order A ( → B → C) = DistanceA( → B) * Cost (A → B) + DistanceB( → C) * Cost (B → C) = 200 * 1.9 + 100 * 1.8 = $560. Freight order A ( → C → B) = DistanceA( → C) * Cost (A → C) + DistanceC( → B) * Cost (C → B) = 150 * 1.5 + 100 * 1.8 = $405.
Route-based and destination-based distance costs can yield different results. In North America, destination-based distance cost calculation is used frequently, whereas in Europe, route-based distance costs are primarily used. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Create planning cost settings
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
7
Unit 1 Lesson 3 Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, we consider the goals of the vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimizer in transportation planning. We look also at the use of costs to influence VSR optimization results, and analyze how constraints and tolerances effect means-of-transport selection. Finally, we examine the use of planning costs to enforce minimum shipping requirements in the VSR optimization run. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Execute planning to determine the means of transport
●
Execute planning to consolidate deliveries
●
Execute planning to enforce minimum shipping requirements
Truck-Load Planning Scenarios Freight orders can be created by manual planning or they can be built by the VSR optimizer. Optimizer planning is a key function of SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) and aims to select the best means of transportation. SAP TM decides between shipping an order directly to a customer less than truckload (LTL) scenario or consolidating orders from several customers in a single vehicle full truckload (FTL) scenario.
Optimization Execution The goal of the VSR optimizer is freight unit consolidation and the creation of a cost effective and timely route from source to destination. VSR Goals and Objectives ●
●
Goal: Determine a transportation plan that minimizes total costs and satisfies all constraints. Decisions: -
Per freight unit: transport or not?
-
Per transported freight unit: select path through transportation network (stages).
-
Per selected stage: select capacity or vehicle resource.
-
Per capacity or vehicle resource:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
8
Lesson: Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
●
■
Select relative ordering of activities (= routing).
■
Assign start time to each activity (= scheduling).
Total costs = sum of: -
Penalty costs (non-delivery, earliness, or lateness).
-
Capacity or vehicle costs (fixed, duration, stops, quantity, and distance).
The total cost is the sum of penalty costs for non delivery, early and late delivery, and vehicle costs for duration, distance, stops, and quantity. Optimizer Constraints
Figure 5: Optimizer Constraints
The optimizer operates within the constraints defined in the figure, Optimizer Constraints. The optimizer evaluates any changes in routing caused by constraints for their effect on the scheduling and timing. It communicates any change of time or date to all tasks on that resource or to any dependent tasks on any other resource. Considering both aspects in parallel ensures effective planning. The optimizer tries to assign freight units to vehicles and determine an effective delivery order for each vehicle so that total transportation costs are minimized. It considers several constraints and takes penalty costs into account as part of the total transportation cost. Optimizer Communication When the optimizer starts, the engine communicates with the SAP TM application; the optimizer requires the complete description of the transportation planning scenario to make informed decisions. For each freight unit, the engine decides if it wants to transport it directly or via transshipment locations.
Configuration of Planning Cost Settings The following penalty costs are defined in the planning profile and can be used to control the decisions made by VSR optimization:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
9
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
●
Premature pick-up
●
Delayed pick-up
●
Premature delivery
●
Delayed delivery
Using Soft Constraints The optimizer calculates additional costs if the transportation plan deviates from the requested pickup and delivery dates. This is done when using soft constraints in the pickup and delivery time window and defining penalty costs in the planning profile. There is a balance in the optimizer process between selecting the cheapest mode of transport and adhering to promised delivery dates and defined pickup dates. For example, the optimizer could decide to ship via an intermodal means of transport even if this means delivering a day late. This is on the condition that savings made by selecting a slower means of transport outweigh the penalty costs for delayed delivery. Penalty Costs
Figure 6: VSR Optimization and Windows
The penalty cost for premature pick-up is incurred when the scheduled pickup time falls between the earliest pickup time (hard constraint) and the allowed premature pickup (soft constraint). The penalty cost for delayed pick-up is incurred when the scheduled pickup time falls between the allowed late pickup time (soft constraint) and the latest pickup time (hard constraint).
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
10
Lesson: Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
The penalty cost for premature delivery is incurred when the scheduled delivery time falls between the earliest delivery time (hard constraint) and the allowed premature delivery time (soft constraint). The penalty cost for delayed delivery is incurred when the scheduled delivery time falls between the allowed late delivery time (soft constraint) and the latest delivery time (hard constraint).
Pickup and Delivery Window Definition
Figure 7: Pick Up and Delivery Windows
Defining Pickup and Delivery Windows ●
●
●
Forwarding orders, SAP ERP-orders, and deliveries work only with single day and time for pick up and delivery. To allow more flexibility for freight consolidation and routing optimization SAP TM Planning uses Time Windows. Combination of pick up and delivery definition and penalty costs controls how the optimizer schedules within the time window.
Windows control when goods are to be picked up and delivered. VSR optimization schedules the pickup or delivery exactly in the window defined. If there were no windows, VSR optimization would schedule these dates to minimize the total costs. You can also control the optimization when windows are not taken into account and goods are picked up or delivered too early or too late.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
11
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
Defining Tolerances You can create windows by defining tolerances within which a premature or delayed pickup or delivery is to be allowed. You specify for each tolerance if VSR optimization is to consider it a hard, soft, or hard and soft constraint. Specifying constraints controls if VSR optimization calculates penalty costs when the constraints are not adhered to. The following tolerances can be defined: ●
Maximum earliness
●
Maximum delay
●
Delay without penalty costs
●
Earliness without penalty costs
The dates and times defined for the pickup and delivery in the freight unit are the basis for calculating the tolerances. The exact time for the pick-up date or delivery date can be considered. Hard and Soft Constraints
Figure 8: Defining Pick Up and Delivery Windows
Conditions are used to set up pickup and delivery windows. The condition is specified in the freight unit type. Window Constraints ●
None
●
Hard (Acceptable dates)
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
12
Lesson: Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
●
Soft (Requested dates
●
Hard and soft (Both)
VSR optimization takes constraints into account when it assigns freight units to capacities. You can differentiate between hard and soft constraints: ●
●
VSR optimization always adheres to hard constraints. You model soft constraints using penalty costs, for example, lateness costs that are part of the total costs.
The following are the relevant condition types: ●
For pick up and delivery time window definition: /SCMTMS/TOR_TIMEWIND
●
For earliness and lateness cost definition: /SCMTMS/FU_PNLT_COST
Means of Transport Cost Evaluation
Figure 9: Means of Transport Costs
Using the planning cost settings, the optimizer can determine the best means of transport to use. For example, a break-even analysis between a large truck and a small truck can be modeled with this setting. There is a relation between pickup and delivery penalty time and cost per duration. Depending on business rules, it could be better to delay pickup or deliver early. The maximum distance and durations are useful for deciding on rail or air transport instead of road. The maximum number of stops and costs are useful for reducing the number of visits during a week at customers or suppliers.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
13
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
Stop Off Costs
Figure 10: Stop Off Costs
The figure, Stop Off Costs, shows two stop-offs between locations A and D. Stopover costs are applied to influence the outcome of VSR optimization. The source and target location in a route are not taken into account when calculating the number of stopovers. Maintain the number of stopovers plus one.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
14
Lesson: Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
Cost Function Application
Figure 11: Cost Functions
The figure, Cost Functions, shows the creation of a cost profile function and how penalty costs are calculated. During optimization, the system avoids transports if a certain load level is not reached. If this minimum load level is not reached, the system does not create a transport. It waits until this level is reached. In the example, there is a penalty of $1500 for a load less than 2000m ᵌ . After 2000mᵌ , the penalty cost is reduced from $500 to zero. Additional Linear Loading Costs Additional Linear Loading Costs Additional linear loading costs can be applied to increase truck usage. You define two segments for this cost function. For the first segment, you define penalty costs of $1500 and a load of zero cubic meters ᵌ(m ). Define a gradient of zero. If TRUCK001 leaves the plant with a load of less than 2000m ᵌ , the optimizer calculates penalty costs of $1500. For the second segment, you define penalty costs of $500 and a load of ᵌ2000m . Define a gradient of one. If TRUCK001 leaves the plant with a load of 2000m ᵌ to 2500mᵌ , the optimizer calculates penalty costs between $500 and zero in accordance with the gradient. The penalties decrease in intervals of one unit for each additional cubic meter loaded onto the truck. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Execute planning to determine the means of transport
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
15
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
●
Execute planning to consolidate deliveries
●
Execute planning to enforce minimum shipping requirements
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
16
Unit 1 Lesson 4 Applying Short-Cut Planning
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, we examine short-cut planning in SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM). We look also at the maintenance of the transportation requirement types, freight unit building rules, and freight orders for short-cut planning. Finally, we examine and execute short-cut planning. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Describe short-cut planning
●
Maintain integration settings for short-cut planning
●
Maintain configuration and execute short-cut planning
Short-Cut Planning Processes
Figure 12: Automatic Creation of Freight Order
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
17
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
Automatic planning allows you to automate the planning process in SAP TM. You can use this process for the following activities: ●
Automatic freight order creation
●
Automatic carrier selection
●
Automatic freight order tendering
●
Automatic quotation evaluation and carrier assignment
Short-Cut Planning Configuration
Figure 13: Freight Unit Building Rule
Freight orders can be created directly for your order-based or delivery-based transportation requirements. This is helpful when large orders already fill up a truck and do not need further consolidation or planning. The Forwarding Order Management (FWM) Business Document The system creates a freight order directly when you save an FWM business document (FO, OTR, or DTR) if the following requirements have been met: ●
●
●
The FWM business document is subcontracted and not consolidated with other FWM business documents. The FWM business document can be delivered in one freight order, meaning there is no pre-carriage or on-carriage. The FWM business document only has one source location and one destination location.
Transportation Requirement Types The automatic creation of freight units can be activated in SAP TM configuration for orderbased and delivery-based transportation requirements and forwarding orders.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
18
Lesson: Applying Short-Cut Planning
Automatic freight unit building is flagged for the desired OTR and DTR types in the context of automated planning.
Freight Unit Building Rules Automatic or direct creation of a freight order is possible via the freight unit building rule. Instead of defining a freight unit type in the freight unit building rule, a freight order type can be specified. A freight order is then created directly instead of a freight unit. No additional intervention is required by the planner in the transportation cockpit.
Freight Orders Carrier selection can be automatically triggered for a freight order by assigning process controller strategy CARR_SEL as a creation strategy to the freight order type in SAP TM configuration. When doing so, carrier selection is carried out for the freight order upon its creation. The tendering process can also be initiated using process controller strategies.
Carrier Profile Carriers are business partners that are assigned the business partner Carrier role. You characterize the transportation capabilities of a carrier with the carrier profile. This object stores information that is used in a similar constellation for multiple carriers. You create only one profile for each carrier. You can store the following objects in a carrier profile: ●
Freight code sets
●
Transportation lane and carrier-specific parameters
●
Product freight groups
●
Transportation groups
●
Equipment groups and equipment types
●
Fixed transportation costs
●
Dimension costs
You use the carrier profile when selecting a carrier. In SAP TM, to define the carrier profile, choose Master Data→ General → Define Carrier Profile. Carrier Selection Settings Definition of settings can be done in the carrier selection settings or in the transportation lane. ●
Carrier selection settings
●
Determination of costs
●
Transportation charge interpretation
●
Business share usage
●
Transportation allocation usage
●
Incompatibility usage
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
19
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
The carrier selection settings are part of the planning profile settings and are required to launch a carrier selection run. Carrier selection settings can be retrieved from the freight order type as default carrier selection settings or via a condition maintained in the freight order type customizing. Specify in the carrier selection settings that automatic tendering is to start after the carrier selection run.
Tendering Profile The tendering profile is used to define a tendering plan. It contains basic tendering data and is a prerequisite for automatic tendering. You can use a tendering profile when you manually create a tendering plan. Within the profile, you can define multi-step tendering in a tendering plan. This allows a company to mix tendering types. Profile Definitions Within the tendering profile, you can define multiple variants such as direct, peer-to-peer, and broadcast tendering. You can also decide if the rule based tendering is fully automatic or semi-automatic. The tendering profile also allows you to define the medium of tendering communication. It can be web-based, e-mail, SMS, or B2B oriented. You can identify a multi-currency setting, event monitoring, and exception based management. You can classify a fully configurable process, request for quotation (RFQ) publishing, and authorization-based RFQ processing and data visibility.
Automatic Planning Execution Automatic planning allows you to automate the planning process in SAP TM. You can use this process for: ●
Automatic freight order creation
●
Automatic carrier selection
●
Automatic freight order tendering
●
Automatic quotation evaluation and carrier assignment
When a sales order is created in SAP ERP, it is transferred to SAP TM where an order-based transportation requirement is created. If all planning steps are automated in SAP TM, no additional user intervention is needed; a freight order is automatically created and tendered to a carrier. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Describe short-cut planning
●
Maintain integration settings for short-cut planning
●
Maintain configuration and execute short-cut planning
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
20
Unit 1 Lesson 5 Creating Pooled Shipments
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you examine the process of modeling the transportation network for pooled distribution. You learn about the purpose and definition of a transshipment location. You then consider the use of the transportation network for pooled distribution to generate pooled shipments. Finally, you identify the requirement for a pooled shipment in multiple freight orders and execute planning for pooled distribution. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Model the transportation network for pooled shipments
●
Create pooled freight orders
Pooled Distribution
Figure 14: Pool Distribution
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
21
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
In the pooled distribution process, the SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) system determines whether it is more cost-effective to deliver freight directly to the customer via truckload or using a pool location to consolidate freight. The second option is cheaper yet more time-consuming. In the pool distribution process, a shipper wants to send goods from a shipping point to customers using pool or hub locations for consolidation. For planning, sales orders are created in the SAP ERP system and then transferred as order-based transportation requests into the SAP TM system. VSR Optimization in Pooled Distribution The VSR optimizer determines whether it is more cost-effective and less time-consuming to deliver freight to customers via less than truckload (LTL) directly with no consolidation allowed or to a pool location for consolidation. From there, freight can be delivered to customers via full truck load (FTL) with multiple stop offs.
Transshipment Locations
Figure 15: Transshipment Locations
A transshipment location is used for unloading goods from one vehicle resource and loading it onto another vehicle resource during the transportation process. Transshipment locations are used when different means of transport or different carriers have to be used in the transportation process. You can also use transshipment locations when consolidating or deconsolidating goods to be transported. Definition of a Transshipment Location A transshipment location is defined by assigning a location to either another location or to a transportation zone. When you assign a transshipment location to a transportation zone, it can be used as a transshipment location by all locations that are part of that transportation zone. If you define a transshipment location and want to use it in your transportation processes, you must define transportation lanes that take the transshipment location into consideration.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
22
Lesson: Creating Pooled Shipments
Rough Planning
Figure 16: Rough Planning
Rough Planning Business Rationale ●
●
For pre- and on-carriages, rough planning is sufficient. For pre- and on-carriages, neither transportation lanes, vehicles, or schedules are required, thus reducing the effort for master data maintenance.
For many business processes, it is not important to plan complete end-to-end transportation in detail. For example, it may be important to find the right flights, but if the airport can be reached within a predefined time interval, the planning for this stage of the journey does not need to be planned with the same precision. The assignment of transshipment locations to transportation zones (entry or exit point into a transportation network) allows planners to specify a duration that can be used for rough planning. This means that a detailed transportation network (transportation lanes, for example) is not required for pre or oncarriage. Transshipment locations are defined only as entry and exit points in the network. If entry and exit points are connected indirectly via schedules or freight bookings, the transshipment points for these do not have to be defined as transshipment locations (from SAP TM 9.0). If stages are maintained (via transportation proposal or manually) constraints resulting from stage information can be considered or respected.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
23
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
Transportation Lanes
Figure 17: Transportation Lanes
A transportation lane represents a relationship between two locations, two transportation zones, or a combination of locations and zones. It connects two locations or all locations within the zones for a specific means of transport. You use this business object when planning distribution and procurement between different locations. A transportation lane is defined by a source location or zone, a destination location or zone, and a means of transport. You can assign carriers to the transportation lane. A transportation lane points only in one direction. To model the reverse direction, you need to create another transportation lane. Editing a Transportation Lane You can change or display transportation lanes that you have defined in SAP TM by choosing Master Data→ Transportation Network→ Define Transportation Lane. You can also view and edit multiple transportation lanes on Mass theMaint. (Display/Change) tab. Transportation lanes are used in transportation processes such as dispatching or subcontracting. The origin and destination locations, carrier, and means of transport are assigned to the transportation lane.
Multi-Stage Transportation The VSR optimizer evaluates the various possibilities for transporting the selected freight units. It then opts for pooled distribution whenever it is cost-effective to do so. In a standard pooled distribution process, the VSR optimizer creates one freight order to transport the
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
24
Lesson: Creating Pooled Shipments
cargo to the transshipment location. It then creates a second freight order to transport the cargo out of the transshipment location. Other scenarios are also possible. Multiple freight orders allow splitting up of resource assignment, carrier assignment, and other downstream planning and execution activities. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Model the transportation network for pooled shipments
●
Create pooled freight orders
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
25
Unit 1 Learning Assessment
1. Which of the following items is not a constraint considered by the VSR optimizer? Choose the correct answer. X
A Vehicle capacity
X
B Driver experience
X
C Handling resources
X
D Depot location
2. Using the planning cost settings, the optimizer can determine the best means of transport to use. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
3. The SAP TM system creates a freight order directly via the freight unit building rule when you save an FWM business document if the FWM business document only has one source location and one destination location, if the FWM business document is subcontracted and not consolidated with other FWM business documents, and if the FWM business document can be delivered in one freight order, meaning there is no pre-carriage or oncarriage. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
26
Unit 1: Learning Assessment
4. To create carrier selection profiles in SAP TM, what is the correct menu path to choose? Choose the correct answer. X
A Planning→ Selection Profiles→ Create Selection Profile
X
B Planning→ Planning Profiles→ Create Planning Profile
X
C Planning→ Planning Profile Settings → Carrier Selection Settings → Create Carrier Selection Settings
X
D Planning→ Capacity Selection Settings → Create Capacity Selection Settings
5. Any freight order with more than one stage must visit at least one transshipment location. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
6. A transshipment location allows you to change the means-of-transport. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
27
Unit 1 Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Which of the following items is not a constraint considered by the VSR optimizer? Choose the correct answer. X
A Vehicle capacity
X
B Driver experience
X
C Handling resources
X
D Depot location
2. Using the planning cost settings, the optimizer can determine the best means of transport to use. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
3. The SAP TM system creates a freight order directly via the freight unit building rule when you save an FWM business document if the FWM business document only has one source location and one destination location, if the FWM business document is subcontracted and not consolidated with other FWM business documents, and if the FWM business document can be delivered in one freight order, meaning there is no pre-carriage or oncarriage. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
28
Unit 1: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. To create carrier selection profiles in SAP TM, what is the correct menu path to choose? Choose the correct answer. X
A Planning→ Selection Profiles→ Create Selection Profile
X
B Planning→ Planning Profiles→ Create Planning Profile
X
C Planning→ Planning Profile Settings → Carrier Selection Settings → Create Carrier Selection Settings
X
D Planning→ Capacity Selection Settings → Create Capacity Selection Settings
5. Any freight order with more than one stage must visit at least one transshipment location. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
6. A transshipment location allows you to change the means-of-transport. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
29
UNIT 2 Optimizer Applications
Lesson 1 Creating a Transportation Proposal
31
Lesson 2 Describing Load Optimization Processes
34
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
Plan freight orders using transportation proposals
●
Create a vehicle for load optimization
●
Create freight units for load optimization
●
Maintain load planning settings
●
Perform load planning
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
30
Unit 2 Lesson 1 Creating a Transportation Proposal
LESSON OVERVIEW This lesson provides an overview of the transportation proposal functionality offered by SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM). LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Plan freight orders using transportation proposals
Transportation Proposals A transportation proposal defines how a freight unit can be transported through a transportation network (which is defined by locations, transshipment locations, transportation zones, transportation lanes, vehicle resources, schedules, and bookings). For a given transportation demand (freight unit), the system determines a set of alternative transportation proposals. The transportation proposal functionality serves the following purposes: ●
●
To help the user identify the different transportation options for a freight unit. In a complex network, in which end-to-end transportation requires several stages, transportation proposals are an easy way to make the different options transparent. Transportation proposals can differ in relation to routing, means of transport, and time required. Each of these variables can increase or reduce costs, and the proposals thus provide the planner responsible with the necessary information to make an appropriate choice. To create the stages upfront, for example, to choose the option of ocean transport, because the customer has placed their order well in advance and this is the cheapest choice. In this use case, no freight orders are created based on the proposal result, but only the stage information is stored. This allows the task of planning the different stages to be assigned to different planners and to be completed at different times.
Figure 18: Visualization Of Transportation Proposals
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
31
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
Entry Points for Transportation Proposal Determination The entry points for transportation proposal determination are as follows: ●
Forwarding Order→ Stages → Actual Route→ Define Route
●
Transportation Cockpit→ Select Freight Unit(s) → Transportation Proposal
Layout of the Transportation Proposal Result The layout of the transportation proposal result screen can be flexibly configured, similar to the transportation cockpit layout. The results can be displayed in a table format or visualized on a map. If the transportation proposal has been carried out for several freight units (because these compete for the same capacity, for example), the solution is always for a valid combination of assignments. In the table-based layout, each stage is shown in a separate line. In complex networks, there could be millions of routing options for a given transport, with only minor differences between them. Depending on the objective of the planner, results can be presented according to defined criteria. Transportation Proposal: User-Defined Preferences ●
Route variation
●
Carrier variation
●
Departure date variation
●
Time relevance
●
Cost variance
Preferences can be weighed against each other on the basis of relevance: none, low, medium, or high.
Figure 19: Transportation Proposal User Interface
Features of the Transportation Proposal The features of the transportation proposal are as follows:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
32
Lesson: Creating a Transportation Proposal
●
●
●
Implicit definition of transshipment locations by schedules and freight bookings (simplified definition of transportation network) Mode of transport constraints on freight unit and freight unit stage level Fast determination of transportation proposals, yielding more alternatives according to predefined variation criteria (for example, route, carrier, and departure date), and trade-off between time and cost (controlled variation according to pre-defined criteria)
●
Consideration of preferences for locations, carrier, mode of transport, dates, and times.
●
Display of multiple solutions on the result map
●
Rough planning (detailed planning on the main leg and rough planning for pre leg and subsequent leg, based on rough definition of transportation durations)
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Plan freight orders using transportation proposals
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
33
Unit 2 Lesson 2 Describing Load Optimization Processes
LESSON OVERVIEW This lesson examines the necessary maintenance of capacity master data for load maintenance. You learn about freight unit creation for load optimization, and you can create a vehicle for load optimization. You look at freight unit dimensions and can practise creating freight units for load optimization. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Create a vehicle for load optimization
●
Create freight units for load optimization
●
Maintain load planning settings
●
Perform load planning
Load Optimization During truck planning, rules are applied to fulfill legal restrictions. For example, certain axle loads may not be exceeded. In addition, a certain loading sequence of the goods to be transported optimizes the transportation plan. Load planning concerns the loading of goods to be transported in an optimized manner into a transportation unit, be it be a truck, trailer, or container resource. You can plan the loading space of box trucks, trailers, semi-trailers, and containers in the transportation cockpit or directly in one of the following business documents: ●
Road freight order
●
Trailer unit
●
Container unit
Planning is carried out at the level of business document items. Load planning returns an approximate calculation of how the available loading space can be optimally used, taking into account the maximum axle loads and the maximum weight of a vehicle resource. The calculation is based on the master data that you enter for the resource. In automatic load planning, also known as load optimization, the load optimizer creates a load plan for your business document. It considers capacity restrictions in terms of the height, width, weight, and length of the loading space. For vehicle resources with two axle groups, it also considers the maximum axle load.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
34
Lesson: Describing Load Optimization Processes
Vehicle Capacity
Figure 20: Vehicle Capacity
Vehicle Capacity Attributes ●
●
●
VSR: -
One-dimensional, for example, volume or mass.
-
Up to eight dimensions.
VSO: -
Three-dimensional, for example, pallet or box size.
-
Visual representation.
Vehicle capacity is maintained in vehicle resource master data.
In vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) planning, SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) considers the resource capacities of weight and volume. However, the new load planning function requires much more information on master data level. Not only are weight and volume limitations considered more precisely, but weight distribution of axles is also planned. This is required to fulfill legal restrictions when creating a load plan. Within the resource master data, on Physical the Properties tab, there are additional capacity and resource configuration fields to maintain. You can specify attributes regarding dimension, weight, and type of resource. One specific attribute is the definition of axle groups. From SAP TM 9.1, a resource viewer (master data transaction) is offered to display the resource configuration.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
35
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
Vehicle Types
Figure 21: Vehicle Types Example 1: Box Truck
The table, Box Truck, provides a detailed explanation of the elements of the figure, Vehicle Types Example 1: Box Truck: Table 1: Box Truck Measurement in Figure
Name in the Master Data Description
a1
Axle Group Distance 1
Distance between axle group 1 and the front of the box truck
c
Cargo body distance
Distance between the start of the loading space and the front of the box truck
a2
Axle Group Distance 2
Distance between axle group 2 and the front of the box truck
d
Connector Distance
Distance between the trailer coupling of the box truck and the front of the vehicle
s2
Distance Between Axles
Distance within axle group 2
h
Interior Height
Height of the loading space
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
36
Lesson: Describing Load Optimization Processes
Measurement in Figure
Name in the Master Data Description
l
Interior Length
Length of the loading space
Vehicle Types Example 2: Semi-Trailer
Figure 22: Vehicle Types Example 2: Semi-Trailer
The table, Semi-Trailer, provides a detailed explanation of the elements of the figure, Vehicle Types Example 2: Semi-Trailer: Table 2: Semi-Trailer Measurement in Figure
Name in the Master Data Description
a1
Axle Group Distance 1
Distance between axle group 1 and the front of the trailer
s1
Distance Between Axles
Distance within axle group 1
k
King Pin Distance
Distance between the king pin and the front of the trailer
h
Interior Height
Height of the loading space
l
Interior Length
Length of the loading space
p
Split Deck Position
Position in the trailer at which you have added the split deck
Freight Unit Dimensions Dimensions of individual packages are determined from the business document items; that is, freight unit items are the basis for load planning and load optimization in the transportation cockpit.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
37
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
The following are relevant dimensions: ●
Length
●
Height
●
Width
●
Gross weight
Load Planning Settings Load planning settings define a process controller strategy. This strategy defines a sequence of methods to be executed for the load planning and enables a flexible combination of standard and custom logic. With the strategy, it is possible to define a set of rules to be applied when optimizing the load. The rules can be given a priority, deactivated to test the planning with a different rule set, and adjusted with certain attributes. Load Planning Settings Definition ●
Load planning strategy
●
Load optimization runtime
●
Load planning rules (including their priorities and parameters)
Load planning settings are assigned in the planning profile. By assigning a planning profile in the freight order type, different load planning settings can be used for different freight order types.
Load Planning Rules In automatic load planning, you can define rules to be considered by the system during a load optimization run. You can choose between the following types of rules: ●
Rules that apply to automatic planning for all resource types
●
Rules that apply only to the automatic load planning of box trucks
●
Rules that apply only to the automatic planning of trailers and semi-trailers
●
Rules that apply only to the automatic load planning of the upper decks of double-deck trailers
You can define different rules for the lower and upper deck of double-deck trailers. The combination of stack, row, and line indicates the exact position of each package loaded onto the resource. Packages loaded on top of each other form a stack. Packages loaded next to each other from left to right form a row. The first row of a deck is always placed towards the start of the loading space. Packages loaded one behind the other from front to back form a line. The first line of a deck is always on the left side of the deck in the direction of travel. Rules for Load Planning ●
Stack height ascending in driving direction
●
Stack height descending in driving direction
●
Maximum height difference of adjacent stacks
●
Maximum height difference of stacks within a row
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
38
Lesson: Describing Load Optimization Processes
●
Maximum height difference of stacks within a line
●
Penalty for packages that cannot be loaded based on weight
●
Penalty for packages that cannot be loaded based on weight multiplied by volume
●
Packages with high density must be at the bottom of the stack
●
Packages can be positioned anywhere in the stack regardless of weight and density
Features of Load Planning Rules
Figure 23: Load Planning Rules Example: Loading Pattern
Load planning rules are characterized by the following features: ●
Loading pattern
●
Orientation
Transportation Cockpit The transportation cockpit layout can be enhanced to perform the following activities: ●
Initiate load planningOrdersscreen ( area).
●
Initiate load planningTransportation ( Unitscreen area).
●
Visualize and analyze load planing Order ( Detailsscreen area).
●
Explain the load planning result Visibilitybutton). (
Load Planning The load plan is the result of load planning. It provides you with an overview of how the loading space available for transporting a business document is used currently.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
39
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
In both the transportation cockpit and in the business document, you can display the complete load plan as a 3D load plan or a table load plan of business document items. In the 3D load plan, you can show or hide individual objects as well as entire rows, columns, or stacks and fill them with different colors. Furthermore, you can show and hide gridlines in your decks in the 3D load plan. If items cannot be loaded, the load plan includes information on the loading sequence and the exact position on the vehicle. In addition to the load plan, a load distribution is available for each axle and the complete vehicle. This document proves that the load plan fulfills legal requirements. An additional tab holds statistical indicators such as the used volume and area. The Load Plan The load plan contains the following information about the business document item: ●
Resource
●
Item in the resource
●
Loading sequence
●
Row, stack, and level in the loading space
●
Gross weight
●
Height, width, and length
●
Stackability
Load Plan Analysis The following is the load distribution and statistical data based on the current load plan: ●
Number of loaded business document items
●
Used area on the lower deck of your double-deck trailer
●
Utilization of the loading volume in percent
●
Used area on the upper deck of your double-deck trailer
●
Maximum weight for each axle group compared to the current weight for each axle group
●
Maximum trailing load compared to the current trailing load
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Create a vehicle for load optimization
●
Create freight units for load optimization
●
Maintain load planning settings
●
Perform load planning
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
40
Unit 2 Learning Assessment
1. Why is rough planning sometimes sufficient for pre- and on-carriage? Choose the correct answer. X
A Main carriage is the only portion of a transportation route that ever requires planning.
X
B Pre-carriage and on-carriage are planned by the shipper and the customer respectively, no detailed plans are required.
X
C A carrier or LSP may be extremely familiar with the routes for pre-carriage, for example from a warehouse to an airport. The same degree of planning is therefore not required for each individual shipment.
X
D Pre-carriage and on-carriage must always be planned with the same degree of detail as the main carriage.
2. Which of the following can be expressed as preferences for a transportation proposal? Choose the correct answers. X
A Route variation
X
B Departure date variation
X
C Driver preference
X
D Incompatibilities
3. Which of the following load planning rules are available in SAP TM 9.1? Choose the correct answers. X
A Stack height ascending in driving direction
X
B Packages with high density must be on top of the stack
X
C Maximum height difference of packages in one row
X
D U.S. Federal Bridge Formula
X
E Truck: Load all packages with the same loading formula
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
41
Unit 2: Learning Assessment
4. Load planning considers the business document items to determine the dimensions of the individual packages. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
5. For which of the following documents can you execute load planning? Choose the correct answers. X
A Freight order
X
B Transportation unit
X
C Forwarding order
X
D Handling resource
6. Load optimization can consider only one planning rule. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
42
Unit 2 Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Why is rough planning sometimes sufficient for pre- and on-carriage? Choose the correct answer. X
A Main carriage is the only portion of a transportation route that ever requires planning.
X
B Pre-carriage and on-carriage are planned by the shipper and the customer respectively, no detailed plans are required.
X
C A carrier or LSP may be extremely familiar with the routes for pre-carriage, for example from a warehouse to an airport. The same degree of planning is therefore not required for each individual shipment.
X
D Pre-carriage and on-carriage must always be planned with the same degree of detail as the main carriage.
2. Which of the following can be expressed as preferences for a transportation proposal? Choose the correct answers. X
A Route variation
X
B Departure date variation
X
C Driver preference
X
D Incompatibilities
3. Which of the following load planning rules are available in SAP TM 9.1? Choose the correct answers. X
A Stack height ascending in driving direction
X
B Packages with high density must be on top of the stack
X
C Maximum height difference of packages in one row
X
D U.S. Federal Bridge Formula
X
E Truck: Load all packages with the same loading formula
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
43
Unit 2: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. Load planning considers the business document items to determine the dimensions of the individual packages. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
5. For which of the following documents can you execute load planning? Choose the correct answers. X
A Freight order
X
B Transportation unit
X
C Forwarding order
X
D Handling resource
6. Load optimization can consider only one planning rule. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
44
UNIT 3 Advanced Transportation Network
Lesson 1 Creating Schedules
46
Lesson 2 Analyzing the Results of the Path Finder
51
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
Create carrier schedules
●
Generate departures
●
Use the Path Finder to analyze results
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
45
Unit 3 Lesson 1 Creating Schedules
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn about carrier schedules, schedule types, and schedule capacities. You create a carrier schedule before you examine and generate departures. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Create carrier schedules
●
Generate departures
Carrier Schedules
Figure 24: Sailing Schedule with Gateway (CFS)
When shipping products via air or ocean, consider that your partners are typically renting space at a port facility. This facility is used by many parties, and so options for moving product may be limited. While the road-based scenario can make use of a variety of transportation lanes due to the flexibility of the carriers, ocean and air carriers often face more competition and more
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
46
Lesson: Creating Schedules
regulation. This limits the flexibility for departures and arrivals. From a transportation planning perspective, the implication is that you may need a more structured and predictable plan for scheduling purposes. With SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM), your organization can take advantage of different types of schedules to model specific departure and arrival rules suited to air and ocean shipping. Carrier Schedules for Actual Transportation Carrier schedules represent the actual transportation executed by the schedule vehicle, be it by plane, vessel, train, or truck. Usually, these schedules involve stopping at locations such as ports and airports that are used commonly and shared by many different carriers. Flights for air transportation and vessel voyages for ocean are examples of carrier schedules. Carrier schedules can also be truck schedules. Location and time information are relevant to a schedule. For example, the planner asks the following questions: ●
When and from where does the plane depart?
●
When do you have to be there to board it?
●
When will it arrive?
●
Which carrier is responsible for the transportation?
●
What can be transported?
Carrier schedules do not just have a start and end destination; they can have multiple stops, which is common for air transportation. Carrier schedules can be executed by different carriers on different stages using a connection schedule. It is possible to use a multi-stop carrier schedule in any sequential location combination, so it is not required to start at the first and leave at the last location. Schedules can be created manually in SAP TM and uploaded from an external source. You can also upload schedules from an external data source to SAP TM by calling function module /SCMTMS/BAPI_SCHEDULE_SAVEMULT. This function is available for the sea, air, and road transportation modes. Alternatively, you can upload schedules for the air transportation mode in a spreadsheet or CSV format to SAP TM by executing report / SCMTMS/SCH_UPLOAD. For more information, see the system documentation. You can delete schedules created manually and uploaded by calling function module / SCMTMS/BAPI_SCHEDULE_DELMULTI or by executing report /SCMTMS/SCH_DELETION.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
47
Unit 3: Advanced Transportation Network
Schedule Types
Figure 25: Overview of Schedules
SAP TM allows businesses to create different schedule types to handle the multiple shipping scenarios they may encounter. Schedules can be maintained for each business partner or carrier, and can identify different loading and unloading points, such as ports and airports. If you have reappearing transportation traffic in your transportation network scenario, you can use the schedules functionality. A combination of transportation mode, gateway customer fact sheets (CFS), direct, and reference fields define the type of schedule. A gateway schedule includes two gateway locations. In ocean scenarios, the locations could be the CFS-locations. In air scenarios, they can be the gateway locations. Gateway Schedules: Subcategories The following are the subcategories in gateway schedules: ●
Direct The schedule goes from A to B without changing the mode of transport. For example, GW Nurnberg to GW Hamburg via truck.
●
Indirect The schedule goes from A to B but the mode of transport changes. For example, GW Hamburg to GW Cape Town via truck and ocean.
Air and Ocean Scenarios: Subcategories The following are the subcategories in ocean and air scenarios:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
48
Lesson: Creating Schedules
●
Sailing schedules with vessel information
●
Master flight schedules with aircraft information
Carrier schedules describe a sequence of transportation stops where the start location and the target stop are not gateways. A gateway is a transportation hub where freight is consolidated and deconsolidated. Carrier Schedules ●
Ocean Carrier Schedule Use the ocean carrier schedule to define a standard sequence of transportation stops that are served by a ship. By specifying departure rules, you can generate voyages automatically.
●
Carrier Flight Schedule Use the carrier flight schedule to define a standard sequence of transportation stops that are served by a plane. By specifying departure rules, you can generate flights automatically.
●
Road Schedule Use the road schedule to define a standard sequence of transportation stops that are served by a truck.
Schedule Capacities In the schedule type, you can define if the schedule should have the following items assigned to it: ●
Limited capacities
●
Transportation costs
Departure Calendar By specifying departure rules in carrier schedules, you can generate voyages, flights, and departures automatically. The system calculates the arrival and departure dates and times at each transportation stop in the sequence, taking into account the transit duration, cut-off times, and availability of the goods for each stop. You can then modify each generated voyage individually. You can define the following durations and times for each stop: ●
Transit duration
●
Length of stay
●
Cargo cut-off time
●
Availability time
You can generate concrete departures from your departure rule and adjust them individually for each departure if required. You can define departure rules at schedule or transportation stage level for carrier schedules and gateway schedules. You can also apply departure rules from a referenced carrier schedule to a gateway schedule.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
49
Unit 3: Advanced Transportation Network
Automatic Calculation of Times In theDeparture Rules screen area of your schedule, if you selectAuto the Fill Timescheckbox and specify particular times for various transportation stages, the system calculates the missing times for the various transportation stages of the departure rule automatically. It also takes the different time zones of each of the locations into account. In carrier schedules, for example, the system uses the arrival time at the destination location of the first transportation stage and the length of stay at the destination location of the first destination stage to calculate the departure time at the source location of the second transportation stage.
Departures Possible Alterations to Departures (Voyages, Flights, Trips) The following alterations can be made to departures: ●
Created
●
Changed
●
Deleted
Changes to Each Departure Changes can be made to each departure in the following areas: ●
The location sequence
●
Dates and times
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Create carrier schedules
●
Generate departures
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
50
Unit 3 Lesson 2 Analyzing the Results of the Path Finder
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you examine transportation network complexity and consider the use and benefits of the path finder in transportation planning. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Use the Path Finder to analyze results
Transportation Network Complexity Scenario building can be time consuming. Scenario validation, especially for transportation optimization, is even more time consuming. The planner needs to establish if all elements of the transportation network are maintained correctly to enable the optimizer to find a valid solution. You can use the path finder function to search for legs in your transportation network and take the following considerations into account during the process: ●
Locations
●
Transshipment locations
●
Transportation lanes
●
Schedules
●
Transportation zones
The path finder enables you to easily determine whether a connection exists between two locations and, therefore, whether you have correctly configured your master data. However, the path finder does not take incompatibilities into consideration. Path Finder Execution You can execute the path finder and check the result in either the transportation network cockpit or on the transportation proposals user interface. ●
Transportation Network Cockpit When you open the context menu for a location in the transportation network cockpit, you can chooseFind Path To Locationand enter a destination in the displayed dialog box. The system then calculates all of the available connections in the transportation network and displays them on the map. The color of the connections indicates whether a valid transportation lane or schedule exists.
●
Transportation Proposals
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
51
Unit 3: Advanced Transportation Network
When you call the user interface for transportation proposals, you can choose the appropriate button to show or hide the available connections on the map. As in the transportation network cockpit, the color of the connections indicates whether a valid transportation lane or schedule exists. ●
Explanation Tool When you select one or more freight units, you can choose Show Network Path to analyze the underlying transportation network that is taken into account when planning the selected freight units.
Path Finder Report ●
●
●
Requests -
Source location
-
Destination location
Options -
Determine path
-
Determine connections
Restrictions -
Outbound, inbound, or implicit hub
-
Transportation mode
-
Means of transport
Path Finder Report: /SCMTMS/FIND_TN_PATH The required input for the tool is a start and a destination location. Using assigned transshipment locations and existing connections (transportation lanes, schedules, and booking), the path finder tries to find all paths. The result indicates if there is a valid connection or not (all existing are listed) for each stage of a path. It is thus easy to find out if you have assigned a transshipment location, but if it cannot be reached from your start location. The report has some limitations. For example, it is not possible to search within a certain timeframe and respect the validity of the connections. Also, transportation mode and meansof-transport filters are not available and incompatibilities are not considered. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Use the Path Finder to analyze results
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
52
Unit 3 Learning Assessment
1. Carrier schedules can reference a corresponding schedule. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
2. What is the minimum number of locations required to define a carrier schedule? Choose the correct answer. X
A 1
X
B 2
X
C 3
X
D 4
3. The path finder can be used to visualize proposals. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
53
Unit 3 Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Carrier schedules can reference a corresponding schedule. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
2. What is the minimum number of locations required to define a carrier schedule? Choose the correct answer. X
A 1
X
B 2
X
C 3
X
D 4
3. The path finder can be used to visualize proposals. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
54
UNIT 4 Transportation Unit Planning
Lesson 1 Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
56
Lesson 2 Planning Transportation Units with Passive Vehicle Resources
64
Lesson 3 Planning Transportation Units with the Optimizer
68
Lesson 4 Planning Transportation with Container Units
71
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
Create passive vehicle resources
●
Analyze transportation units
●
Create transportation units
●
Outline transportation unit planning
●
Apply optimizer settings to passive vehicle resources
●
Create container units
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
55
Unit 4 Lesson 1 Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn about passive vehicle resources and their creation in SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM). You then examine transportation units and learn how to analyze rail units. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Create passive vehicle resources
●
Analyze transportation units
Means of Transport The figure, Transportation Resources: Mode of Transport and Means of Transport, provides information about the means of transport in SAP TM.
Figure 26: Transportation Resources: Mode of Transport and Means of Transport
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
56
Lesson: Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
Transportation Resources ●
●
●
Mode of Transport (MoT): For example, road or sea. Means of Transport (MTr): For example, railcar, truck, refrigerated truck, less than truckload (LTL), full truckload (FTL), barge, and vessel. Vehicles and resources: For example, maintenance of capacities and depot locations for individual vehicles.
Passive Vehicle Resources
Figure 27: Vehicle Resources
Depending on the means of transport, a vehicle resource can be modeled with or without capacity and may be active or passive, as follows: ●
Active The vehicle resource can move by itself.
●
Passive The vehicle resource must be pulled by another resource.
MTr combinations can be used to model truck and trailer combinations.
Vehicle Types ●
●
●
You can define your vehicle resources, such as railcars and trailers, as resources with the necessary details in the master data. Alternatively, you can also define a vehicle group and type for railcars and trailers that contains only general information about these vehicles. You can define a vehicle type and group in the freight unit building rule. This means that the rule can be used to create a container, railcar, or transportation unit depending on the equipment or vehicle group category.
Vehicle Group and Vehicle Type The vehicle and vehicle group types specify attributes such as the physical properties of a certain kind of vehicle. When you have created a vehicle type you can do the following:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
57
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
●
●
Use the type as a template to create vehicle resources, copying the attributes of the type to the new resource. Request a special type of vehicle resource in a forwarding order or in a booking order. This is similar to the function already available for container groups and types.
Parameters for Vehicle Resources You can define, among others, the following parameters for vehicle resources: ●
Passive Means of Transport You can define vehicle resources that cannot move by themselves. In Customizing, select the Passive Means of Transport checkbox for the means of transport that is assigned to the vehicle resource.
●
Vehicle Combination You can combine means of transport to create vehicle combinations.
Means-of-Transport Combinations
Figure 28: Compartments and Trailers
A means of transport combination is an instance of a particular means of transport, or a group of identical instances of means of transport, that can provide transportation services. You use this business object to map the capacity and availability of vehicles that you want to use for transportation. MTr combinations have the following attributes: ●
They can be used to model a truck and trailer combination.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
58
Lesson: Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
●
●
●
●
You can specify the number of the objects of each MTr within the combination. For example, one truck and two trailers. You specify capacities (several units of measure (UoM)): Maximum capacities of the combination. Additional (freely definable) attributes can be used for compatibilities and incompatibilities, based on a customizable attribute definition (code + text). Coupling or uncoupling durations are defined per passive MTr.
Transportation Units Table 3: Transportation Unit (TU) Feature
Freight Unit
Transportation UnitFreight Order
Represents demand +
+
-
Default route to de+ fine stages
+
-
Provides capacity
-
+
+
Different quantities per stage
-
+
+
Cargo management -
+
+
Subcontracting
-
+
-
Using the transportation unit business document, you can depict transport requirements or capacity, for example: ●
A trailer and its load
●
The capacity of a railcar or several railcars that are transported together
●
A container and its load
You use the transportation unit to consolidate freight units. You can then plan the transportation unit as a unit for several transportation stages. That is, you can assign it to one or more freight orders. Within the transportation unit type, you configure the most important settings for the transportation unit. For example, you use the transportation unit category to indicate whether you want to create the transportation unit type for a trailer, a railcar, or a container. When you then create the related business document, such as a trailer unit, for example, the system offers you only the relevant transportation units.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
59
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
Document Structure with Transportation Units
Figure 29: Document Structure with Transportation Unit
Document Structure with Transportation Units: An Explanation Table 4: Document Structure with Transportation Units: An Explanation The following table provides explanatory information about the figure, Document Structure with Transportation Units. Transportation Order
Structure
Trailer TU 1
●
Contains FU 1 and FU 2
●
Defines own stages
Mover FO 1
●
Covers 1 TU stage
Mover FO 2
●
Covers 2 TU stages
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
60
Lesson: Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
Trailer Units
Figure 30: Trailer Units
TU is a new document or object in SAP TM. The planning features for tractor and trailer resources are in the Transportation Cockpit. The TU was introduced in SAP TM 9.0. A TU is a document that represents a trailer, such as a passive vehicle resource. The trailer document is used for certain logistical activities, such as a trailer swap scenario where the same physical trailer is used to transport goods with multiple tractors, or a scenario where the trailer is loaded first and then it is routed through a network of trailer exchange locations. The trailer document represents both of the following: ●
A capacity that can be used to transport freight units
●
A transportation demand that requires a freight order to be moved
The Trailer Unit The logistical processing of transports with trailers comprises of trailer units. You require a trailer unit if a trailer is moved by more than one tractor. In the transportation unit type, you configure the most important settings for the trailer units. You cannot perform subcontracting for trailer units. Trailer units contain the following information: ●
General Data (such as locations and dates) You can enter one-time locations at stage level. The system stores these new locations and adjusts stages in the document. It also adjusts the locations in the assigned execution documents.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
61
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
●
Transportation Stages On theStagestab, you can see the following information:
●
-
Assignment of the trailer to one or more tractors
-
The route the trailer takes
-
Transportation stage types
Freight On theFreighttab, you can see the following information:
●
-
Quantities and weights
-
Goods information
-
Dangerous goods information
-
Seal information
-
Information about foreign trade
Overview The Overviewtab is an integrated view of the Stagesand Freighttabs. It contains the following information: -
Assignment of the trailer to one or more tractors
-
The route the trailer takes
-
The maximum utilization as well as planned departure and arrival times
Trailer units also contain the following information: ●
Execution information, such as, actual departure times.
●
Document dependencies and predecessor and successor documents (document flow).
●
Status information and blocking information.
Rail Car Units A railcar unit makes up the logistic processing of transports with railcars. It describes the assignment of cargo to a railcar. A railcar unit can comprise of one or more railcars. If a customer orders a full carload and you have already defined the railcar items in the forwarding order, the system can create a railcar unit instead of a freight unit during freight unit building. The relevant item in the forwarding order must be a passive vehicle resource type and you must have entered a transportation unit in the freight unit building rule. If you have not already created the railcar items in the forwarding order, you can use the railcar unit as a consolidation document. This means that the freight unit is created based on a product item. You then assign this product freight unit to the railcar unit. Alternatively, you can assign the freight unit directly to a railcar that you have created in the rail freight order. A railcar unit must be assigned to a rail freight order before you can carry out the follow-on processes. You can assign the individual stages for the railcar unit to one or more rail freight orders. You cannot subcontract railcar units. The railcar unit is used only for logistical purposes and for the assignment of different subcontracting documents.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
62
Lesson: Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
Within the transportation unit type, you configure the most important settings for the railcar unit. Railcar units contain the same information as trailer units. The following points are variances: ●
●
General Data -
Source location and destination location (rail)
-
Number of railcars
-
Number of assigned rail freight orders
Resources and Equipment -
Position of a railcar in the train
-
Equipment group and type
-
Railcar details such as whether the railcar belongs to the shipper or the carrier
-
Information about seals. The handling execution status and the cargo execution behave in the same way as for rail freight orders.
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Create passive vehicle resources
●
Analyze transportation units
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
63
Unit 4 Lesson 2 Planning Transportation Units with Passive Vehicle Resources
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn about the manual creation of transportation units. You practise creating a transportation unit with a passive vehicle resource, and then examine freight orders with transportation units. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Create transportation units
●
Outline transportation unit planning
Manual Creation of Transportation Units Transportation Unit Creation ●
●
Options for manual creation: -
In the transportation cockpit
-
Via a separate transaction in freight order management
Options for automatic creation: -
Via freight unit building rules
-
Via the VSR optimizer
Transportation units can be created via the following options: ●
Manual creation in the transportation cockpit You create a trailer unit by assigning existing transportation stages (that is, freight units) to a trailer (document or resource).
●
Manual creation on the user interface for creating trailer units You create the trailer unit and enter the items Freight via Order Management → Road → Trailer Unit→ Create Trailer Unit .
●
Automatic creation from a transportation requirement (OTR, DTR, FWO) If, instead of creating freight units, you want to create trailer units automatically from your forwarding order (FWO), enter a transportation unit type in the freight unit building rule. This function is also available for order-based requirements (OTR) and delivery-based transportation requirements (DTR).
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
64
Lesson: Planning Transportation Units with Passive Vehicle Resources
Transportation Unit Planning
Figure 31: Transportation Unit Planning
The figure, Transportation Unit Planning, examines transportation unit planning processes in SAP TM.
Freight Orders with Transportation Units The figure, Freight Orders with Transportation Units, provides information about freight orders with transportation units in SAP TM.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
65
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
Figure 32: Freight Orders with Transportation Units
Train Composition Rail freight orders make up the logistical processing of transports with trains. A rail freight order can model a train with one or more locomotives and one or more railcars. You can execute rail freight orders or award them as a subcontract. A rail freight order includes the following items: ●
Locomotives (Vehicle Resources) If a train has several locomotives, you can model them using multi-items. During planning, the system considers only the main locomotive that you have specified at header level. The other locomotives are not taken into account during scheduling or when considering incompatibilities.
●
Railcars (Passive Vehicle Resources) Railcar items can either result from the assigned railcar units or be created directly in the rail freight order. The latter is true in less complex scenarios.
●
Cargo You assign cargo items to your railcars.
Rail Freight Order Structure General Data
●
-
-
Source location and destination location (rail) Number of railcars. The actual number of railcars is displayed here. If you have agreed scale prices with your carrier, you can enter the number of railcars for the respective scale as the rating value once you have confirmed this with the carrier. The system then
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
66
Lesson: Planning Transportation Units with Passive Vehicle Resources
calculates the tariff based on this amount instead of the actual value. When doing so, it considers the calculation basis and rate table that you have defined. -
●
Indicates if there are multiple executing carriers
Items -
Position of a railcar in the train
-
Equipment group and type
-
Railcar details, such as whether the railcar belongs to the shipper or the carrier
The Itemstab page replaces the Cargoand Equipmenttab pages. You can personalize your user interface so that the system displays the old tab pages. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Create transportation units
●
Outline transportation unit planning
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
67
Unit 4 Lesson 3 Planning Transportation Units with the Optimizer
LESSON OVERVIEW This lesson examines the planning profiles and settings required to execute the optimizer in SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM). LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Apply optimizer settings to passive vehicle resources
Planning Profiles Planning profiles are used to influence and control the outcome of the optimizer. A planning profile must be specified for an optimizer run and takes into account the various settings of the profile. These settings control different steps of the optimization process. There are several sub-profiles which must be created for use in the planning profile. There are a number of planning profile assignments, as follows: ●
Selection profile for transportation units
●
Selection profile for freight orders
●
Selection profile for freight bookings
●
Capacity selection settings
●
Optimizer settings
●
Load planning settings
●
Planning cost settings
●
Incompatibility settings
●
Carrier selection settings
Capacity Selection Settings ●
Vehicle resources
●
Container resources
●
Schedules
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
68
Lesson: Planning Transportation Units with the Optimizer
Incompatibility Settings
Figure 33: Incompatibility Settings
The figure, Incompatibility Settings, provides information about incompatibility settings in SAP TM.
Automatic Planning
Figure 34: Optimizer Constraints
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
69
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
The vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimizer can create trailer documents as a result of considering all constraints. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Apply optimizer settings to passive vehicle resources
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
70
Unit 4 Lesson 4 Planning Transportation with Container Units
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn about freight unit creation using equipment types. You examine container consolidation and container unit planning in the transportation planning process. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Create container units
Equipment Types
Figure 35: Equipment Types
Equipment types are the most integral part of the entire shipping industry. These shipping containers store the various products that need to be shipped from one part of the world to another.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
71
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
Depending on the type of products that are shipped or the special services needed for them, equipment types may vary in dimension, structure, materials, or construction. Various types of shipping containers are used to meet the diverse requirements of the cargo shipping world. The following are some of the most common types of shipping containers in use today: ●
Dry storage containers
●
Flat rack containers
●
Open-top containers
●
Tunnel containers
●
Open-side containers
●
Double-door containers
●
Refrigerated containers
●
Insulated and Thermal containers
Resources and Equipment Types In SAP TM, a resource can be linked to a piece of equipment. Equipment types determine the type of truck or equipment that is requested to carry out the shipping. When your business requires specific types of containers or equipment, you can include this factor in your business process. With SAP TM, you can define equipment groups and specify different types of shipping containers. For example, in the air industry, the term Universal Loading Device is used to describe the type of container that is appropriate depending on the type of plane that is used. In the ocean and road industry, it is the type of container or trailer that is required based on the weight or dimension of the items being shipped. In SAP TM you can define equipment groups as well as equipment types. Within an equipment group, you define different types of equipment that have various limitations based on weight, volume, or temperature. Equipment groups are specific to a transportation mode. Depending on the assigned transportation mode, you can enter values for ocean-specific or land-specific containers, or for air-specific unit load devices (ULDs).
Transportation Unit Resource An instance of a particular transportation unit, such as a container, you can use the transportation unit resource to map the capacity and availability that you want to use for transportation. You can choose up to eight dimensions and units of measurement to describe the capacity. Note that the mass and volume are predefined by default. Planning can only take the transportation unit resource capacity into account if these correspond to the dimensions and units of measurement that you define in a freight unit building rule. The equipment, and equipment group types, specify attributes such as the physical properties of a certain kind of transportation unit resource. By creating a transportation unit resource, you can do the following: ●
●
Use the type as a template to create transportation unit resources, copying the attributes of the type to a new resource. Request a special type of transportation unit resource in a forwarding order or in a booking order.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
72
Lesson: Planning Transportation with Container Units
Transportation Unit Resource ●
Master data object to represent individual containers
●
Can be created with reference to equipment group type
●
Parameters for transportation unit resource resources include the following: -
Capacity
-
Minimum number of seals
-
Physical properties
-
Downtimes
-
Grouping attributes
-
Alternative names
Container Units You can use equipment groups and types when creating forwarding orders or forwarding quotation items of the container category. Data that relates to the physical properties of the container is then available in the forwarding order and subsequent business documents for the planner. In addition, after you have entered the equipment group, the equipment type, and the number of containers in the forwarding order, the system calculates the tare weight and the capacity of the container in the twenty-foot equivalent unit (TEU), based on settings applied in Customizing. A container unit models the logistical handling of the transportation of one or several containers. Each of these containers can contain several freight units. A container unit must be assigned to a freight document before you can carry out the followon process. You assign the individual stages for the container unit to one or more freight documents. You cannot subcontract container units. The container unit is used only for logistical purposes and for the assignment of different subcontracting documents. Within the transportation unit type, you configure the most important settings for the container unit. Container units contain the same information as trailer units. Container Unit Attributes ●
●
●
General Data -
Source location and destination location
-
Number of containers
-
Number of assigned freight documents
-
Information about whether container provisioning and return is required
Freight and Container Details -
Transportation unit resource
-
Equipment group and equipment type
-
Information about whether the container is owned by the shipper
Equipment
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
73
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
-
Seal information
-
Document references
Transportation Unit Creation Using Equipment Types If a customer orders a full container and you have already defined the container items in the forwarding order, the system can create a container unit instead of a freight unit during freight unit building. The relevant item in the forwarding order must be of Passive Vehicle Resource type, and you must have entered a transportation unit in the freight unit building rule. If you have not already created the container items in the forwarding order, you can use the container unit as a consolidation document. This means that a freight unit is created based on a product item. You must assign this product freight unit to a container unit. Alternatively, you can assign the freight unit directly to a container that you have created in the freight document.
Figure 36: Transportation Unit Creation Using Equipment Types
You can also use freight unit building rules to take into account equipment groups and equipment types as well as the physical properties of your equipment when creating transportation units (TUs). During freight unit building, the system consolidates the business document items into containers and displays them as transportation units. For these TUs, the system copies the physical properties as well as the equipment group that you defined in Customizing. SAP TM only considers equipment for the business document Packageand of Product Item (schedule line) types. The system determines a freight unit building rule for these types of item, and you have specified in this freight unit building rule that the system is to copy the equipment from the business document item, an error message appears and the creation of the freight units or transportation units is cancelled.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
74
Lesson: Planning Transportation with Container Units
For example, You have forwarding order with the following two items: ●
Item 10: Ten pallets at 10,000 kilograms each
●
Item 20: Nine pallets at 9,000 kilograms each
If you use the equipment type CNT_Example in the freight unit building rule, SAP TM creates the following item: ●
Item 10: One container, CNT_EXAMPLE, gross weight: 22,000 kilograms, Tare weight: 3,000 kilograms
This item has two sub-items that correspond to the items of the forwarding order.
Incompatibilities for Container Units ●
●
●
●
●
Container unit — Container unit (vehicle : Twolevel) container units are not allowed on the same level. Container unit — Vehicle resource : A container unit is not allowed on a vehicle resource, for example, an equipment type is not allowed on a certain truck type. Container unit — Transshipment location : A container unit is not allowed to be routed via a transshipment location, for example, because of storage constraints. Container unit — Freight booking : A container unit containing hazardous goods cannot be booked on some freight bookings. Container unit — Schedule : A container unit containing hazardous goods cannot be booked on some schedules.
Manual Planning of Container Units In the Transportation cockpit, you can plan and reassign container units by busing drag and drop. Alternatively, you can reassign by selecting the relevant rows and choosing Reassignment . Table 5: Manual Planning — Container Units Source (drag)
Target (drop)
CU stage
FO (railcar unit, trailer unit) Assign CU stage to FO (railcar unit, trailer unit) and add missing locations of FO (railcar unit, trailer unit)
CU stage
Location in FO (railcar unit, Assign CU stage to FO (railtrailer unit) car unit, trailer unit) and add missing locations at position of drop location of FO (railcar unit, trailer unit)
CU stage
Compartment in FO
Assign CU stage to compartment of FO and add missing location to FO
CU stage
FB
Assign CU stage to FB and Add missing locations t CU
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
Action
75
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
In the layout settings for the Transportation cockpit, you defined a layout for which you have selected theReassignmentcheckbox on the Orders Areaor Transportation Units Area tab pages. Alternatively, you can select Reassignment the checkbox on the Hierarchies Area tab page. You select the layout that you have defined in the layout settings for the Transportation cockpit. In theFreight Orders/Freight Bookings screen area, you choose Dual View . You can now execute your reassignment activities. In Customizing, make relevant settings to configure your standard layout for reassignment in the layout settings for the transportation cockpit. The following hierarchy types are predefined for use with container units: ●
●
●
●
TUCNT for location-based reassignment of container units with the associated freight units TUCLD for location-based reassignment of container units with the associated freight documents TUCNS for reassignment of container units with the associated freight units based on the freight unit stage TUCSD for reassignment of container units with the associated freight documents based on the freight unit stage
In addition, you can define your own hierarchy types.
Container Triangulation Container triangulation can be used to save on transportation charges by combining a request for empty provisioning, and a request for empty return. For example, you have to organize the pickup and delivery of an empty container that is no longer required from a consignee, and organize the subsequent transportation of this empty container to the container yard. You have to organize the pickup of a second container of the same type from the container yard and the provisioning of this empty container to another customer. By combining both requests into one order, you have the first empty container transported directly to the second customer.
Note: Triangulation is supported for container units and railcar units only. Triangulation is not supported for trailer units.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
76
Lesson: Planning Transportation with Container Units
Figure 37: Container Triangulation
Triangulation and Transportation Units There are at least two transportation units, one for the empty provisioning and one for the empty return (movement category Empty Returnand Empty Provisioning ). The two transportation units must have the same equipment type. The transportation unit for the empty provisioning must be unplanned. You can combine a transportation unit for the empty provisioning (empty provisioning TU) and a transportation unit for the empty return (empty return TU) in a single transportation unit (triangulation transportation unit). From a technical point of view, the system keeps the empty return TU and deletes the empty provisioning TU. The new triangulation transportation unit (triangulation TU) now refers to two forwarding orders and is assigned the movement categoryTriangulation. As with any other transportation unit you can plan this transportation unit on a freight order. When you revoke triangulation, the system dissolves the triangulation TU into the two original transportation units. Triangulation is supported for unplanned transportation units only. To perform triangulation, select a container unit or a railcar unit in the personal object worklist for container units or railcar units, and choose Triangulation→ Create Triangulation . If you have selected the option for a container unit or railcar unit for the provisioning, the system automatically proposes only container units or railcar units for the return, and vice versa. You can also perform triangulation by selecting two container units, or two railcar units, (one for the provisioning and one for the return), choose Triangulation→ Create Triangulation .
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
77
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Create container units
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
78
Unit 4 Learning Assessment
1. Which of the following are the allowed transportation unit categories? Choose the correct answers. X
A Container
X
B Railcar
X
C Trailer
X
D Vehicle resource
2. How can you create transportation unit documents? Choose the correct answers. X
A Manually, using a separate transaction
X
B Automatically, using the VSR optimizer
X
C Via drag-and-drop in the transportation cockpit
X
D Via drag-and-drop in a freight unit worklist
3. Is there any limitation related to the number of active and passive vehicle resources in a truck and trailer scenario? Choose the correct answer. X
A Active vehicle resources: Exactly one; Passive vehicle resources: No limit
X
B Active vehicle resources: No limit; Passive vehicle resources: No limit
X
C Active vehicle resources: At least one; Passive vehicle resources: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
X
D Active vehicle resources: Exactly one; Passive vehicle resources: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
79
Unit 4: Learning Assessment
4. Is there any limitation related to the number of active and passive vehicle resources in a rail scenario? Choose the correct answer. X
A Train: At least one; Railcars: No limit
X
B Train: No limit; Railcars: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
X
C Train: Exactly one; Railcars: No limit
X
D Train: At least one; Railcars: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
5. In which transportation modes can you use container units? Choose the correct answers. X
A Rail
X
B Road
X
C Sea
X
D Air
X
E Pipeline
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
80
Unit 4 Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Which of the following are the allowed transportation unit categories? Choose the correct answers. X
A Container
X
B Railcar
X
C Trailer
X
D Vehicle resource
2. How can you create transportation unit documents? Choose the correct answers. X
A Manually, using a separate transaction
X
B Automatically, using the VSR optimizer
X
C Via drag-and-drop in the transportation cockpit
X
D Via drag-and-drop in a freight unit worklist
3. Is there any limitation related to the number of active and passive vehicle resources in a truck and trailer scenario? Choose the correct answer. X
A Active vehicle resources: Exactly one; Passive vehicle resources: No limit
X
B Active vehicle resources: No limit; Passive vehicle resources: No limit
X
C Active vehicle resources: At least one; Passive vehicle resources: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
X
D Active vehicle resources: Exactly one; Passive vehicle resources: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
81
Unit 4: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. Is there any limitation related to the number of active and passive vehicle resources in a rail scenario? Choose the correct answer. X
A Train: At least one; Railcars: No limit
X
B Train: No limit; Railcars: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
X
C Train: Exactly one; Railcars: No limit
X
D Train: At least one; Railcars: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
5. In which transportation modes can you use container units? Choose the correct answers. X
A Rail
X
B Road
X
C Sea
X
D Air
X
E Pipeline
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
82
UNIT 5 Carrier Selection
Lesson 1 Explaining the Carrier Selection Process
84
Lesson 2 Selecting Carriers Based on Costs and Priorities
90
Lesson 3 Using Allocations
97
Lesson 4 Using Business Shares
102
Lesson 5 Improving Carrier Utilization
106
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
Execute carrier selection
●
Define carrier costs
●
Configure carrier selection
●
Consider allocations
●
Perform carrier selection based on business shares
●
Explain continuous moves
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
83
Unit 5 Lesson 1 Explaining the Carrier Selection Process
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will execute carrier selection. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Execute carrier selection
Carrier Selection Process
Figure 38: Document Flow – Subcontracting
Carrier selection is used to determine the right combination of carrier and carrier assignments based on cost, incompatibilities, priority, and business share goals. With carrier selection, you can assign a suitable carrier to freight orders or freight bookings manually or automatically. Carrier Selection can be started from the following:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
84
Lesson: Explaining the Carrier Selection Process
●
Freight order or freight booking UI
●
Transportation Cockpit (FOR/FB List)
●
Running freight optimization report /SCMTMS/BACKGRD_PLN
●
Running carrier selection report /SCMTMS/VSR_OPT_BGD in batch or online mode
Ultimately, the carrier is assigned to the freight order.
Figure 39: Carrier Selection Process Flow
Once a freight order has been built, a shipper will need to choose (and communicate with) the business partner responsible for moving the product. We will refer to this as carrier selection. Carrier selection is used to assign a suitable carrier to your subcontractable business documents (for example, freight orders), either manually or automatically. The aim is to find a carrier with the lowest costs under consideration of the defined constraints. In manual carrier selection, you manually assign the required carrier to your business documents. If you have configured a check against transportation allocations, the system takes this into account and checks transportation capacities (transportation allocations) that you have defined for the individual carriers. If, during the allocation, the system finds relevant transportation allocations without capacity or that certain rules are violated by the allocation, warning messages appear. A separate optimization is available for automatic carrier selection. It takes selected optimization options into account when determining the most cost-effective carrier for all business documents that you have selected. If none of the carriers are available, the system does not assign any carrier to the relevant business documents.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
85
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
Figure 40: Carrier Availability
Based on the carrier availability, the lanes are maintained in SAP Transport Management (SAP TM) specific to means of transport. A carrier can be available for a lane, but may be incompatible for a specific customer who could exist on that lane. Similarly, a carrier can be incompatible with the order characteristics if, for example, an order contains hazardous items but the carrier does not have any experience in handling such items. A carrier may be maintained on a lane, but could have met the allocation requirements for the period and, for this reason, is not considered during carrier selection. The allocation requirements can be specific to a means of transport or zone hierarchy. Carrier availability can also be influenced by the purchasing organization the carrier is associated with in the freight agreement. Thus, the carrier may be available only for a specific purchasing organization within a company. This is based on the purchase organization definition in SAP TM, as defined by the individual client requirement. You can define different carriers on an inbound or outbound lane. Every lane has a validity period, and the lane-level validity applies to the carriers associated with that lane, which is specific to the means of transport. A carrier availability can be turned on and off for a specific lane by updating the validity.
Carrier Selection Strategies Strategy Options During planning in SAP TM, strategies are defined which are optimization options for carrier selection. The system takes these strategies into account during the automatic carrier selection process. You define strategies either in the transportation lane or in carrier selection settings. Initially, the system considers the appropriate transportation lane for each freight order. This allows it to consider different settings in one run. Taking strategies and settings into consideration, the optimizer then creates a carrier ranking list containing the different carrier options. The strategy options supported are as follows:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
86
Lesson: Explaining the Carrier Selection Process
●
Cost and Priority
●
Business Share
●
Transportation Allocation
●
Continuous Move
Figure 41: Carrier Selection Strategies
As well as manually assigning a carrier to a freight order, you can also use automatic carrier selection and influence it by different strategies and settings, as follows: ●
●
●
●
Cost and Priority - the cost from either transportation charge management or planning costs can be used to determine the carrier. The best carrier can be based on the following: -
Cost * Priority
-
Cost + Priority
-
Priority if no cost is to be used
-
Cost only
Business shares – if a fixed percentage of freight business is to be allocated to a certain carrier, then the business shares can be used. Transportation Allocation – if there is either a minimum or a maximum restriction that regulates how much business you are doing with a certain carrier in a certain region for a certain means of transport. Continuous Moves – combine freight documents for subcontracting to achieve lower rates.
Carrier Selection Strategies The following strategies can be used for carrier selection: ●
Cost: All carriers that meet the criteria (based on valid lane, incompatibilities, business share, and allocation) are selected and ranked in ascending order of the total cost calculated based on TCM (freight agreement, calculation sheet, rate table/scale required for the O/D pair, means of transport combination). Internal cost is maintained on the lane
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
87
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
or on the planning profile. Alternatively, the system can also be set up to assign the lowest cost carrier to the FOR based on the settings in the carrier selection profile. ●
●
●
Priority : The business decides the preferred carriers for specific lanes and assigns a priority ranking to each carrier per lane. Based on the lane settings or carrier selection profile settings, the carriers that meet the criteria mentioned are selected and ranked in descending order of their lane priorities. The highest-priority ranking (for example, 1 to 10, with 1 being the highest priority) is picked up as the number 1 carrier in the ranking list. The priority 1 carrier can then be assigned directly to the FOR based on the carrier selection settings. Cost + priority : The carriers are ranked in ascending order of their TCM/lane cost and the priority assigned on the lane. The lowest-cost carrier is selected for automatic assignment. However, for tendering, all the carriers in the ranking list are relevant (peer-to-peer/ broadcast) based on the specific flag maintained at carrier level in the lane. Cost * priority : The carriers are ranked in ascending order of their TCM/lane cost * the priority assigned on the lane. The lowest-cost carrier is selected for automatic assignment. However, for tendering, all the carriers in the ranking list are relevant (peer-to-peer/ broadcast), based on the specific flag maintained at the carrier level in the lane.
Carrier Selection Ranking When using automatic carrier selection, the system will create a carrier ranking list of the relevant carriers for a particular freight order or freight booking. For each relevant carrier, users can see a variety of information that influenced the selection process. This could include the means of transport cost, delivery performance ratings, and others. After automatic carrier selection has been performed, the ranking list will be visible in the freight order.
Figure 42: Carrier Ranking List
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
88
Lesson: Explaining the Carrier Selection Process
Carrier Selection Result
Figure 43: Carrier Selection Result (Ranking List)
Based on the settings maintained earlier, when we perform carrier selection, the system determines the least costly carriers and ranks them from lowest to highest cost, or from lowest to highest priority. This ranking is then considered for tendering. It can, however, be manually switched in the freight order. Additions and deletions are also possible. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Execute carrier selection
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
89
Unit 5 Lesson 2 Selecting Carriers Based on Costs and Priorities
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will define carrier costs and configure carrier selection. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Define carrier costs
●
Configure carrier selection
Prerequisites for Carrier Selection
Figure 44: Influences To Carrier Selection
There are a number of factors that influence carrier selection, including the following: ●
Master data
●
Planning Profile
●
Lane settings
●
Incompatibilities
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
90
Lesson: Selecting Carriers Based on Costs and Priorities
Master data ●
●
●
Define available carriers in the transportation lane Create allocation or business shares data if they are to be used during carrier selection Carriers either CIFed from SAP ERP or created in SAP TM Note: Only CIFed carriers can be used for settlement of cost back to SAP ERP
Planning Profile ●
Selection profile for carrier selection defining how the freight orders will be selected
●
Planning Strategy setting
●
Carrier Selection settings
Lane Settings ●
●
The lane settings identifies if cost will be considered, and if so, the origin of the costs. It can also specify the settings for business shares and allocation. If costs and priority will be used, the priority assigned to carriers can be specified here as well
Incompatibilities ●
You can create incompatibilities such as carrier with product groups or carrier with vehicles, and so on.
Carrier Selection Master Data The following master data is required before performing carrier selection: ●
●
●
Transportation lane has to be set up between two zones or location pairs, specific to a means of transport. The validity period is defined per lane, and carriers are assigned to the lane created. The prerequisite to lane creation is the setup of locations and zones, which can be manually created in SAP TM, or created when the shipping points customers, and vendor are CIFed from SAP ERP to SAP TM. The carrier is CIFed from SAP ERP or can also be locally maintained in TM, depending on the scenario.
Costs and Priorities in Carrier Selection In carrying out carrier selection, the system can put more weight on priorities or costs. In terms of priority, the system can determine the most favorable carrier based on the priorities you have defined. In effect, this means that the system chooses the carrier with the highest priority, while taking into account the various restrictions that may be in place. Alternatively, the system can determine the carrier on the basis of lowest total cost. Costs in this case can refer to internal costs or to charges calculated in charge management (we will look at this option in a separate lesson).
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
91
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
Internal Costs Internal costs draw on transportation costs and carrier costs as defined for your carriers. For example, you may have defined a transportation cost per business document (freight order, for example), or you could have defined a transportation cost per unit of weight or volume. Carrier costs are typically defined per unit of distance (kilometers or miles). You define internal costs in the transportation lane or in the carrier profile. Note: When we speak of internal costs here, we are not speaking of real world costs. Internal costs are used for weighting only, as part of the carrier selection process. Settings - Transportation Lane
Figure 45: Settings - Transportation Lane
To carry out carrier selection based upon cost and priority, you must maintain the appropriate setting on the lane as follows: ●
Strategy must have Relevance to Carrier Selection selected
●
In thePriority/Costsfield, specify the cost or priority setting
●
DefineCost Origin
Note: For distance-based lane rating, if the fixed flag is maintained on the lane, the distance is picked up from the lane. Otherwise, the distance will be recalculated during optimization.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
92
Lesson: Selecting Carriers Based on Costs and Priorities
Settings - Lane / Means of Transport
Figure 46: Settings - Lane / Means of Transport
On the transportation lane, for each carrier you can maintain internal costs in case the cost origin is set to internal cost. If priorities are used as part of the strategy, a priority per carrier can be maintained here as well You have to maintain the tendering type relevance for a specific carrier at transportation line level. Thus if the carrier is relevant to peer-to-peer tendering for the lane SP3100 - > USCUST-01, the peer-to-peer flag must be checked and the required priority maintained in the lane. A similar setup is required for broadcast. To Define Carrier Costs 1. In NWBC, choose the Master Datafolder and then choose Transportation Network → Transportation Lanes→ Define Transportation Lane . 2. UnderTransp. Lane Maintenance , enter transportation lane values in the following fields according to your requirements: ●
Start Location/Zone
●
Dest. Loc./Zone
3. ChooseChange. 4. Note that carriers are assigned to a specific means of transport (MTr), and each carrier can have a different cost per KM or mile.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
93
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
5. Display details for a means of transport by double-clicking the means of transport in the MTr column. 6. Note the carriers assigned to this MTr in the bottom left screen area. 7. Note theUnitcolumn and that carrier costs can be defined per kilometer or mile unit. 8. Define the costs appropriately in the adjacent Carrier Costscolumn. 9. Transportation costs can also be defined, and may use other units such as weight or volume.
Carrier Selection Settings
Figure 47: SAP TM Carrier Selection - Settings / Planning Profile
Carrier selection settings are included in optimization. Although some of the same settings are available in the carrier settings on the transportation lane, these settings override settings maintained directly on the lane. The settings in this profile are based on strategies such as lowest cost, business share, and priority. It considers continuous move options and equipment allocations and can tender automatically based on the tendering strategy. The profile also contains more enhanced settings, such as the ability to automatically perform carrier selection after vehicle scheduling and routing. In the direct shipment options (DSO), carrier selection can be enabled at time of freight unit building by using the carrier selection settings (additional setup is required to enable the DSO functionality). The profile also allows carrier selection in the freight order, which then uses this information for tendering. Critical Carrier Selection Settings ●
Incompatibilities between order and carrier, or customer and carrier, can also be maintained in the carrier selection settings.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
94
Lesson: Selecting Carriers Based on Costs and Priorities
●
●
The system can be set up to use allocations, business share, and strategy for carrier selection and for the determination of cost origin in two different ways: maintained on the lane or maintained in the carrier selection settings. The carrier selection settings have priority over the settings maintained on the lane. You can also define if you want to stop at carrier ranking or continue with tendering. If so, the system will prompt you to maintain the tendering manager and tendering profile. The tendering profile contains the tendering type (peer-to-peer or broadcast).
Other Carrier Selection Settings ●
●
●
●
Maintain incompatibilities and associate these to the carrier selection settings. These incompatibilities could be order versus carrier, or customer versus carrier incompatibility. Transportation charge interpretation tells the system what to do when no charges are found for a carrier. Action after carrier selection alerts the system for the next action, based on the list above. If automatic tendering is selected, you need to maintain the tendering manager and the tender profile. Manual assignments can be considered final, or can be changed based on the settings maintained in the Advanced Settings tab.
To Create Carrier Selection Settings 1. In NWBC, choose the Application Administration folder and then choose Planning→ Planning Profile Settings → Carrier Selection Settings → Create Carrier Selection Settings. 2. Make your settings as required under General Data , Other Settings , andAdvanced Settings. Required fields are marked with a red asterisk. Depending on your requirements, the most important fields are typically as follows: ●
Incompatibility Settings
●
Allocation Usage
●
BS Usage(Business Share)
●
Strategy
●
Carrier Cost Origin
Note: The settings maintained here take precedence over those maintained for a transportation lane. For example, settings in relation to strategy and carrier cost origin can be made for both carrier selection settings and transportation lane settings, but those made here have priority.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
95
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Define carrier costs
●
Configure carrier selection
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
96
Unit 5 Lesson 3 Using Allocations
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will perform carrier selection based on transportation allocations. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Consider allocations
Transportation Allocations Transportation allocations allow companies to assign defined quantities of capacity to certain business partners. This includes set minimum or maximum capacity restrictions that regulate how much business is allowed with a certain carrier in a certain region for a certain means of transport. A separate business object is used to model these allocations.
Figure 48: Transportation Allocation
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
97
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
Transportation Allocations
Figure 49: Transportation Allocations
Often, firm relationships exist with carriers in the form of contracts. These contracts can guarantee that an amount of business is allocated to a carrier, which if not met, results in penalties. SAP TM has the tools to track these relationships or, alternatively, divide up business between different carriers. The following are examples of transport allocations: ●
●
●
A carrier commits to at least 25 shipments or truckloads from Nashville each day. However, for business reasons, the availability changes each day. A carrier normally provides two trucks per day from Dayton, Ohio. For business reasons, the carrier is able to offer, on Tuesday and Friday only, five trucks to the shipper. A carrier can include additional capacity to the existing number of shipments by truck. For example, a carrier could add five additional trucks during the week between Tuesday and Thursday.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
98
Lesson: Using Allocations
Transportation Allocation Characteristics
Figure 50: Transport Allocations In Carrier Selection
Transportation Allocation Characteristics ●
●
Carrier capacity can be defined for any geographical level in arbitrary dimension. When defining the allocation, the trade lane can be specified as follows: Both source location/zone and destination location/zone can be specified
From
Source location/zone only
Within
Using zone hierarchy
To
Destination location/zone only
Inbound
Destination zone is specified
Outbound
Source zone is specified
Extended carrier selection optimizer interface -
-
●
Along
During carrier selection either using optimizer or manual planning, the allocation can be checked During tendering, the allocation can be checked
Carrier capacity and utilization can be extracted to SAP NetWeaver
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
99
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
Extended Scope of Transportation Allocation
Figure 51: Extended Scope of Transportation Allocations
In SAP TM, you can define a connection between allocations and the freight agreement for a specific carrier. Only when a single trade lane has been defined for an agreement item, can an allocation from the item of the single party freight agreement be created. The type of allocation created is defined in the Agreement TypeCustomizing activity. If the carrier or trade lane in the agreement is changed, the user receives a message in an alert box stating that the allocation is no longer relevant. Other Transportation Allocation Features ● Transportation allocation types can be defined in Customizing. ●
●
Transportation allocation supports air freight capacity check and the integration of schedules. Further optional attributes can be specified. Bucket quantities are extended - multiple dimensions for the same bucket can be specified.
●
Handling code support.
●
Transportation mode/user-specific user interface capability.
Trade Lanes
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
100
Lesson: Using Allocations
Figure 52: Trade Lanes
A trade lane is an abstract representation of transport classification. A trade lane instance does not represent a connection between any transportation network nodes (zone/location, and so on), it is a context independent classification of any transportation-related activities. Trade Lanes may build up a hierarchy, that is, more generic trade lanes imply more specific trade lanes (for example: “Within Germany using means of transport Truck” implies “Along from Frankfurt to Hamburg using means of transport Chilled Truck” and “Within Bavaria using means of transport Truck for liquids”). Trade lanes may overlap each other (for example, “From Germany using Airplane” and “Within Europe using Airplane”). Trade lane hierarchies include transportation zone hierarchy (for example: “From Germany“ implies “From Bavaria”, which implies“From Plant_Munich”), means of transport hierarchy (for example: “Within Germany with Mtr Truck” implies “Within Germany with Mtr Chilled_Truck”) and means of transport – mode of transport relations (for example: “Within Germany with Mode of Transport Road” implies “Within Germany with Mtr Chilled_truck”). LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Consider allocations
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
101
Unit 5 Lesson 4 Using Business Shares
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will perform carrier selection based on business shares. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Perform carrier selection based on business shares
Business Shares Selecting Carriers Based on Business Share
Figure 53: Selecting Carriers Based on Business Shares
Objectives of Business Shares ● Assign defined percentages to certain business partners ●
Support negotiation of freight agreements
●
Avoid dependency on a single vendor
●
Consider the capacity of a carrier for a certain relation/route/geography
Like transportation allocations, business shares make use of trade lanes.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
102
Lesson: Using Business Shares
Business Share (Example)
Figure 54: Selecting Carriers Based on BS and Transportation Allocation
When defining the business share context, you create the business share buckets. The percentage of business share a carrier can have for these individual buckets is the actual business share a carrier is allowed to have. There are different types of bucket available during business share creation. They are yearly, quarterly, monthly, weekly, and daily. Example One Carrier A can have a weekly bucket of 75% of the business share on the lane between Hamburg and Frankfurt between the validity periods March 1 2015 to 31 May 2015. In the same context, Carrier B can have a weekly bucket of 25% defined.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
103
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
Figure 55: Business Share Tolerances and Penalty Costs
Tolerances and penalty costs can be defined for business shares. As long as business shares are within the tolerance limits, the cost calculations during carrier ranking are not affected. Tolerances are always defined in percentages (%). If the total business share of the carrier exceeds the defined tolerances, either shortfall or over, a penalty applies. The shortage penalty costs are added to all carriers, other than the one selected. The excess penalty costs are added to the carrier under consideration. Penalties are maintained as numeric values in the business share. This number is multiplied by the deviation percentage to arrive at the penalty cost. It only makes sense to use business shares if you have defined penalty costs. It is recommended to also always define tolerances to give the optimizer a certain amount of leeway. Example Two There is a penalty of 1000 defined in the business share. An excess tolerance of 10% is also defined. During business share calculation, if the excess is 12%, the excess liable for penalty is 2%. This 2 is multiplied by 1000 to arrive at the total excess penalty costs of 2000.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
104
Lesson: Using Business Shares
Note: When calculating the total costs for a carrier, if you are working with TCM costs, there will be a currency assigned to the costs. To assign a currency to business share penalty costs, go to: Carrier Selection Settings -> Advanced Settings -> Common Currency . For example, if you are working with carriers from multiple geographic locations with multiple currencies to arrive at the correct ranking, the system uses the common currency (maintained in the Carrier Selection Settings ) for all its calculations. The currency displayed in the carrier ranking list is always the local currency of the carrier (maintained in the freight agreement). All FORs in the business share context are selected for the business share penalty calculations, though these FORs are not selected during the planning run. For example, assume in a business share context there are two carriers, A and B. There are no tolerances defined. Carrier A is awarded a 60% business share and Carrier B a 40% business share. There are already 10 freight orders awarded, of which Carrier A is assigned six and Carrier B is assigned four. Now let us perform carrier selection for the eleventh FOR. If Carrier B is assigned this FOR, Carrier A will have a shortfall of business share, and the penalty cost for the shortfall will be charged to Carrier B, on top of the usual costs determined during carrier selection. If Carrier A is assigned the eleventh FOR, Carrier B will have a shortfall of business share, and the penalty cost will be charged to carrier A, on top of the usual costs determined during carrier selection. Both options are evaluated by the system and the ranking done accordingly.
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Perform carrier selection based on business shares
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
105
Unit 5 Lesson 5 Improving Carrier Utilization
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will improve carrier utilization with continuous moves. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Explain continuous moves
Continuous Moves Continuous move scenarios can identify opportunities to avoid empty runs or utilize capacity more effectively. As part of automatic carrier selection, the system tries to combine freight orders by forming continuous moves. The aim is to reduce the costs of subcontracting by assigning additional freight orders to the same carrier. If the carrier is providing a special discount for continuous move or round-trip move, the discount percentage can be maintained at carrier level in the lane. Optimizer will pick this additional discount during carrier selection for the continuous move or round-trip lane. The system takes into account continuous moves during automatic carrier selection only.
Figure 56: SAP TM Carrier Selection: Continuous Move - Scenario Overview
As part of the automatic carrier selection, the system tries to combine freight order by forming continuous moves. A continuous move is when the transportation service provider (TSP) agrees to take on a completely new shipment straight after the completion of a freight order. The aim is to reduce the costs of the by assigning additional freight orders to a carrier.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
106
Lesson: Improving Carrier Utilization
Types of Continuous Moves The following types of continuous move are available: ●
Simple continuous move The carrier accepts one or more additional business documents and, after executing the first business document, directly executes the following business documents one after the other.
●
Round trip A round trip is a simple continuous move for which the source location of the first business document and the destination location of the second business document are identical. A round trip can only consist of exactly two business documents, the system cannot take into account complex round trips where multiple source locations (pickup) or destination locations (delivery) are served.
The system can combine two or more business documents in a continuous move if the following conditions are met: ●
●
●
The relevant carrier is available for both business documents. The arrival date/time of the first business document lies in the departure window of the second business document. The departure date/time of the second business document lies in the arrival window of the first business document.
Furthermore, the distance between the destination location of the first business document and the source location of the second business document must not exceed the smaller maximum distance that you have defined for the carrier in the transportation lanes. Cost Calculation for Continuous Moves The system first determines the costs per business document (for example, freight order). Here it considers the strategy and origin of the carrier costs that you defined in the carrier selection settings. The system then determines the discount per business document. When doing so, it takes into account the settings that you have made in the transportation lane for the carrier and the means of transport. The system deducts this discount from the costs determined previously for each business document. If you specified in the carrier selection settings that the system is to perform a recalculation of costs from charge management for continuous moves, the system considers the discounts for continuous moves for the business documents from charge management in the recalculation, however, only for the carriers that offer continuous moves. The system saves the result in the ranking list. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Explain continuous moves
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
107
Unit 5 Learning Assessment
1. Which of the following statements about carrier selection are correct? Choose the correct answers. X
A Carrier selection based on business share means that a fixed percentage of business is allocation to a certain carrier.
X
B Carrier selection based on transportation allocations is maintained on the transportation lane level.
X
C Carrier selection based on transportation allocations means that there is either a minimum or maximum restriction that regulates how much business you do with a certain carrier in a certain region for a certain means of transport.
X
D Available carriers are defined in the transportation lane.
2. Which of the following factors influence carrier selection? Choose the correct answers. X
A Master data
X
B Planning profile
X
C Lane Settings
X
D Freight order type
X
E Incompatibilities
3. Incompatibilities between order and carrier, or customer and carrier, can also be maintained in the carrier selection settings. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
108
Unit 5: Learning Assessment
4. When defining transportation allocations, a trade lane can be specified. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
5. Based on what you have learned about business share in transportation planning, which of the following statements is true? Choose the correct answer. X
A Business share is an in-built mechanism in SAP TM for ensuring all carriers in a region have sufficient business.
X
B Business share buckets provide a means of numerous shippers pooling together to create merged (shared) freight orders.
X
C Business share settings define the percentage of business to be allocated to various carriers. Costs are incurred for non-adherence and the system takes these into account during optimization.
X
D A company may have working formalised relationships with a number of carriers. Business share allocation ensures that all carriers receive the same amouont of business from the comapany.
6. What are the aims of continuous moves? Choose the correct answers. X
A To reduce the costs of the freight order.
X
B To utilize capacity more effectively.
X
C To reduce the costs of subcontracting.
X
D To ensure the lowest-cost carrier is always assigned.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
109
Unit 5 Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Which of the following statements about carrier selection are correct? Choose the correct answers. X
A Carrier selection based on business share means that a fixed percentage of business is allocation to a certain carrier.
X
B Carrier selection based on transportation allocations is maintained on the transportation lane level.
X
C Carrier selection based on transportation allocations means that there is either a minimum or maximum restriction that regulates how much business you do with a certain carrier in a certain region for a certain means of transport.
X
D Available carriers are defined in the transportation lane.
2. Which of the following factors influence carrier selection? Choose the correct answers. X
A Master data
X
B Planning profile
X
C Lane Settings
X
D Freight order type
X
E Incompatibilities
3. Incompatibilities between order and carrier, or customer and carrier, can also be maintained in the carrier selection settings. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
110
Unit 5: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. When defining transportation allocations, a trade lane can be specified. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
5. Based on what you have learned about business share in transportation planning, which of the following statements is true? Choose the correct answer. X
A Business share is an in-built mechanism in SAP TM for ensuring all carriers in a region have sufficient business.
X
B Business share buckets provide a means of numerous shippers pooling together to create merged (shared) freight orders.
X
C Business share settings define the percentage of business to be allocated to various carriers. Costs are incurred for non-adherence and the system takes these into account during optimization.
X
D A company may have working formalised relationships with a number of carriers. Business share allocation ensures that all carriers receive the same amouont of business from the comapany.
6. What are the aims of continuous moves? Choose the correct answers. X
A To reduce the costs of the freight order.
X
B To utilize capacity more effectively.
X
C To reduce the costs of subcontracting.
X
D To ensure the lowest-cost carrier is always assigned.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
111
UNIT 6 Freight Tendering
Lesson 1 Explaining the Tendering Process
113
Lesson 2 Configuring the Tendering Plan
120
Lesson 3 Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
126
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
Explain tendering types
●
Explain the tendering process in SAP TM
●
Tender a freight order
●
Configure the settings to enable order tendering
●
Determine communication methods with carriers
●
Collaborate using the SAP TM collaboration portal
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
112
Unit 6 Lesson 1 Explaining the Tendering Process
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will tender a freight order using different tendering processes. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Explain tendering types
●
Explain the tendering process in SAP TM
●
Tender a freight order
Order Tendering
Figure 57: Subcontracting: Tendering - Context Process Flow
Once carrier selection has taken place, communication with the selected carrier needs to be initiated. This process is referred to as order tendering. Different tendering processes can be deployed depending upon the technology used by the carrier. You use this process to tender (offer) a freight order to one or more potential transportation service providers (TSPs). Tendering is a bidding process, in which you request one or multiple TSPs to submit a quote for a transportation service that is defined in a freight order. You can select the TSP that you want to execute the transportation service by evaluating the quotes. The main characteristics of the tendering process are flexible configuration and the reduction of required manual interaction to support ease of use and lower total cost of ownership (TCO).
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
113
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
Order Tendering Process
Figure 58: Order Tendering Process
The figure Order Tendering Process shows an example of the freight order tendering process.
Tendering Types In general, there are two types of tendering, as follows: Long-term tendering is where contracts are negotiated for a longer period, for example, a year. Long term tendering is a process that is covered in Strategic Freight Management, which we will look at in the Managing Freight Contracts lesson. Short term tendering is where tendering is executed based on specific orders. This is known as order tendering. SAP TM supports the following short term tendering scenarios: ●
Peer-to-Peer Tendering
●
Broadcast Tendering
The strategies for each are determined in tendering profiles in SAP TM. Parties and Roles in the Tendering Process At least two parties are involved in the tendering process - a customer who wants to subcontract a transportation service that is defined in a freight order, and a supplier (subcontractor) or TSP, who potentially carries out the transportation service. There are two roles on the customer side of the tendering process. The first is a transportation dispatcher, who is responsible for the transportation service, that is, the freight order. The second is the tendering manager, who is responsible for configuring and executing the tendering process and acquiring an acceptable quote from a TSP to perform the transportation service. Manual and Automatic Tendering When a transportation dispatcher initiates the tendering process, they have two options: manual process configuration or automatic tendering. If they want to tender only a single freight order, the transportation dispatcher can choose between the two options. If they initiate a tendering process using manual configuration, the tendering manager must configure and start the tendering process manually. If the transportation dispatcher wants to tender more than one freight order, they must initiate automatic tendering and use the automatic tendering configuration in the system.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
114
Lesson: Explaining the Tendering Process
Peer-to-Peer Tendering
Figure 59: Peer to Peer Tendering
Peer-to-peer tendering is a process whereby freight orders are tendered sequentially or “offered” to preselected carriers or transportation service providers (TSPs). Peer-to-peer tendering involves the sequential sending of freight requests for quotation (freight RFQs) to each proposed carrier. The system waits until the carrier sends a freight quotation (FQ) or until the maximum response time has passed. If the TSP does not send a quote within the maximum response time, the peer-to-peer tendering process continues, and the system sends a request for quote to the next TSP. If peer-to-peer tendering ends without an acceptable quote, the tendering process continues with the next tendering process step that you have configured. If the TSP sends a quote before the maximum response time has elapsed, the system evaluates the quote and can either accept or reject it. In the case of rejection, a new RFQ is sent out. The process continues until at least one acceptable FQ has been received. The system awards this a Quotation Acceptable evaluation result and the process ends successfully. There are two types of peer-to-peer tendering: response required and no response required. Broadcast Tendering Broadcast tendering is a tender process whereby freight orders are simultaneously tendered (offered) to preselected TSPs. All TSPs have to respond within a given maximum response time. There are two types of broadcast tendering: best offer and first acceptable offer. Depending on which one of these is being used, either the first acceptable quote wins or, after the maximum response time, the system evaluates all the acceptable quotes and selects the TSP that has submitted the quote with the lowest price. If broadcast tendering ends without an acceptable quote, the tendering process continues with the next tendering process step that you have configured.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
115
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
Figure 60: Broadcast Tendering
Tender Types Available in SAP TM ●
●
●
●
Peer–to– Peer Tendering – Response Required : If a Carrier does not respond in a given amount of time, it is automatically considered a rejection. Peer–to– Peer Tendering – No Response Required : If a Carrier does not respond in a given amount of time, it is automatically considered an acceptance. Broadcast Tendering – Best :Offer Out of all responses within the given timeframe, the best offer (that is, lowest) is accepted. Broadcast Tendering – First Acceptable : The Offer first response is accepted
A typical setup is a two-step tendering process. The first step is enabled for Peer-to-Peer Tendering with a max response time of 30 minutes per carrier. If no response is received from any of the carriers then the second step is started. The second step is broadcast tendering, where all carriers will receive the tender request and the tender will be awarded to the carrier who responds first or offers the best price.
RFQ-Based Tendering Process Available Tendering Processes The following tendering processes are available, based on the settings maintained in the tendering profile: ●
RFQ-based, award manually
●
RFQ-based, award automatically
●
Direct tendering, send freight order directly
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
116
Lesson: Explaining the Tendering Process
Figure 61: Process: RFQ-based Tendering
This process is common in European regions where you send an RFQ to the carrier, and the carrier then quotes their price for the tender in the form of a freight quotation. You either accept or reject the freight quote manually or automatically, based on the parameters set in the tendering profile. Acceptance is then sent to the awarded carrier.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
117
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
Direct Tendering Process
Figure 62: Process: Direct Tendering
You can use a direct tendering process to send a freight order (FO) directly to a specified carrier without creating a freight RFQ. Carriers can confirm or reject the FOs. If a carrier does not respond within a certain period of time, the tender can be considered as accepted automatically. If required, confirmation can be sent as an e-mail to the confirmed carrier. Direct and RFQ tendering are separate tendering processes, but can be combined if required.
Facilitated Discussion: Carrier Tendering Criteria Freight Order Tendering A tendering process starts if you or the system determine more than one possible carrier. This tendering process can use a mixture of different modes of tendering (peer-to-peer or broadcast tendering). You can define a timeout in the system, so that it either tenders the freight order to another carrier or switches from one tendering type to the next. The tendering process results in one carrier being selected to execute the freight order. Carriers can accept or decline these freight RFQs and change data, such as the price, when they return the freight quotations. You can then automatically accept the tendering and send the freight order back to the awarded carrier.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
118
Lesson: Explaining the Tendering Process
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Explain tendering types
●
Explain the tendering process in SAP TM
●
Tender a freight order
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
119
Unit 6 Lesson 2 Configuring the Tendering Plan
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will configure the settings to enable order tendering. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Configure the settings to enable order tendering
Configuration Settings for Tendering
Figure 63: General Settings for Tendering
The standard settings for tendering are defined in the Define General Settings for Tendering Customizing activity. You can also specify the tendering communication and process settings that you can use in the Define Freight Order Types Customizing activity. In Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation Management→ Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Tendering → Define General Settings for Tendering . In the01 - Visibility Settings view, you can select the settings that determine the visibility level of a price limit, submitted price, and stop dates in a tendering process. In the02 - Rejection Reason Codes view, you can define reason code identifiers (IDs) and descriptions to classify the reasons for rejecting freight request for quotations (freight RFQs).
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
120
Lesson: Configuring the Tendering Plan
E-Mail and SMS Content Settings
Figure 64: Tendering Profile: E-Mail and SMS
In the03 - E-mail and SMS Content view, you can define the following settings: Documents for Notifications You can specify the names of the documents that the system uses to create e-mails. You can specify separate documents for the e-mail subject field, the e-mail body text, and SMS text content. You can also specify additional information that the system adds to other e-mail body text or SMS text. The system uses the e-mail or SMS type to determine where it adds the additional text. You must define the documents that you use in this view asGeneral text documents in transaction SE61. Triggering Notifications at Process Events You can specify that the system sends an e-mail or an SMS message to a carrier when an event occurs in the tendering process. Events include sending a freight RFQ to a carrier and awarding a freight quotation (FQ). Bundling Notifications You can schedule the sending of e-mails and SMS messages in a batch report. With this, the contact person for the carrier receives e-mails or SMS messages only when the batch report runs in your system. The e-mails or SMS messages contain information about all the new events that have taken place since the last bundle of e-mails or SMS messages were sent. This means that the carrier does not receive 10 separate e-mails for new freight RFQs, but one e-mail containing the information on all 10 new freight RFQs. Process Settings In the04 - Process Settings view, you can specify the following process settings for tendering:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
121
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
●
Default tendering manager
●
Visibility settings
●
Tendering profile
●
Carrier selection settings
●
Maximum response duration
●
Considering the calling hours of a business partner
You can use the process and communication settings that you define in the Define Freight Order Types Customizing activity to specify the tendering settings for each freight order type. The following are the settings in the freight order type that the system uses to determine the Customizing settings for tendering: ●
Default, where the system uses the system default settings
●
Freight order type, where the system uses the type of freight order
●
Conditions, where the system uses the runtime characteristics of a freight order
Communication Settings In the05 - Communication Settings view, you can specify the following communication settings for tendering: ●
●
●
●
Send alerts to tendering managers whether or not the managers have subscribed to a tendering alert category Use EDI messages to communicate with carriers Send particular types of e-mails to carriers. (Types include e-mails for freight RFQs, FQ cancelations, and FQ awards) Send freight RFQs as e-mails or SMS messages
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
122
Lesson: Configuring the Tendering Plan
Carrier-Specific Communication Settings
Figure 65: Tendering Profile: Carrier Communication and Defaults
In the06 - Carrier -Specific Communication Settings view, you can define communication settings for a particular carrier that are different from the general communication settings defined in the 05 - Communication Settings view. This includes the following settings: ●
●
Send EDI messages to this carrier and not to other carriers Send particular types of e-mails and SMS messages to this carrier and not to other carriers
In the07 - Default Settings view, you must specify one default set of process settings and one default set of communication settings for your tendering processes. The system uses these settings if it cannot determine specific settings based on the freight order type. You can also enable the system to create change documents to record the changes you make to the tendering profiles that you edit.
Tendering Profiles
Figure 66: Tendering Profile Setup
The tendering profile contains basic tendering data and is a prerequisite for automatic tendering. You can use a tendering profile when you manually create a tendering plan. Within the profile, you can define multi-step tendering. This allows a company to mix tendering
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
123
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
types. For example, you can first use peer-to-peer tendering, and if this is unsuccessful you can use broadcast tendering. Tendering Profile Details
Figure 67: Tendering Profile Details
To create a new tendering profile, in SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, on the Application Administration tab, chooseTendering → Tendering Profiles→ Create Tendering Profile. The tendering profile is set up according to business requirements. Parts of the Tendering Profile The following are the main parts of a tendering profile: Tendering step You can specify one or more tendering steps Tendering type The following are the tendering types: ●
Peer-to-Peer Tendering — Response Required
●
Peer-to-Peer Tendering — No Response Required
●
Broadcast Tendering — Best Offer
●
Broadcast Tendering — First Acceptable Offer
Tendering process mode The following are the tendering process modes: ●
Freight RFQ Based, Award Manually
●
Freight RFQ Based, Award Automatically
●
Direct Tendering, Send Freight Order Directly
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
124
Lesson: Configuring the Tendering Plan
Carrier/Carrier Assignment Method The assignment of a carrier is optional in a tendering profile. When you use a profile to create a new tendering plan, the system can retrieve a carrier according to the carrier assignment strategy. The following are the standard carrier assignment strategies: ●
Get Carriers from Ranking List
●
Get Carriers from the Transportation Lane Master Data
●
Get Assigned Carrier from Freight Order
●
Assign Carriers Manually
Relative price limit You can set a relative price limit for each tendering step. Maximum response duration This is the longest period of time within which a carrier must respond Manual evaluation This requires the tendering manager to manually evaluate each freight quotation (FQ). Carrier-specific freight agreement (FA) Visibility settings LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Configure the settings to enable order tendering
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
125
Unit 6 Lesson 3 Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will look at different tendering collaboration scenarios and ways to communicate with carriers. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Determine communication methods with carriers
●
Collaborate using the SAP TM collaboration portal
Tendering Communication Methods As part of the tendering process, it is important to review the communication methods that support the tendering scenarios. For carriers who may not be able to support EDI (electronic data interchange) scenarios, SAP has developed a Web-based collaboration portal to improve communication. This requires subcontractors to log on to SAP TM using the Web in order to process a freight order. On a periodic basis, each subcontractor views their RFQs (modeled as tendering requests) and submits quotations (modeled as tendering responses). Each subcontractor is provided with their own user IDs and passwords, as well as the relevant authorization to restrict visibility to only the loads that have been tendered to them. Additional methods are supported, such as receiving RFQs by e-mail and SMS and submitting quotations by e-mail without the need to access an SAP TM system at all. In this case, an RFQ is sent to a carrier by e-mail or SMS message. The carrier responds to the e-mail using a regular e-mail client on a PC or a mobile device. The e-mail is then converted (using PI) into a quotation. Carriers can accept RFQs directly, reject them with a specified reason, or accept them with changes. Mobile tendering using a smartphone app is also supported and allows a mobile device to receive new RFQs, respond to RFQs, and include changes to dates and prices. Users can check addresses and routes on a map, e-mail or phone the contact person, create a calendar entry for awarded tenders, and check other appointments in the calendar.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
126
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
Figure 68: Tendering Communication Methods
Advanced Communication If a subcontractor is more technically advanced, B2B communication can be used. In this situation, a copy of the freight order is created for the carrier (the tendering manager or system administrator can control what is included in the copy that is visible to the carrier). The copy is persisted in the system to retain what was communicated to the carrier. A freight request for quotation (tendering request) is sent via PI and received as a forwarding quotation in the supplier’s SAP TM system. The carrier can accept the order directly or, if the first carrier rejects the order, the freight order will be sent to the next carrier. Finally, a quotation confirmation is sent back to the customer and is converted into a quotation (tendering response) in the customer’s SAP TM system. The Change Controller allows you to react to changes in the FO, for example, by stopping tendering when there are major changes in the FO.
Tendering via B2B Messages
Figure 69: Connection of RFQ-based Tendering and Forwarding Quotation via B2B Messages
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
127
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
In RFQ-based tendering via business-to-business (B2B) messages, a freight request for quotation (modeled as a “tendering request”) is received by the supplier's TM system as a forwarding quotation. The quotation confirmation is sent back to the customer and is converted into a quotation (“tendering response”) in the customer’s TM system. Direct Tendering via B2B Messages
Figure 70: Connection of Direct Tendering and Forwarding Order via B2B Messages
In direct tendering via B2B messages, the freight order is sent directly to the carrier, where is it received as a forwarding order. The carrier can accept the order directly. If the carrier rejects the order, the freight order will be sent to the next carrier.
Tendering via Email and SMS
Figure 71: Tendering via E-mail and SMS
In the Tendering via E-mail and SMS scenario, an RFQ (modeled as a "tendering request") is sent to a carrier by e-mail or SMS. The carrier responds to the e-mail using a regular e-mail client on a PC or a mobile device and sends it back to the ordering party. The e-mail is then converted into a quotation (modeled as a "tendering response").
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
128
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
You can define communication settings for a particular carrier that are different from the general communication settings.
Mobile Tendering Freight RFQs can easily be integrated with carriers who cannot implement a complex B2B integration. Mobile tendering allows a mobile device to receive new RFQs, respond to RFQs, and include changes to dates and prices. Users can check addresses and routes on the map, e-mail or phone the contact person, create a calendar entry for awarded tenders, and check other appointments in the calendar.
Figure 72: Mobile Tendering
To Tender with a Mobile App 1. Download the SAP Transport Tendering app from the Apple App Store. 2. Open the app and follow the instructions to complete the installation. To run the app on real data, you need to connect to your company's SAP server by entering the server address. 3. Requests are grouped under four headings, as follows: ●
Open
●
Quoted
●
Completed
●
All
4. Choose any of the headings to view details of requests in that category. 5. Use the app as appropriate to accept or reject quotes.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
129
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
SAP TM Collaboration Portal
Figure 73: SAP TM Collaboration Portal
The SAP Transportation Management collaboration portal for carriers (SAP TM Collaboration Portal) supports collaborative business processes. As a carrier working with several shippers that use the SAP TM collaboration portal, you have separate access to each of your shippers. In each case, you can work with one shipper only. The shipper can provide you with access to the following areas in the SAP TM collaboration portal: ●
●
●
In theFreight Order Management area, you can take part in a tendering process started by a shipper. You can view your shipper's freight requests for quotation, and submit freight quotations to the shipper. You can accept, change, or reject the shipper's freight requests for quotation. You can report planned and unexpected events for a freight order as well as enter quantity deviations. In theFreight Settlement area, you can enter differences in logistical item quantities, charge amounts in a freight order, and create a freight settlement dispute case against the shipper. In theFreight Agreement Management area, you can respond to your shipper's freight agreement RFQs with your rates for the transportation services.
Note: In this training course we focus on the tendering functionality. Other Collaboration Portal functionalities are covered in other TM training courses. The following browsers are supported: ●
Windows
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
130
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
●
-
Internet Explorer 9 and upwards, including IE10
-
Firefox 24 (Firefox Extended Support Release - ESR) and latest version
-
Chrome (latest version)
MAC OS X -
Safari 5.1 and upwards
SAP TM Collaboration Portal - Topics Overview
Figure 74: SAP TM Collaboration Portal - Topics Overview
The main benefits of the SAP TM Collaboration Portal are: ●
●
●
●
●
Small and mid-size carriers do not need to have SAP TM installed Full browser based solution means that carrier even does not need to have access to shipper’s network (that is connection via VPN, and so on) All common browsers are supported (Internet Explorer 9, Mozilla Firefox, Safari, Google Chrome) Carrier does not have to install anything, but just log in into the collaboration portal with the access (login and password) provided by the shipper as SAP TM collaboration portal owner/host Carrier can see only request for quotations (RFQ) assigned to it and his transmitted quotations
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
131
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
●
User settings in the portal are stored and available after re-logon to increase the usability of the portal by the carrier
As a carrier, you enter the SAP Transportation Management collaboration portal through the Home screen. This screen displays a worklist with the key performance indicators (KPIs) for the available areas in the form of tiles. From the tiles, you can navigate to the individual areas to continue your work. You can see only the areas that are relevant for you. The following KPIs are available for Freight Order Management: ●
●
●
Open freight RFQs: the number of freight RFQs to which you can respond with a freight quotation Pending freight quotations: the number of freight quotations that you have submitted to the shipper and for which a decision about the award is pending Open freight orders for execution: the number of open freight orders for which you still have to report at least one event
SAP TM Collaboration Portal - Process Overview
Figure 75: SAP TM Collaboration Portal - Process Overview
As a carrier, you can display the freight requests for quotation (RFQs) that you have received from a shipper. You can also display the freight quotations that you submitted to your shipper for a specific freight RFQ. If you do not make any changes you can accept one or more freight RFQs. If you make changes you can accept only one freight RFQ. You can reject one or more freight RFQs and provide a reason for rejection. Furthermore, you can display the details about the tendered freight order, such as item details, location information, and business partner.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
132
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
The business process of tendering in the Freight Order Management area in the SAP Transportation Management collaboration portal corresponds to the tendering process in the standard SAP TM system.
Technical Architecture of the SAP TM Collaboration Portal
Figure 76: Freight Requests for Quotation (RFQs)
On theFreight Requests for Quotation screen, you can view all freight requests for quotation that you have received from a specific shipper. You can display open and closed freight RFQs. From the toolbar, you can apply the quick filter to filter freight RFQs by their status (open, closed, all). In the table view, you can apply a filter to those fields that support the filter function by entering a filter value in accordance with the SAP UI5 standard. You can show or hide individual columns and change their sequence by using drag and drop. You can find freight RFQs using the search field in the toolbar. The system returns all freight RFQs that contain the search term in a field (fuzzy search) irrespective of whether the field is shown or hidden. If a field can be sorted, you can display the contents of the individual columns in ascending or descending order.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
133
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
RFQs Details
Figure 77: RFQs Details
On theFreight Requests for Quotation screen, you have the following options: ●
●
●
●
You can accept one or more freight RFQs at the same time. You can reject one or more freight RFQs at the same time and specify a reason for rejection. You can accept a freight RFQ with changes. You can view the stop sequence and the tendering details (cargo information, locations, and business partners).
●
You can display the source location and destination location of a freight RFQ on a map.
●
You can view the lowest suggested price submitted by another carrier.
●
You can export the content of a freight RFQ from the table view to a Microsoft Excel file.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
134
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
Accept RFQ with Changes
Figure 78: Accept RFQ with Changes
The stop sequence view enables you to see which cargo items were loaded and unloaded at each stop. For each stop in the stop sequence, you can view the expected arrival and departure times, as well as the gross weight and volume of the truck once the loading or unloading operation has been completed at a specific location. You can also view the weight, volume, quantity, and dimensions for each separate cargo item, and see whether the item is classified as dangerous goods. You can also see whether each cargo item is to be loaded or unloaded at the specific location. On the Freight Requests for Quotation screen, the table view and detail view show the calculated gross weight and volume for the entire freight order. You can view the calculated quantity in the table view only. When your shipper sends a freight request for quotation (RFQ), you can accept it without making any changes, accept it with changes, or reject it. Accepting Freight RFQ Without Changes If you are in agreement with the freight RFQ, you can accept it without making any changes. Accepting Freight RFQ with Changes Depending on the tendering settings, you can use the following functions: ●
If you want to accept a freight RFQ with changes, you can change the price and dates. You can suggest your own price in relation to the price limit of the shipper. You can change
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
135
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
both the amount and the currency. Your suggested price appears on the freight quotation as the submitted price. ●
You can overwrite dates (start and end date) requested by the shipper. These appear on the freight quotation as the submitted dates. Acceptable dates are fixed limits defined by the shipper and are used to delimit the requested dates. You cannot change the acceptable dates.
Rejecting a Freight RFQ ●
●
If you reject a freight RFQ, you can specify a rejection reason. If you reject several freight RFQs at the same time, each one is assigned the same rejection reason.
Freight Quotations
Figure 79: Freight Quotations
You can display all of the freight quotations that you have sent to a shipper. If you want to display information about a specific freight quotation in the detail view, you must select a single row. If you have accepted a freight RFQ with changes, your suggested price is shown on the freight quotation as the submitted price. On the Freight Request for Quotation screen, the system always displays the information from the freight RFQ most recently submitted. You can display the source location and destination location of a freight quotation on a map. You can view the lowest suggested price submitted by another carrier. You can export the content of a freight quotation from the table view to a Microsoft Excel file.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
136
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
Facilitated Discussion: SAP TM Collaboration Criteria List the ways your organization can use the different collaboration methods during tendering. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Determine communication methods with carriers
●
Collaborate using the SAP TM collaboration portal
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
137
Unit 6 Learning Assessment
1. Broadcast tendering refers to a process whereby all quotations received (in response to an RFQ) are broadcast to all carriers in an effort to improve transparency. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
2. During the tendering process, a shipper sends a freight order directly to a specific carrier without creating a freight RFQ. What tendering process is the shipper using? Choose the correct answer. X
A Direct tendering
X
B Broadcast tendering
X
C Best offer tendering
X
D First response tendering
3. Which of the following statements about freight order tendering are correct? Choose the correct answers. X
A During the tendering process, only one tendering mode can be used.
X
B During the tendering process, carriers can update prices when the return freight quotations.
X
C The tendering process results in one carrier being selected to execute the freight order.
X
D The tendering process starts if you or the system determine more than one possible carrier.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
138
Unit 6: Learning Assessment
4. In the standard settings for tendering, which settings control the information from a freight RFQ that can be seen and edited by a carrier? Choose the correct answer. X
A Visibility Settings
X
B Carrier -Specific Communication Settings
X
C E-mail and SMS Content Setting
X
D E-mail and SMS Content Setting
5. When does the system use the settings defined in Default the Settings view? Choose the correct answer. X
A When the system cannot determine a freight order type specific settings.
X
B When the system is performing automatic tendering.
X
C When carrier does not have its own SAP TM system.
X
D When the system receives a freight RFQ rejection from a carrier.
6. A carrier does not have an SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) system. What tendering scenario can be used between the carrier and the shipper? Choose the correct answer. X
A Tendering via E-mail
X
B Tendering via SMS
X
C Tendering via B2B messages
X
D Tendering via Collaboration Portal
7. To use the Collaboration Portal, a carrier must have SAP TM installed. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
139
Unit 6 Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Broadcast tendering refers to a process whereby all quotations received (in response to an RFQ) are broadcast to all carriers in an effort to improve transparency. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
2. During the tendering process, a shipper sends a freight order directly to a specific carrier without creating a freight RFQ. What tendering process is the shipper using? Choose the correct answer. X
A Direct tendering
X
B Broadcast tendering
X
C Best offer tendering
X
D First response tendering
3. Which of the following statements about freight order tendering are correct? Choose the correct answers. X
A During the tendering process, only one tendering mode can be used.
X
B During the tendering process, carriers can update prices when the return freight quotations.
X
C The tendering process results in one carrier being selected to execute the freight order.
X
D The tendering process starts if you or the system determine more than one possible carrier.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
140
Unit 6: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. In the standard settings for tendering, which settings control the information from a freight RFQ that can be seen and edited by a carrier? Choose the correct answer. X
A Visibility Settings
X
B Carrier -Specific Communication Settings
X
C E-mail and SMS Content Setting
X
D E-mail and SMS Content Setting
5. When does the system use the settings defined in Default the Settings view? Choose the correct answer. X
A When the system cannot determine a freight order type specific settings.
X
B When the system is performing automatic tendering.
X
C When carrier does not have its own SAP TM system.
X
D When the system receives a freight RFQ rejection from a carrier.
6. A carrier does not have an SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) system. What tendering scenario can be used between the carrier and the shipper? Choose the correct answer. X
A Tendering via E-mail
X
B Tendering via SMS
X
C Tendering via B2B messages
X
D Tendering via Collaboration Portal
7. To use the Collaboration Portal, a carrier must have SAP TM installed. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
141
UNIT 7 Freight Orders in Transportation Management
Lesson 1 Creating Freight Orders
143
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
List the methods of creating freight orders in SAP TM
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
142
Unit 7 Lesson 1 Creating Freight Orders
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn the different methods of creating freight orders in SAP TM. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
List the methods of creating freight orders in SAP TM
Role of Freight Orders in Transportation
Figure 80: SAP TM Document Flow
Depending on the scenario in which SAP TM is used, different types of transportation requests can be created in SAP TM to start the transportation process. These requests can include forwarding orders (FWO), order-based transportation requirements (OTR), and delivery-based transportation requirements (DTR). Upon receiving the requests, freight units are created to become the basic element for planning the movement through the network. The freight unit is a logical transport unit used
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
143
Unit 7: Freight Orders in Transportation Management
in planning. This transportation unit can be a pallet or container, but it can also be two pallets that need to be transported together, for example, for customs reasons. Freight orders record the manual or system-generated transportation planning (intermodal) activities. These freight orders are the result of planning and the consolidation of freight units on a vehicle-booked capacity or scheduled means of transport. Once freight orders are created, the carrier's short-term tendering works with additional business documents, Requests for Quotation (RFQs). Once this has been completed, transport order execution can be triggered and follow-on settlement processing can begin. Freight Orders and Freight Bookings are both the result of transportation planning and the freight document for execution. Different follow-up processes can be triggered based on Freight Orders, including subcontracting (carrier selection, tendering), charge calculation, ERP delivery and shipment creation, and tracking and tracing. Freight Orders and Freight Bookings
Figure 81: Freight Orders / Freight Bookings
Freight orders/bookings contain the following: ●
Planning information, for example, planned means of transport and stages, routing, planned pickup and delivery dates, durations and distances
●
Document dependencies, as well as predecessor and successor documents
●
Transportation charges and cost distribution
●
●
Cargo information: quantities and weights, goods information; corresponding freight orders; pick-up and delivery freight orders Execution information
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
144
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders
●
Business partner information
●
Output management
●
Customs-relevant information
●
Status information and blocking information
●
Subcontracting
Integration of Freight Orders / Booking to other Applications or Components
Figure 82: Integration of Freight Orders / Booking to other Applications or Components
In a freight order, execution is planned by a carrier or the shipper. The freight order contains the following: ●
The plan for the logistical processing, for example, when and onto which vehicle freight units are to be loaded
●
Planned departure times for the vehicles
●
Execution data, and so on
Above all, freight orders are used for land transportation. You can perform carrier selection for freight orders. You can then either subcontract freight orders directly to a carrier, or you can first perform tendering. Change controllers can be used to define how the system reacts to changes. On the other hand, in freight booking the execution is planned by a carrier, such as a ship owner. The freight booking contains the plan for the logistical processing, such as the fixed departure times of the ship. A freight booking is used to reserve freight space on a ship or in an airplane or can be created during transportation planning. The freight booking is also the document for the actual execution.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
145
Unit 7: Freight Orders in Transportation Management
Freight Order Creation Methods
Figure 83: Creating Freight Orders
You have the following four options of creating freight orders (FOs): 1. Manual Creation 2. Creation from Transportation Planning 3. Direct Creation from a Business Document in Forwarding Order Management (FWM) 4. Creation by Copying Manual Creation Manual creation is generally used when you already know the most important transportation data, such as source location, destination location, and business partner, because you regularly transport goods for a certain customer using a certain carrier. To manually create a freight order, you require the following information: general data for the freight order (shipper, consignee, carrier, resource, locations, dates and times, schedules, and terms of payment), information about any additional intermediate stops, the items involved (add freight units to the freight order or enter the items directly on the freight order), and information about the charges involved (as calculated, or configure the system to calculate charges). Once the required information has been entered, you can check the consistency and save the freight order. The freight order can then be sent over to the carrier and confirmed or rejected on behalf of the carrier. Necessary documents can be printed, and a freight settlement document created after the execution.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
146
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders
A possible variant of this process is that you simply enter the general data. You then call the transportation cockpit and assign freight units to your freight order. You then perform all additional planning steps in the transportation cockpit: for example, you can have the system calculate the transportation charges and you perform carrier selection or tendering. Creation from Transportation Planning Many companies responsible for shipping large volumes of products can use the optimizer planning in SAP TM. This gives planners a high-level perspective of their transportation demands. In planning, freight orders are created based on business documents, such as forwarding orders. To do this, freight units are first created from the inbound business documents. Capacities are then assigned to these freight units. Various constraints are taken into account, such as requested delivery dates. Freight orders are the result of the planning. You can perform planning either manually or automatically. Vehicle Scheduling and Routing (VSR) optimization is used to generate optimized freight orders. This generation is based, on the one hand, on minimization of the defined costs (for example, vehicle costs and distance-dependent vehicle costs). It also considers the selected constraints (for example, windows for delivery and incompatibilities). VSR optimization can be scheduled in the background. The optimizer evaluates all options for consolidation and all possible ways through the transportation network to obtain an optimal plan based on the cost settings made in the Planning Cost Settings area of the planning profile. Direct Creation from a Business Document in Forwarding Order Management (FWM) Freight orders can also be created directly from a business document in forwarding order management (FWM business documents). It is possible to create a freight order directly for a forwarding order stage from within the forwarding order screen. The system creates a freight order directly when you save an FWM business document (forwarding order, order-based or delivery-based transportation requirement) if the following requirements have been met: ●
●
●
The FWM business document is subcontracted and not consolidated with other FWM business documents. The FWM business document can be delivered onefreight in order, meaning there is no pre-carriage or on-carriage. The FWM business document only has one source location and one destination location.
The various options by which freight orders can be created directly are the following: ●
FWM business document type determines the freight order creation.
●
FWM business document stage type determines the freight order creation.
●
FWM business document attributes determine the freight order creation.
Creation by Copying You can create a freight order by copying an existing one (a reference document). The system copies the header data and the logistical data. However, it does not copy references to freight units and execution information.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
147
Unit 7: Freight Orders in Transportation Management
Other Creation Methods There are also other methods for freight order creation, such as creation via Web Service, creation from ERP shipment, bill of lading creation, creation of pick-up and delivery freight order from booking, and creation from a customer pick-up or self-delivery stage. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
List the methods of creating freight orders in SAP TM
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
148
Unit 7 Learning Assessment
1. Which method of freight order creation is best suited for companies who are shipping large volumes of products? Choose the correct answer. X
A Manual Creation
X
B Creation from Transportation Planning
X
C Direct Creation from a Business Document in Forwarding Order Management (FWM)
X
D Creation by Copying
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
149
Unit 7 Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Which method of freight order creation is best suited for companies who are shipping large volumes of products? Choose the correct answer. X
A Manual Creation
X
B Creation from Transportation Planning
X
C Direct Creation from a Business Document in Forwarding Order Management (FWM)
X
D Creation by Copying
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
150
UNIT 8 Freight Order Setup
Lesson 1 Configuring Freight Order Types
152
Lesson 2 Configuring Freight Order Type Determination
158
Lesson 3 Determining Business Partners
160
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
Use freight order types
●
Determine organizational units in freight orders automatically
●
Create freight order types
●
Set up freight order type determination based on the appropriate usage
●
Identify the business partner roles assigned to freight orders
●
Determine business partners in freight orders
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
151
Unit 8 Lesson 1 Configuring Freight Order Types
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn how create, configure and use freight order types. You also learn how to determine organizational units in freight orders automatically. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Use freight order types
●
Determine organizational units in freight orders automatically
●
Create freight order types
Freight Order Types
Figure 84: Freight Order Types
A freight order type defines parameters that influence how the system processes the freight order. When manually creating a freight order, the user has to select a freight order type. Freight Order Type Settings Here are some of the settings that can be configured in the freight order type:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
152
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Types
Basic Settings ●
Enabling charges and settlement
●
Determining shipper and consignee
●
Specifying if a freight order can be subcontracted
●
Defining whether a freight order is to be deleted or only canceled
●
Specifying if the freight order is to be used for customer self-delivery or pickup
Execution Settings ●
●
●
Define whether the system is to perform the execution steps within SAP Transportation Management. Specify additional conditions that need to be fulfilled so that the Ready status for Executioncan be set. Define the settings for integration with SAP Event Management.
Tendering Settings ●
You can define process and communication settings or define a condition to determine these settings.
Organizational Unit Determination ●
You can define how the system determines the purchasing organization and the execution organization.
Change Controller Settings ●
You can define settings for the change controller, for example, a default change strategy and a condition for change strategy determination.
Service Level Determination ●
If you have not defined a condition or you have defined one and the system cannot determine a result, the system uses the default service level.
Default Means of Transport Determination ●
If you have not defined a condition or you have defined one and the system cannot determine a result, the system uses the default means of transport.
Output Settings ●
You can define an output profile and a text schema, for example.
Additional Settings ●
Dangerous goods profile
●
Default FSD Type, internal settlement document type
●
Carrier selection settings
●
Enable compliance checks
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
153
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
●
Partner determination profile
●
Number range for house bill of ladings
In the freight order type, you can specify if a freight order is to be used for customer selfdelivery or pick-up. Freight Order Type Customizing The freight order type determines how a freight order is processed in SAP TM. There are some basic settings allowing for flexible customization options.
Figure 85: Freight Order Type Customizing
Freight Order Type
Figure 86: Freight Order Type
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
154
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Types
The figure, Freight Order Type, shows a system view of some of the options related to customizing freight order types. Usage of Different Types of Freight Orders and Freight Bookings
Figure 87: Freight Order/Booking Types in the Document Flow
The figure gives an overview of how different types of freight orders and freight bookings can be used in a transportation scenario and the document flow. The freight orders for pick-up and delivery represent the freight documents for the initial or final phase of the main carriage respectively. Such transfer orders can be created out of the freight booking document. To Use Freight Order Types 1. In SAP TM, In theNetWeaver Business Client , chooseFreightOrderManagement. 2. ChooseRoad → Overview Freight Orders. 3. In theActive Queries area, choose the All query. 4. In theDocument Typecolumn, note the freight order type. 5. In theDocumentcolumn, click the hyperlink to open a freight order. 6. Open theGeneral Data tab. 7. In theDocument Typefield, note the freight order type. 8. Close the freight order document.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
155
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
Freight Order Organizational Unit Determination
Figure 88: Determination of Organizations in Freight Documents
It is possible to configure the automatic determination of the purchasing/execution organizations in the freight documents. Automatic determination can be customized in the freight order or freight booking document types in the following ways: with a default organization assignment, based on the user assignment, and by specifying an organization determination condition /SCMTMS/ of type TOR_ORGUNIT.
Organizational Unit Conditions for Freight Orders The system first checks the Conditionfield. If you have not entered a condition, or if the condition does not return a result, the system checks whether Consider the Organization Unit of Usercheckbox is selected, and whether the user is assigned to a purchasing organization and an execution organization. If the checkbox is not selected or the user is not assigned to a purchasing organization and an execution organization, the system uses the data maintained in theDefault Org Unit area. To View Organizational Units in the Freight Order 1. In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Freight Order Management . 2. ChooseRoad → Edit Road Freight Order . 3. In theFreight Orderfield, enter the freight order number and choose Continue. 4. Open theGeneral Data tab. 5. Scroll to theOrganizational Data section. 6. In thePurchasing Organization field, the purchasing organization is specified. 7. In thePurchasing Groupfield, the purchasing group is specified. 8. In thePlanning and Execution Organization field, the planning and execution organization is specified. 9. In thePlanning and Execution Group field, the planning and execution group is specified.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
156
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Types
10.Close the freight order document.
Freight Order Type Creation The freight order type, freight booking type, freight unit type, transportation unit type, and service order type need to be unique across these five business document categories. For example, you cannot create a freight unit type 0003 and a freight order type 0003. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Use freight order types
●
Determine organizational units in freight orders automatically
●
Create freight order types
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
157
Unit 8 Lesson 2 Configuring Freight Order Type Determination
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn how to set up and configure freight order type determination based on the appropriate usage. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Set up freight order type determination based on the appropriate usage
Freight Order Type Determination
Figure 89: Freight Order Type Determination
It is possible to assign a freight order type to the following: ●
Forwarding order stage types
●
Freight unit types (direct shipment options)
●
Freight unit building rules (short-cut planning)
●
Freight booking types (to create pickup and delivery transfer orders)
●
Planning profiles
Freight Order Determination The system determines freight order types in one of the following ways: ●
●
If freight orders are created during planning and the freight order type is configured in the Business Document Type area of the planning profile, then the system determines the freight order type according to your settings. If freight orders are created from forwarding order stages, the system determines the freight order type based on the Customizing activity Define Default Freight Document Types for Stages .
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
158
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Type Determination
●
●
If freight units are converted into freight orders when direct shipment options (DSO) are determined, the system uses the freight order type that you specified for DSO in the freight unit type. If the system cannot identify the freight order type, then it uses the default freight order type that is defined in the Customizing activity.
Business Rule Framework (BRF) and Conditions
Figure 90: FO Type Determination Based on BRF and Conditions
The business rule framework (BRF) and conditions can be used for determining freight order types, based on various business rules or needs. For determining freight order types based on BRF and conditions, set up the freight order type Determination Condition /SCMTMS/TOR_TYPE. This condition can be assigned to the freight unit type (for direct shipment options) or the planning profile. During the creation of the freight order, the system evaluates the BRF and condition, and then identifies the freight order type based on the available data. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Set up freight order type determination based on the appropriate usage
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
159
Unit 8 Lesson 3 Determining Business Partners
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn how to identify the business partner roles assigned to freight orders. You will also learn how to determine business partners in freight orders. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Identify the business partner roles assigned to freight orders
●
Determine business partners in freight orders
Freight Order Business Partners
Figure 91: Freight Orders Default Business Partners
By default, there are a number of party roles specified in a freight order, such as a carrier, executing carrier, shipper, consignee, and communication party. In addition, other party roles can be either manually added or automatically determined by the system.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
160
Lesson: Determining Business Partners
Business Partner Roles Assignment
Figure 92: Business Partners In Freight Orders
It is possible to maintain different party roles within the freight order business document. From a business perspective, there are a number of relevant and required party roles, such as a carrier, shipper, or consignee. Carrier Information Maintenance Carrier information can be maintained in the following ways: ●
Entered manually
●
Determined based on the carrier selection process
●
Determined based on the tendering process
●
Copied over into the freight document when selecting a schedule
●
Determined fromPartner Determination functionality
The shipper and consignee information is primarily required when a house bill of lading is generated for the business document. A house bill of lading serves as a receipt to the shipper for the goods that are being shipped. Shipper and Consignee Maintenance Shipper and consignee information can be maintained in the following ways: ●
●
●
Entered manually Determined from the predecessor business document (related forwarding order, OTR or DTR) Determined using the Partner Determination functionality
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
161
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
Business Partner Determination
Figure 93: Business Partner Determination
Based on various factors, the business partners relevant for a business process can vary. Factors affecting the business partners and the partner roles can be, for example, shipment type, traffic direction, mode of transportation, and so on. In addition, sometimes certain control mechanisms need to be in place, which influence how and when it is possible to modify business partners. For this purpose, partner determination procedures can be used. Partner determination procedures are sets of rules for how the system works with business partners during a business process. It brings together partner functions, and also includes additional information on the behavior of the business partners. Automatic determination of the relevant business partners results in a more efficient system and also reduces the chance of manual errors. Configuring a Partner Determination Procedure It is possible to define a partner determination procedure and assign it to different document categories at a document-type level. Then, when you create documents of that type, the system works with the partners involved according to the rules specified in the procedure. Therefore, the system can automatically handle partners for an internet sales transaction differently than it handles a business activity, for example, without end users concerning themselves with these differences. The settings in the procedure apply both to partners determined automatically and those entered manually. The steps involved in configuring a partner determination procedure are the following: 1. Set up the relevant and required party roles in the system. 2. Define partner determination profiles and assign required settings to the party role (for example mandatory, or optional) and specify the logic for determining the party role value (for example, reference another party role, determined from BAdI). 3. Assign the partner determination profile in the freight order/freight booking document type in Customizing.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
162
Lesson: Determining Business Partners
The partner determination profile influences the following: ●
The party roles available in a business document.
●
The level of control the user has in entering the party role.
●
●
Depending on the settings you define in Customizing, whether you change or delete a party role, or add one from a list of available party roles. You can also specify settings that prevent specific party roles from being changed or deleted. How the system determines business partners for the party roles.
Business Partner Determination: Relationships The system uses one of the following relationships, which you specify in Customizing, to determine a business partner: Party role and source party role A party role can be specified as the source party role for a particular party role. In the application, a business partner is entered in the field that is specified as the source party role, and the system automatically copies the business partner to the associated party role. For example, in Customizing, you specify the party role as Invoicing Party, the source type as Party Role, and the source role as Carrier. In the application when the carrier is maintained as ABC, the system assigns ABC as the business partner for the invoicing party. Party role and the source party role in business partner master data (relationship) The system uses the relationship between organizations and business partners in the Customer Partner Determination and Vendor Partner Determination tabs in theBP (Maintain Business Partner) transaction to determine a business partner in a business document. For example, take a logistics service provider (LSP), which has a business with a business partner APP_1. In the BP (Maintain Business Partner) transaction of APP_1 with partner functionSold-to Party, maintain on the Customer Partner Determination tab of the BP transaction for APP_1, and create a relationship between sales organization 561234 and the business partner APP_INV (APP_INV fulfills the role of invoicing party for APP_1). In the profile Customizing, specify the party role Invoicing as Party , the source type as BP Relationship, and the source role as Ordering Party. In a forwarding order, you specify the organization as 561234 General on the Data tab and the ordering party as APP_1 on Business the Partnertab. The system checks the business partner master data for APP_1. OnCustomer the Partner Determination tab, it finds that APP_1 uses APP_INV as the invoicing party for organization 561234. It assigns APP_INV as the business partner for the invoicing party. BAdI There is also an option to determine business partners based on BAdIs. If business partners are determined based on special business rules or conditions, then the BAdI can be implemented and pointed to the relevant party role. To Configure Business Partner Determination Note that, in this procedure, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the number assigned to you by your instructor
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
163
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
1. To view the standard party roles available in the SAP TM. a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Master Data → Business Partners→ Define Party Roles . b) Go back. 2. To configure the business partner determination profile. a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Master Data → Business Partners→ Define Partner Determination Profiles . b) On theChange View "Define Partner Determination Profile": Overview screen, choose New Entries . c) In thePart. Det. Prof.column, enterPP##. d) In theDescriptioncolumn, enterGRP## - Partner Determination Profile. e) Press Enter. f) Select the new entry. g) In theDialog Structure , double-clickAssign Party Roles . h) ChooseNew Entries . i) Enter the following data: Party RoleParty RoleSequence Edit LevelSrce Type Srce Role Not Mod. Desc. 1
Ordering 1 Party
Mandato- Party ry Role
--
Selected
6
Shipper
2
Mandato- Party ry Role
--
Selected
5
Consign- 3 ee
Optional Party Role
--
Selected
12
Carrier
4
Mandato- Party ry Role
--
Selected
10
Bill-to Party
5
Choose from List
6
--
203
Notify Party
6
Optional Party Role
12
--
TM001
Additional Notify Party
7
Optional Party Role
5
–
Party Role
j) Save and exit the function. 3. To assign the business partner profile to a freight order type.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
164
Lesson: Determining Business Partners
a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Freight Order Management→ Define Freight Order Types . b) Select and open freight order type T0##. c) In theAdditional Settings section, in the Partner Determination Profile field select GRP## - Partner Determination Profile. d) Save and exit the function. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Identify the business partner roles assigned to freight orders
●
Determine business partners in freight orders
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
165
Unit 8 Learning Assessment
1. A freight order type defines the parameters that influence how the system processes a freight order. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
2. When automatically determining organizational units in freight orders, which of the following does the system check first? Choose the correct answer. X
A Whether the user is assigned to a purchasing organization
X
B Whether theConsider Organization Unit of User checkbox is selected
X
C Whether there is a condition in the Conditionfield
X
D Whether the user is assigned to an execution organization
3. Which of the following statements about organizational units are correct? Choose the correct answers. X
A Organizational units are used to represent the organizational structure of a company.
X
B Organizational units are used to allocate revenue and costs to different groups within a company.
X
C Organizational units in SAP TM are determined by organizational units in SAP ERP.
X
D Organizational units can be determined automatically based on predefined conditions.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
166
Unit 8: Learning Assessment
4. If the system is unable to determine a freight order type, the default freight order type specified in the customizing activity is chosen. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
5. Which of the following party roles are specified by default in a freight order? Choose the correct answers. X
A Carrier
X
B Shipper
X
C Consignee
X
D Communication party
X
E Purchasing organization
6. The partner determination profile influences how the system determines business partners for party roles. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
167
Unit 8 Learning Assessment - Answers
1. A freight order type defines the parameters that influence how the system processes a freight order. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
That is correct. A freight order type defines the parameters that influence how the system processes a freight order. 2. When automatically determining organizational units in freight orders, which of the following does the system check first? Choose the correct answer. X
A Whether the user is assigned to a purchasing organization
X
B Whether theConsider Organization Unit of User checkbox is selected
X
C Whether there is a condition in the Conditionfield
X
D Whether the user is assigned to an execution organization
3. Which of the following statements about organizational units are correct? Choose the correct answers. X
A Organizational units are used to represent the organizational structure of a company.
X
B Organizational units are used to allocate revenue and costs to different groups within a company.
X
C Organizational units in SAP TM are determined by organizational units in SAP ERP.
X
D Organizational units can be determined automatically based on predefined conditions.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
168
Unit 8: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. If the system is unable to determine a freight order type, the default freight order type specified in the customizing activity is chosen. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
5. Which of the following party roles are specified by default in a freight order? Choose the correct answers. X
A Carrier
X
B Shipper
X
C Consignee
X
D Communication party
X
E Purchasing organization
6. The partner determination profile influences how the system determines business partners for party roles. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
169
UNIT 9 Freight Order Integration
Lesson 1 Integrating Freight Orders with Shipments
171
Lesson 2 Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
175
Lesson 3 Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
184
Lesson 4 Communicating Freight Orders to Other Companies
197
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
Describe the integration scenarios between freight orders and shipments
●
Explain the business scenarios for freight order-based shipments
●
Configure the settings to enable freight order-based shipments
●
Create shipment-based freight orders
●
Configure settings to enable shipment-based freight orders
●
Explain the business scenarios for business-to-business communication
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
170
Unit 9 Lesson 1 Integrating Freight Orders with Shipments
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn about the integration scenarios between freight orders and shipments. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Describe the integration scenarios between freight orders and shipments
Shipment Integration Scenarios
Figure 94: Freight Order - Shipments Integration
Note: The termsinbound and outbound , in the context of SAP ERP shipment integration, are from the perspective of SAP TM. The shipment integration process is typically used when customers have multiple systems. SAP Enterprise Resource Planning (SAP ERP) performs tasks such as the purchasing of material from external and internal suppliers, the storage of material in plant warehouses, and the shipping of these materials to customers. Transport to and from the warehouse can be managed by a transport module or transport system.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
171
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Transport planning is performed in an external system - SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM). SAP TM can be used to perform certain functions of the transportation process (such as planning, tendering, and charge calculation). However, transportation management as a whole is performed in SAP ERP. Shipment Scenarios There are two possible variations of this business scenario: ●
Shipment integration outbound In this scenario, SAP ERP has deliveries (inbound or outbound), which contain the necessary information for the fulfillment of the orders. The deliveries are transmitted to SAP TM, where they become delivery based transport requests (DTR). Planning is performed in SAP TM resulting in freight orders. These freight orders are then sent back to SAP ERP, where they become SAP ERP shipments so the execution can proceed. In this scenario, the transportation planning is performed in SAP TM and the SAP ERP shipment is used only for execution.
●
Shipment integration inbound In this scenario, sales orders created in SAP ERP result in deliveries that are relevant for transportation. A shipment is created for the deliveries. When the shipment is ready for tendering, indicated by its status, and saved, the shipment is sent to SAP TM and a freight order is created. Tendering is then carried out in SAP TM. The tendering result is sent back to SAP ERP and the shipment is updated with the proper forwarding agent.
Both of these scenarios are used by customers who have already implemented and are using SAP LE-TRA, the transportation component of SAP ERP, and have invested in enhancements development and want to protect these investments. In such cases, they use SAP TM only for specific purposes. The terms inbound and outbound , in the context of SAP ERP shipment integration, are from the perspective of SAP TM. There is a 1:1 relation between the SAP ERP shipment document and the SAP TM freight order.
Hint: It is also possible to use SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) for the purpose of execution. SAP EWM integration is covered in a different enablement.
Enhancements for Shipment Integration
Figure 95: Enhancements for Shipment Integration
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
172
Lesson: Integrating Freight Orders with Shipments
There are many Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) available, which customers can use to the extend the standard functionality of SAP TM to match their business processes. BAdIs for Outbound Integration ● BAdI for TransportationOrderSCMExecutionRequest_Out You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service interfaceTransportationOrderSCMExecutionRequest_Out . ●
BAdI for TransportationOrderSCMExecutionCancellationReq_Out You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service interfaceTransportationOrderSCMExecutionCancellationRequest_Out .
●
BAdI for TransportationOrderSCMExecutionConfirmation_In You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service interfaceTransportationOrderSCMExecutionConfirmation_In .
●
BAdI for TranspOrderSCMExecutionStatusNotification_In You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service interfaceTransportationOrderSCMExecutionStatusNotification_In .
●
BAdI for TranspOrderSCMExecDeliveryAssignmentChngdNotif_In You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service interfaceTransportationOrderSCMExecutionDeliveryAssignmentChangedNotification_In .
●
BAdI for TranspOrderSCMExecutionItmPckgAssgnmtChngdNotif_In You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service interfaceTransportationOrderSCMExecutionItmPckgAssgnmtChangedNotification_In .
BAdIs for Inbound Integration BAdI for TransportationOrderSCMRequest_In
●
You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service interfaceTransportationOrderSCMRequest_In . This BAdI contains the method CHANGE_MODIFICATION. You can use this method to handle new fields within the inbound service interface TransportationOrderSCMRequest_In. For example, if you extend a business object in the sending system, you can use this method to extend the inbound service interface. You can then map the new fields to existing or new fields in the transportation order business object. ●
BAdI for TransportationOrderSCMCancellationRequest_In You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service interfaceTransportationOrderSCMCancellationRequest_In .
●
BAdI for TranspOrderSCMTenderingResultNotification_Out You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service interfaceTransportationOrderSCMTenderingResultNotification_Out .
In Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, you can access the BAdIs by choosing SAP Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Transportation Management → Integration→ Enterprise Services→ ERP Logistics Integration→ ERP Shipment Integration .
Facilitated Discussion: Integration Scenarios
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
173
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Describe the integration scenarios between freight orders and shipments
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
174
Unit 9 Lesson 2 Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn about freight order-based shipment scenario and how to configure the settings to enable freight order-based shipments. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Explain the business scenarios for freight order-based shipments
●
Configure the settings to enable freight order-based shipments
Freight Order-based Shipments Scenarios
Figure 96: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
In this scenario, you carry out transportation planning in SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) for transportation activities that are based on deliveries received from SAP ERP. You can then carry out transportation execution in SAP ERP for the freight orders that were created during transportation planning.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
175
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Note the following: ●
●
SAP TM creates a delivery-based transportation requirement (DTR) for each delivery received from SAP ERP. There is always a one-to-one relationship between an ERP delivery and a DTR. SAP ERP creates an ERP shipment for each freight order received from SAP TM. There is an n-to-one relationship between DTRs and a freight order; and, therefore, between the ERP deliveries that were originally sent to SAP TM and the ERP shipment that SAP ERP creates based on a freight order.
Outbound integration of shipment processing enables you to do the following: ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Transfer freight orders from SAP TM to SAP ERP and create shipments in SAP ERP based on the freight orders. Update a freight-order-based shipment in SAP ERP if the relevant freight order is changed in SAP TM and the changes are transferred to SAP ERP. Delete a freight-order-based shipment in SAP ERP if the relevant freight order is deleted in SAP TM. Send a confirmation from SAP ERP to SAP TM when a shipment is created in SAP ERP based on a freight order in SAP TM. Update the execution status of a freight order in SAP TM based on the overall status of the corresponding shipment in SAP ERP using a status notification. Update a freight order in SAP TM based on a notification about changes to deliveries assigned to a shipment in SAP ERP. Update a freight order in SAP TM based on a notification about changed item and handling unit assignments to container handling units of a shipment in SAP ERP.
When the freight order is updated, the related shipment document is updated automatically.
Note: The outbound integration scenario can also be used when the execution is performed in SAP EWM (instead of SAP ERP). In this case the EWM system needs the packaging material information for planning purposes. The necessary information for creating handling units must be sent from SAP TM to SAP ERP and is essential for scenarios where an EWM system is used to pick/pack/load. Process 1. You send ERP deliveries to SAP TM, and the SAP TM system creates delivery-based transportation requirements (DTRs) for the deliveries. 2. You plan the transportation process in SAP TM based on the DTRs. During planning, you create freight orders. 3. You carry out tendering for the freight orders in SAP TM (optional). 4. You send the freight orders to SAP ERP to carry out transportation execution. 5. SAP ERP creates a shipment for each freight order.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
176
Lesson: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
Figure 97: Freight Order Based Shipment Creation
In a freight order-based shipment, the freight order can be created using SAP TM. The freight order creation can be based upon sales orders sent to SAP TM as Order Transportation requests (OTRs). The delivery may be created via the delivery proposal process in SAP TM. The delivery proposal can be triggered using a batch job or online in the POWL of the Order Transportation Request or in the Transportation Cockpit. When the delivery is created in SAP ERP, the TRDO output is created. The output triggers the Delivery Transportation Request (DTR) to be created in SAP TM. Once the DTR is created in SAP TM, the freight order is automatically enabled for shipment creation.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
177
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Shipment Creation
Figure 98: Shipment Creation
The shipment can be triggered from SAP TM fright order using the following processes: ●
●
Batch job Process Freight Orders (/SCMTMS/TOR_FO_PROC). When you use this report, you can select freight orders using a selection profile or by specifying selection criteria explicitly. In the freight order UI, you can choose to trigger the shipment directly. Note that you do not have to be in Changemode to trigger this process.
Freight Order Shipment Integration
Figure 99: FreightOrderShipmentIntegration_image.pptx
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
178
Lesson: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
When integrating the SAP TM freight order with SAP ERP shipment, configure the following settings: ●
In SAP ERP, determine output condition types for confirmation and status notification
●
Determine partner profile for message type SHPMNT05 with the following message codes: -
-
●
CRE – to create the SAP ERP shipment the first time CNF – to process confirmation message. This message updates the shipment number reference in the TOR Root
-
STA – to process the status change messages from SAP ERP
-
UPD – to update the SAP ERP with the changes from SAP TM
Generate output condition records from SAP ERP for confirmation and status changes
Freight Order-Based Shipment Settings
Figure 100: Outbound Shipment Integration - Settings
Settings and Prerequisites in SAP ERP ●
●
●
Set up an external number range that matches the freight order (FO) number range. Adopt route and determine legs -these settings prevent the system from carrying out additional calculations related to transportation stages when it creates a shipment. Data about stages is taken from the IDoc. Maintain transportation planning point ‘1000’ - SAP TM does not use transportation planning points. Transportation planning point 1000 is, therefore, transferred by default to SAP ERP. If you require other transportation planning points that are stored with the SAP
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
179
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
ERP shipment, implement BAdI BADI_LE_SHIPMENT to determine and save the correct transportation planning point for the shipment. ●
Ensure that the delivery types are relevant for transportation planning
●
Set up shipment types
Note: If you also want to integrate SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM), set up an external number range with the same interval for transportation units (TUs) in SAP EWM. This ensures that, in the context of outbound shipment integration, a freight order in SAP TM has the same number as the corresponding shipment in SAP ERP and transportation unit in SAP EWM. For more information, see the respective scenario configuration guides. Settings and Prerequisites in SAP TM ●
Assign an output profile to the FO types.
●
Choose the correctDocument Creation Relevance field: -
Shipment creation in SAP ERP
-
Shipment creation with HUs for vehicles and containers
-
Shipment creation with HUs for vehicles only
-
Shipment creation with HUs for containers only
●
Each DTR should contain all items from the corresponding delivery.
●
The FO are based on DTRs only.
●
●
●
●
The FO should contain all freight units (FUs) from each related DTR (no subsequent delivery split in SAP ERP). The FO must contain FUs that are derived from either exclusively inbound deliveries or exclusively outbound deliveries. The FO contains FUs that are related to deliveries from the same ERP system. The FO should be In Processand not have one of the following statuses: Blocked for execution,Blocked for planning or Marked for deletion .
Packaging Information If you want the shipments in SAP ERP to contain packaging information in the form of handling units, specify that packaging information is to be sent to SAP ERP along with the other freight order data. Packaging information is required if you want to send the shipments from SAP ERP to SAP EWM to carry out warehouse planning and execution. If you select shipment creation with handling units, configure the required settings for vehicle resources or containers, as follows:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
180
Lesson: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
●
●
To enable SAP ERP to generate a handling unit for a vehicle resource, assign a packaging material in the resource master data. In SAP NWBC, choose Master Data→ Resources → Define Resource . You specify the packaging material on Transporttab. the To enable SAP ERP to generate a handling unit for a container, assign a packaging material to the container's equipment type and group. This can be done in Customizing for transportation management under Master Data→ Resources → Define Equipment Groups and Equipment Types → Equipment Type .
To Configure Settings Freight Order-based Shipments 1. Enable Freight Order types for ERP Shipment Integration Outbound. a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Freight Order Management→ Freight Order→ Define Freight Order Types . b) Select the row for the freight order type and choose(Details). c) Check if theNumber Range Interval is an internal number range. In the field, press F4 and make a note of the From number and the To number. d) In theAdditional Settings section, in the Document Creation Relevance field, enter Shipment Creation in SAP ERP, or Shipment Creation with HUs for Vehicles and Containers or Shipment Creation with HUs for Containers Only or Shipment Creation with HUs for Vehicles Only. e) Save and exit the function. 2. Create shipment type in SAP ERP for ERP Shipment Integration Outbound. a) In SAP ERP, in Customizing for Logistics Execution, choose Logistics Execution → Transportation→ Shipments → Define Number Ranges for Shipments . b) ChooseChange intervals . c) If required, define a new external number range for the freight order using the same number range that was used in the ERP shipment. d) Click Save and exit the function. e) In Customizing, choose Define Shipment Types . f) ChooseNew Entries . g) Create a new shipment type T0##, with the following details: Field
Value
Shipment Type
T0##
Description
GRP## Ship. Int. Outbound
NR int. assgnt
01
No. range ext.
FO
ShpmtComplType
Loaded Outbound Shipment
Shipping Type
01 (Truck)
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
181
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Field
Value
Service Level
Load
Process Control
Individual shipment using one mode of transport
Leg Indicator
Direct Leg
Adopt route
Do not adopt stages
Determine legs
Blank. No legs to be determined
GR-RelevanceInd
Normal
Pick check
Shipment completion only for full picking
Weight unit
LB
Volume unit
CDM
h) Save and exit the function. 3. Maintaining transportation planning points. a) In SAP ERP, in Customizing for Enterprise Structure, choose Definition→ Logistics Execution→ Maintain Transportation Planning Point . b) Create transportation planning point 1000 by copying the existing transportation planning point 0001 to be used for SAP TM integration. SAP TM does not use transportation planning points. Transportation planning point 1000 is, therefore, transferred by default to SAP ERP. If you require other transportation planning points that are stored with the SAP ERP shipment, implement BAdI BADI_LE_SHIPMENT to determine and save the correct transportation planning point for the shipment. c) In SAP ERP, in Customizing for Enterprise Structure, choose Definition→ Logistics Execution→ Maintain Transportation Planning Point for External Systems . An entry for the transportation planning point defined above should exist. 4. Maintain the output control settings. a) Configure output control settings to send shipments from SAP ERP to SAP TM in the context of SAP TM Outbound Shipment Integration. This involves Customizing activities for maintaining field catalogs, condition tables, access sequences, condition types, and schemas. For detailed information, refer to the integration guide Basic Settings and Integration for SAP ERP. 5. Configure inbound and outbound processing. Configure the settings for inbound communication to SAP ERP (inbound IDocs) and outbound communication from SAP ERP (outbound IDocs). For detailed information, refer to the integration guide Basic Settings and Integration for SAP ERP. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Explain the business scenarios for freight order-based shipments
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
182
Lesson: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
●
Configure the settings to enable freight order-based shipments
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
183
Unit 9 Lesson 3 Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn about shipment-based freight order scenarios and how to configure the settings to enable shipment-based freight orders. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Create shipment-based freight orders
●
Configure settings to enable shipment-based freight orders
Shipment-Based Freight Order Scenarios
Figure 101: Inbound Shipment Integration
In the shipment-based freight order scenario, the transportation planning functions are carried out in SAP ERP or a third party logistics system and not in SAP TM. SAP ERP shipments are created as a result of this process. The SAP ERP shipment is then integrated with SAP TM for one or more of the following scenarios:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
184
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
●
To perform tendering functions
●
For freight costing and rating purposes
Note: There is a one-to-one relationship between an SAP ERP shipment and an SAP TM freight order. An SAP TM freight order must be synchronized with an SAP ERP shipment if it is used for freight costing purposes. To carry out the inbound shipment integration, do the following: ●
●
●
The shipment to be integrated to SAP TM must have the output created. The output should be set up to create IDOC of type SHPMNT05. SAP Integration system , SAP PI must be setup to process and map the SHPMNT05 to the appropriate message for SAP TM. Customizing must be established in both SAP ERP and SAP TM.
The interface shown in the figure, is based on services (inbound and outbound) in SAP TM and IDocs in SAP ERP. PIs are connected to an XI system integration process. These services and IDocs are not covered in this training. Inbound Shipment Integration Message Flow
Figure 102: Inbound Shipment Integration Message Flow
The figure, Inbound Shipment Integration Message Flow, shows the message flow between SAP ERP and SAP TM. When a shipment's tendering status New is Offer from the Carrier , the process is triggered. An output generates IDoc SHMPNT05, which is mapped to an SOA message TransportationOrderSCMRequest_In. In SAP TM, during the inbound proxy processing, a freight order is created. You can choose to trigger carrier selection from SAP TM. To do so, specify the means of transport for the freight order and set up the appropriate transportation lane. Once these settings are in place, you can trigger the tendering process if the freight order is set up as
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
185
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Relevant for Subcontracting. The tendering result can be passed to an SAP ERP shipment using the message TransportationOrderSCMTenderingResultNotification_Out, which can be mapped to SHPMNT.SHPMNT05. If you have found and accepted a carrier, the enterprise service sends the following data: ●
Carrier
●
Price
●
Confirmed dates and times
●
Tendering status
If you have not found a carrier, the enterprise service sends the corresponding tendering status. If the SAP ERP shipment document already contains a carrier, the carrier information is sent to SAP TM. Ensure that the carrier partner is CIFed from SAP ERP to SAP TM. Once SAP TM receives the shipment, a freight order is created and the tendering process can be carried out. During tendering, the carrier can submit a quotation to SAP TM. The price in this quotation can be passed back to SAP ERP and stored in the shipment document. Freight Costing and Cost Distribution
Figure 103: Freight Costing and Cost Distribution
To integrate SAP ERP shipments into SAP TM for freight costing and cost distribution purposes, create the necessary transportation charge management (TCM) master data, such as agreements and rate tables; and configure the system for cost distribution and settlement functions. To Create Shipment-Based Freight Orders 1. In SAP ERP, create a sales order using the data in the table.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
186
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
Table 6: Sale Order Data Field
Value
Order Type
ZT00
Sales Organization
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Sold-to-Party
CUST00-25
PO Number
TM310-GRP00-3.3
Product
PRODTM-00
Quantity
20
UoM
BOX
a) In SAP ERP, in theCommandfield, enter transaction code VA01 and press Enter. b) Enter the data provided in the table. Field
Value
Order Type
ZT00
Sales Organization
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
c) Press Enter. d) In theCreate TM100 Standard Order: Overview screen, enter the following data: (All other fields must be left with default values.) Field
Value
Sold-to Party
CUST00-25
PO Number
TM310-GRP00-3.3
e) On theAll Itemssection, enter the following data: Product
Quantity
UoM
PRODTM-00
20
BOX
f) Take note of the delivery date. g) ChooseSave. h) Record the sales order number. 2. Create deliveries for the sales order.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
187
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
a) In SAP ERP, on the SAP Easy Access screen, in Command the field, enter transaction code VL01N and press Enter. b) In theCreate Outbound Delivery with Order Reference screen, in theShipping Point field, enter3100. c) In theOrderfield, enter the sales order number. d) In theSelection Date field, enter the delivery date of the sales order and press Enter. e) Click Save. f) Record the deliver number. 3. Create a shipment for the delivery using the data in the table. Field
Value
Transport. Planning Point
3000
Shipment Type
T100
a) In SAP ERP, on the SAP Easy Access screen, in Command the field, enter transaction code VT01N and press Enter. b) Enter the data from the table. c) ChooseSelect Deliveries . d) In the dialog box, in the W. ref. toarea, in theOutbound Delivery field, enter the delivery number in the first field. e) ChooseExecute. f) Save the shipment and note the shipment number. g) Exit the function. 4. Send the shipment to SAP TM for tendering. a) In theCommandfield, enter transaction code VT02N and press Enter. b) Enter the shipment number and press Enter. c) On theProcessingtab, in theForwarding Agent field, enterCARR-00-01. d) In theStagestab, clickLeg determination . e) Click Continueto accept the proposal. f) On theStagestab, scroll to the right and enter Planned the Shipment Start and Planned Shipment End Date according to the delivery dates. g) Open theTendertab. h) In theTenderstatus field, choose New Offer from Shipper . i) Save the shipment. 5. In SAP TM, view the freight order created from the shipment.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
188
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
a) In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Freight Order Management → Road → Overview Road Freight Orders . b) Select the query All Created from ERP Shipment . c) ChooseRefresh. d) In the query list, use the ERP Shipmentcolumn, and locate the shipment number. e) The freight order number, is in the Documentcolumn on the same row. 6. Open the freight order. a) In the query list, select the row for the freight order. b) ChooseEdit. c) Open theGeneral Data tab. d) In theDocument Typefield, you will see the freight order type. e) In theCarrierfield, you see that the carrier information has been carried over from the shipment. f) Open theDocument Flow tab. Here you will see the predecessor documents. 7. Send the freight order for tendering. a) In the freight order, choose Subcontracting→ Automatic Tendering . b) In the dialog box, enter the following data: Field
Value
Tendering Manager
Your User ID
Tendering Profile
TM310-BROADCAST-1STEP
c) Save the freight order. d) Open theSubcontractingtab, and open the Tendering Overview tab. e) Note the RFQ numbers created for carriers CARR-00-01 and CARR-00-02. 8. Accept and award the tender to CARR-00-02. a) In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Freight Order Management → Road → Overview Tendering . b) In theFreight RFQsquery section, select Open. c) Click Refresh. d) Select the RFQ corresponding to carrier CARR-00-01. e) ChooseCreate Freight Quotation → Reject (other) . f) In the dialog box, click OK. g) Select the RFQ corresponding to carrier CARR-00-02. h) ChooseCreate Freight Quotation → Accept.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
189
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
i) In the dialog box, choose OK. j) Open or refresh the freight order. k) Open theSubcontractingtab. l) In theTendering Overview tab, select the RFQ for CARR-00-02. m) Look at theAward Status , it has changed to Awarded. Look at theCarrierfield, carrier CARR-00-02 has been assigned to the freight order now. Note: The quotations are evaluated by a background report which is scheduled to run every five minutes on this system. Therefore, it might take up to five minutes until the quotation is awarded and the new carrier is assigned. n) Review the changed carrier in the SAP ERP shipment.
Shipment-Based Freight Order Settings Configuring Inbound Shipment Integration Settings in SAP TM ●
Assign Freight Order Types to ERP Shipment Types
●
Maintain suitable output profile for the freight order
●
SpecifyFreight Order Typeas Relevant forSub-Contracting
●
SpecifyDocument Creation Relevance for Freight Order Type as Freight Order Created from SAP ERP Shipment .
Configuring Inbound Shipment Integration Settings in SAP ERP ●
Set necessary delivery types as relevant for transportation
●
Associate the necessary output type to the shipment type
●
Maintain condition types for service agents
Configuring Inbound Shipment Integration Settings in SAP NetWeaver XI ●
Set up the inbound integration scenario TM_ERPShipmentIntegration_In
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
190
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
Figure 104: Configuration for Multiple Processing
You can configure the SAP ERP shipment output for multiple processing so that critical changes are transferred to SAP TM. This is especially important when using SAP TM for freight costing and cost distribution purposes. To do this, set up a partner profile with consideration to the following settings: ●
Message Code 1. CRE/UPD for triggering creation or update of TM freight order 2. TND to receive tendering result notifications from SAP TM 3. CNC for triggering cancelations in SAP TM
●
Process Code 1. SD11 for all scenarios
To trigger the cancellation of freight orders after the shipment is canceled or deleted, activate SHIPPL.TPSSHP01. Depending upon your scenario, there are 2 variants for canceling the freight order. Variant 1 If you reset the tender status in shipments to CN and you want to delete shipments in ERP, use this variant. Depending on the type of freight order, this will either delete the freight order in SAP TM, or its status will be changedCanceled. to To configure this variant, proceed as follows: 1. Create a Business Add-In (BAdI) implementation for the BAdI BADI_LE_SHIPMENT in the method BEFORE_UPDATE. For this, use the source code that is described in the manual correction instructions 936359. When you delete the shipment or change its tender status to CN, the IDoc TPSSHT01 is created with the output type SHIPPL in the method. 2. Create a new database table to be able to determine the logical system for the IDoc TPSSHT01. Open transaction SE11 and create a new database table with the following fields:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
191
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Field
Key
Initial value
Data element Short description
MANDT
X
X
MANDT
Client
TPLST
X
X
TPLST
Transportation planning point
SHTYP
X
X
SHTYP
Shipment type
VTPARN
EDI_VTPARN
Partner number
VTPART
EDI_VTPART
Partner type
3. Modify the function module IDOC_OUTPUT_SHIPPL that is called in the BAdI implementation as described in the manual correction instructions 1298598. Variant 2 Use this variant if you only want to reset the tender status in the shipment to CN. Shipments are never deleted in SAP ERP in your process. Depending on the type of the freight order, this mean that, in SAP TM, the freight order deleted or the status is changed to canceled. With this output type, an IDoc is created with the basic type SHPMNT05 and the message variant CNC. This IDoc is used in SAP PI for a web service that deletes or cancels a freight order in SAP TM. You can create the output type, for example ZTND, using the settings listed below. Table 7: Output Configuration: General Data Field
Value
Output Type
ZTND
Access Sequence (on theGeneraltab)
Z001
Access to Conditions (on theGeneraltab)
Selected
Multiple Issuing (on theGeneraltab)
Selected
Dispatch Time (on the Default Valuestab)
Send Immediately (4)
Transmission Medium (on theDefault Values EDI (6) tab) Partner Function(on theDefault Valuestab)
SP
Table 8: Output Configuration: Processing Routines Field
Value
Program
RSNATED
From Routine
EDI_PROCESSING
Table 9: Output Configuration: Partner Functions Open thePartner Functionsfolder and create a new entry with the following data:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
192
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
Field
Value
Medium
EDI (6)
Function
SP
Name
Forwarding Agent
Variant 2 Output Procedure Table 10: Output Procedure: General Data In theControl Datafolder, create a new entry with the following data: Field
Value
Step
Numerical value
Counter
Numerical value
Output type
ZTND (TNDR)
Requirement
52
In Customizing for Logistics Execution, choose Logistics Execution→ Transportation → Basic Transportation Functions → Output Control→ Maintain Output Determination for Shipments → Maintain Output Types. You can customize your access sequence according to your business requirements. After the output type has been successfully created, assign it to the output determination procedure. In Customizing for Logistics Execution, choose Logistics Execution→ Transportation → Basic Transportation Functions → Output Control→ Maintain Output Determination for Shipments → Maintain Output Determination Procedure. To send the updates to SAP TM, create another output type, for example ZUPD. To prevent the message from being generated if the tender status has not changed, create a requirement. There is an example for a requirement in the manual correction instruction in SAP OSS note 1298755. To Configure Settings for Shipment-Based Freight Orders Note that, in this procedure, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the number assigned to you by your instructor 1. In SAP ERP, in Customizing for Logistics Execution create a shipment type for ERP Shipment Integration Inbound with the following information: Field
Value
Shipment type
T1##
Description
GRP## ShipInt Inbnd
NR int. assgnt
01
ShpmtComplType
Loaded Outbound Shipment
Shipping Type
01 (Truck)
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
193
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Field
Value
Service Level
Load
ProcessControl
Individual shipment using one mode of transport
Leg Indicator
Direct Leg
Adopt Route
Adopt All stages
Determine Legs
Legs determined according to departure point & itinerary
GR- RelevanceInd
Normal
Pick check
Shipment completion only for full picking
Weight Unit
LB
Volume Unit
CDM
Copy Routine
7 (Service Agent/Route)
a) In Customizing for Logistics Execution, choose Logistics Execution→ Transportation → Shipments→ Define Shipment Types. b) ChooseNew Entries . c) Enter the data provided in the table. d) Save the shipment type. 2. Assign the output determination procedure for shipment type using the following data: Field
Value
Shipment Type
T1##
Output Determination Procedure
ZSHIP1
a) In Customizing for Logistics Execution, choose Logistics Execution→ Transportation → Basic Transportation Functions → Output Control→ Maintain Output Determination for Shipments → Assign Output Determination Procedure . b) Navigate to your shipment type T1##. c) Save the assignment. 3. Assign the text determination procedure for shipment type using the following data: Field
Value
Shipment Type
T1##
Text Determination Procedure
03
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
194
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
a) In Customizing for Logistics Execution, choose Logistics Execution→ Transportation → Basic Transportation Functions → Text Control → Define and Assign Text Determination Procedure . b) ChooseShipment → Header. c) ChooseChange. d) In theDialog Structure , double-clickText Procedure Assignment . e) Navigate to your shipment type and assign the text determination procedure as shown in the table. f) Save the assignment. 4. Create condition records for shipments with the following data: Output Type
ShipmentCarrier Type
Function Partner Medium Date
Language
TNDR
T1##
CARR-00 LS -01
XI_00_8 00
6
4
EN
TNCN
T1##
CARR-00 LS -01
XI_00_8 00
6
4
EN
ZSHP
T1##
CARR-00 LS -01
XI_00_8 00
6
4
EN
a) In SAP ERP, in theCommandfield, enter transaction code VV71 and press Enter. b) Create condition records using the data in the table. c) Save the condition records. 5. Create a freight order type for Inbound ERP Integration by copying an existing freight order type. Use the following data: Field
Value
Freight Order Type
T1##
Reference Freight Order Type
T100
Description
TM120 ## For Inbound Integration
Default Type for ERP Shipment Integration Blank a) In Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation Management→ Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Freight Order→ Define Freight Order Types . b) Choose the row for T100. c) Choose
(Copy As).
d) Update theFreight Order Type,Descriptionand theDefault Type for EPR Shipment Integrationfields with the data in the table.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
195
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Caution: Do not change any other settings in the new freight order type but take over the settings from freight order type T100. e) ChooseCopy. f) Save the freight order type. 6. Map ERP shipment types to TM freight order types with the following data: Field
Value
ERP Shipment Type
T1##
Freight Order Type
T1##
a) In Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation Management→ Transportation Management → Integration→ ERP Logistics Integration→ Shipment Integration → Assign Freight Order Types to ERP Shipment Types. b) Create a new entry using the data provided in the table. c) Save the mapping. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Create shipment-based freight orders
●
Configure settings to enable shipment-based freight orders
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
196
Unit 9 Lesson 4 Communicating Freight Orders to Other Companies
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn about the different business scenarios for business-to-business communication. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Explain the business scenarios for business-to-business communication
Freight Order Communication
Figure 105: SAP TM Usage with Shippers and LSPs
When looking at shippers that use SAP TM, we talk about ERP logistics integration and planning that creates freight orders. When looking at LSP business in SAP TM, we talk about forwarding orders from customers. We can now put the perspectives of the shipper and the LSP together; a shipper using SAP TM communicates with an LSP using SAP TM. In this case, the shipper creates freight orders and sends them to the carrier assigned to the freight order. In the shipper‘s TM system, an XML message is created and sent to the middleware system that takes care of routing the message to the right business partner. In the LSP‘s TM system, when the shipper‘s XML message is received, a forwarding order is created based on the information in the shipper‘s freight order. If the LSP confirms the forwarding order, this confirmation is sent back to the shipper and the freight order is updated.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
197
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Freight Order Sending
Figure 106: Sending Freight Orders to Carriers
The freight order can be sent from the freight order UI as the figure shows. Send Choose to Carrier; the follow up activity depends on the technical setup of the system landscape. The SAP TM system creates an XML message with all information about the freight order and sends it to the assigned middleware. When the LSP sends a confirmation outside of the system (that is via E-mail, telephone, or fax), the confirmation can be entered in the freight order manually by choosing Set to confirmed by carrier . When the LSP sends a confirmation electronically, the confirmation is logged in the freight order automatically.
Note: In case of tendering processes, the freight RFQ of the shipper is again sent to the LSP‘s TM system, where a forwarding quotation is created. When the forwarding quotation is processed and responded to by the LSP, it is sent back to the shipper where the freight RFQ is updated.
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Explain the business scenarios for business-to-business communication
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
198
Unit 9 Learning Assessment
1. Which of the following statements is an example of the shipment outbound scenario? Choose the correct answer. X
A When transportation activities based on deliveries transferred from SAP ERP are planned in SAP TM.
X
B When transportation activities based on deliveries that are transferred from SAP ERP are booked in SAP TM.
X
C When transportation activities are booked and planned in SAP ERP.
X
D When transportation activities are booked and planned in SAP ERP.
2. Inbound integration of shipment processing enables you to do which of the following tasks? Choose the correct answers. X
A Transfer shipments from SAP ERP to SAP TM and create freight orders in SAP TM based on the shipments.
X
B Update shipment-based freight orders in SAP TM if the relevant shipment in SAP ERP changes or if a delivery within the shipment changes.
X
C Transfer the tendering result for a freight order from SAP TM to the shipment in SAP ERP.
X
D Cancel freight orders in SAP TM if the relevant shipment in SAP ERP is deleted or the tendering status is reset.
X
E Create shipments in SAP ERP based on the freight orders transferred from SAP TM to SAP ERP.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
199
Unit 9: Learning Assessment
3. In the outbound integration scenario, identify the order in which the following tasks are performed. Arrange these steps into the correct sequence. 0 Send ERP deliveries to SAP TM. 0 Plan the transportation process in SAP TM. 0 Tender the freight orders in SAP TM. 0 Send the freight orders to SAP ERP. 0 Shipments created in SAP ERP. 0 Transport execution in SAP ERP. 4. For freight order-based shipments, which of the following settings must be maintained in SAP ERP? Choose the correct answers. X
A Set up an external number range object that matches the freight order number range.
X
B Adopt route and determine legs.
X
C Maintain transportation planning point ‘1000’.
X
D Ensure that the delivery types are relevant for transportation execution.
X
E Set up shipment types.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
200
Unit 9 Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Which of the following statements is an example of the shipment outbound scenario? Choose the correct answer. X
A When transportation activities based on deliveries transferred from SAP ERP are planned in SAP TM.
X
B When transportation activities based on deliveries that are transferred from SAP ERP are booked in SAP TM.
X
C When transportation activities are booked and planned in SAP ERP.
X
D When transportation activities are booked and planned in SAP ERP.
That is correct. A shipment outbound scenario is when transportation activities based on deliveries transferred from SAP ERP are planned in SAP TM. 2. Inbound integration of shipment processing enables you to do which of the following tasks? Choose the correct answers. X
A Transfer shipments from SAP ERP to SAP TM and create freight orders in SAP TM based on the shipments.
X
B Update shipment-based freight orders in SAP TM if the relevant shipment in SAP ERP changes or if a delivery within the shipment changes.
X
C Transfer the tendering result for a freight order from SAP TM to the shipment in SAP ERP.
X
D Cancel freight orders in SAP TM if the relevant shipment in SAP ERP is deleted or the tendering status is reset.
X
E Create shipments in SAP ERP based on the freight orders transferred from SAP TM to SAP ERP.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
201
Unit 9: Learning Assessment - Answers
3. In the outbound integration scenario, identify the order in which the following tasks are performed. Arrange these steps into the correct sequence. 1 Send ERP deliveries to SAP TM. 2 Plan the transportation process in SAP TM. 3 Tender the freight orders in SAP TM. 4 Send the freight orders to SAP ERP. 5 Shipments created in SAP ERP. 6 Transport execution in SAP ERP. 4. For freight order-based shipments, which of the following settings must be maintained in SAP ERP? Choose the correct answers. X
A Set up an external number range object that matches the freight order number range.
X
B Adopt route and determine legs.
X
C Maintain transportation planning point ‘1000’.
X
D Ensure that the delivery types are relevant for transportation execution.
X
E Set up shipment types.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
202
UNIT 10 Transportation Event Monitoring
Lesson 1 Monitoring Transportation Events
204
Lesson 2 Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility
213
Lesson 3 Handling Events in the Collaboration Portal
223
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
Monitor transportation events with SAP Event Management
●
Configure settings to enable transportation event visibility
●
Handle events in the Collaboration Portal
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
203
Unit 10 Lesson 1 Monitoring Transportation Events
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn how to monitor transportation events with SAP Event Management. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Monitor transportation events with SAP Event Management
Event Management Nowadays, supply chains are global and complex. End-to-end supply chain visibility is one of the key factors in efficient supply chain operation and control. SAP Event Management is the only application needed to provide this visibility, because it is available to all partners, including customers. SAP Event Management can also work with multiple SAP and non-SAP applications.
Figure 107: Visibility Across Business Partners And IT Environments
As companies expand their suite of IT products to handle more complex scenarios, they often have to add systems to their enterprise resource planning environment. This makes it difficult for business users and management to gain a complete view of end-to-end processes and to monitor potential service issues. Therefore, it is imperative to have a tool that can incorporate information from several systems and provide insight into the progress of order fulfillment. SAP Event Management makes processes, assets, and performance visible across the entire supply chain. Extensive tracking and tracing functions allow process monitoring, automated exception resolution, proactive alerting, as well as extensive reporting in a single solution.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
204
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
The event management system is designed to work with several SAP Enterprise Resource Planning (SAP ERP) instances, if necessary. It can communicate with SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM), where sales orders may be received, and this communication is processed back to the customer to support order fulfillment. SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) may be responsible for creating the replenishment plan. SAP ERP or SAP Manufacturing Execution (SAP ME) may be responsible for communication and tracking progress on the shop floor. SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) can be responsible for the picking and packing as part of the logistics execution. Event Management in SAP Transport Management (TM) SAP Event Management offers visibility processes to monitor transportation execution in connection with SAP Transport Management (SAP TM). The transportation execution visibility processes enable users in roles such as transportation dispatcher, shipper, or ordering party, to track and monitor planned events, or to report an actual event. Tracking and tracing is provided for the following business document types in SAP TM: ●
Freight unit
●
Freight order
●
Freight booking
●
Transportation unit
●
Resource
●
Instruction execution for standard operating procedures
In each case, the goal is to manage by exception, reduce time to action, and spend less time fire-fighting. Event Management Process
Figure 108: Related Events - SAP Event Management
The four cornerstones of SAP Event Management are monitor, notify, analyze, and adjust. They contribute to providing an adaptive solution. The monitoring process collects data from the various source systems. Notifications can be set up to be triggered, with alerts sent to the
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
205
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
parties responsible if a process deviates from its anticipated course. Based on the alerts, the appropriate parties can then simulate adjustments and make any necessary changes. Finally, in relation to analytics, SAP Event Management can be tied into the SAP Business Warehouse (SAP BW) environment to support transportation management reviews. Event Types
Figure 109: Monitoring Types Of Events
SAP Event Management can process several different types of events. Within a given process, you have events that you expect to happen, and events that actually happen. Typically, you want to compare the actual event with what you expected, as follows: ●
Regular Event The first type of event is an event that you expect to happen within a particular time frame, and it happens as expected. This is a regular event.
●
Overdue Event This is an event that you expect to happen within a particular time frame, and it happens outside the expected time frame. An overdue event can cause a subsequent event to be rescheduled, or it could just be recorded as an overdue event.
●
Unexpected Event The third type of event is one that is unexpected. This could be a truck that breaking down or a malfunction in a piece of equipment; something that could potentially have an effect on subsequent events, causing something to be rescheduled or another action to be taken. An unexpected event could trigger an alert or another type of notification.
●
Unreported Event In this case, you expect an event to occur within a particular time frame, but it is not reported. It is possible that something still needs to happen following this event, so you could set a time limit that sends a message or triggers something to happen when the event is unreported for a certain time period.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
206
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
Event Management Tool Features Event Management monitoring tools provide the following: 1. Expected events are coming from the application system, in this case SAP TM. The expected events are the activities planned in SAP TM planning. 2. The reported events are the events that are reported from the real-world operations. 3. Based on received events from operations or unreported events, the rules in SAP Event Management are triggered to respond to real-world activities happening in operations or execution. 4. Using SAP TM screens or the SAP Event Management Web front-end, expected and real events are made visible to user and target groups, such as (internal) customers, planners, and people in operations. This visibility is given from a transport order, or on the demandside by way of freight unit tracking, tracing, and monitoring and, for the operations-side, by way of freight orders and bookings tracking, tracing and monitoring. SAP Event Management can point out critical situations within your supply chain in good time by comparing expected events with the actual events, and can then, for example, actively notify those persons involved. An expected event is an event that can be defined before the corresponding business process has begun and that describes the normal flow of the business process. In the context of SAP TM integration, expected events are activities planned in SAP TM. Expected events include the following: ●
Cargo receipt
●
Onboard confirmation
●
Proof of delivery
The expected events are compared to actual events (also known as reported events). Reported events include the following: ●
Unloading truck
●
Late departure
●
Accident
●
No POD sent
Transportation Execution Visibility Process The transportation execution visibility process enables users and target groups, such as (internal) customers, planners, and people in operations, to monitor events or to report an actual event by way of SAP TM screens or the SAP Event Management web interface. SAP Event Management offers visibility processes to monitor transportation execution in connection with SAP TM. Tracking and tracing is provided for the following business document types in SAP TM: ●
Freight units
●
Freight orders
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
207
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
●
Freight bookings
●
Transportation unit
●
Resources
●
Instruction execution for standard operating procedures
Visibility Processes for Transportation Monitoring Transportation operations is an area in which transparency is crucial, especially in those cases where lengthy transportation times have to be considered, such as when shipping overseas. To ensure customer satisfaction, it is more important than ever to keep full control of events, even if parts of the business process may run outside the sphere of influence of your company. Visibility processes for transportation management offer preconfigured, out-of-the box content for transportation operations, supporting you in tracking relevant activities within and beyond the confines of your company. You can monitor different processes and business documents, such as freight units, freight orders, and freight bookings. Depending on your role, you can choose different layouts for the user interface, such as shipper and consignee, which result in a comprehensive and easy to understand view of transportation operations.
Figure 110: Visibility for Transportation Execution
The figure, Visibility for Transportation Execution, depicts a realistic scenario in which SAP TM and SAP Event Management can be integrated to monitor an end-to-end international order. In the first step of the process, the order is created in SAP ERP and sent to SAP TM. At this point, a freight unit is created and scheduling can begin. SAP TM provides the basis for tracking and tracing in SAP EM. In SAP TM, freight units, orders and bookings create the event handlers, and the planned activities in SAP TM are the expected events that SAP EM monitors. For real-world awareness and proactive monitoring, SAP TM relies on SAP EM. Actual events that occur during execution are reported in SAP EM. The reporting of events can happen in SAP TM and be sent to SAP EM, or happened in SAP EM and be sent to SAP TM.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
208
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
Visibility Processes for Transportation and Event Management — Process Flow
Figure 111: Visibility Processes for Transportation and Event Management — Process Flow
The figure, Visibility Processes for Transportation and Event Management - Process Flow, shows a typical scenario in which the SAP EM and SAP TM systems are updated to reflect accurately the real world progress of a freight order. Alerts During the loading process, SAP ERP or SAP EWM may send a signal (notification) that there is a delay in the loading process. This can trigger an alert. The transportation planner may have to adjust the schedule to ensure that the container makes it to the ship on time. Once the ship has left the departure port, GPS updates may indicate that the ship has not reached its midway point. This could be due to weather or mechanical issues. The customer service agent can be notified and can contact the customer to inform them of anticipated delays. Due to the alert system, the planning team does not have to watch over every order. They can spend most of their time managing exceptions.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
209
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
Standard Content For Transportation Monitoring
Figure 112: Event Management Content for SAP TM
The figure, Event Management Content for SAP TM, shows both expected and unexpected events. The expected events are planned activities in SAP TM. For example, when loading begins for a freight unit, SAP TM reports to SAP EM that this event has occurred. Unexpected events are events that are not planned, for example delays, damaged packaging material, and cancellations. Unexpected events can also be reported from SAP TM.
Mobile Tracking and Tracing
Figure 113: SAP TM Mobile Solutions
SAP TM Notifier is an app that provides event report functionality to Android-based mobile devices. It enables you to display a list of open and assigned freight orders along with their
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
210
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
details, for example, the stops for a freight order and freight units that are assigned to the stops. You can also report the delivery status. Additional features include the ability to display the map indicating the exact location of the freight order or freight unit in real-time (from the latest reported events). Each stop has a list of predefined events that you can use to report the status of your delivery, for example, start loading or finish loading. In addition to the predefined events, you can send a delay notification for an event. SAP TM Notifier
Figure 114: SAP Transport Tracker
With the SAP TM Notifier app, you can display freight order details and report the status of your delivery using predefined events on your mobile device. Mobile devices provide planning information for the driver, and execution information back to the planner from the driver. Mobile tracking enables users by being able to do the following: ●
Display open freight orders that are valid within a certain time frame
●
Display details of a freight order
●
Display details of a stop
●
Display freight units for a stop
●
Display events for a stop
●
Display information about a freight order on a map
●
Confirm an event for a stop after completing the corresponding activity
●
Report a delay for an event
Use Case for SAP TM Notifier App 1. Gather the relevant freight orders. 2. Review the tour data.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
211
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
3. Show data on the map. 4. Report potential problems or delays. 5. Execute part of the freight order or the whole freight order and report back the execution. The technical requirements for the SAP TM Notifier App are as follows: ●
SAP Transportation Management Release 8.0
●
SAP Event Management Release 7.1, Enhancement Package 1, SP05
●
SAP NetWeaver Release 7.02
●
SAP NetWeaver Gateway 2.0 Support Package 2
●
Sybase Unwired Platform 2.1
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Monitor transportation events with SAP Event Management
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
212
Unit 10 Lesson 2 Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn how to configure the settings to enable visibility to transportation events with SAP EM. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Configure settings to enable transportation event visibility
Event Creation Architecture Landscape
Figure 115: Creating Events: Architectural Landscape
In SAP TM, an application interface (AI) to SAP Event Management (SAP EM) configuration is required so that data is transferred from the SAP TM to SAP EM. Examples of configuration objects include function modules (codes) and extractors required to interface the data between the two systems. SAP TM must be configured so that programs (or extractors) can extract data (for example, expected events) from SAP TM and send the data via the application interface to SAP EM.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
213
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
Note: This configuration is not part of this course. To use the SAP EM features, configuration is also required in SAP EM. This may include visibility settings using the Web UI or SAP GUI. Additionally, roles and role assignment to users should be set up to enable access to visibility scenarios. In SAP EM, Business Application Programming Interface (BAPIs) are used to integrate with SAP TM and other non-SAP systems, via SAP Process Integration (SAP PI) or other methods. The BAPIs are as follows: ●
/SAPTRX/BAPI_EH_POST - for creation of event handlers
●
/SAPTRX/BAPI_EH_ADDEVENTMSG_02 - for reporting events
Integration Tools between SAP TM and SAP EM Non-TM systems use IDoc and Web Services to integrate into SAP EM. SAP TM is different from other SAP solutions (for example, SAP ERP) in the way that it interfaces with the application interface. In SAP ERP, this interface is triggered by BAdIs when a business document is saved. SAP TM uses the Post-Processing Framework (PPF) for this. The PPF is also used for printing and interfaces to SAP ERP and SAP Global Trade Services (SAP GTS). Therefore, before the integration can start, you need to check if this EM Interface is enabled in the PPF. In Customizing for Cross- Application Components, choose Reusable Objects and Functions for BOPF Environment→ PPF Adapter for Output Management → Maintain Output Management Adapter Settings .
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
214
Lesson: Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility
Event Types and Event Handler Configuration Settings
Figure 116: Creating Event Handlers and Expected Events in TM
In the integration between SAP TM and SAP EM, two different interfaces and functions are used, as follows: 1. Creation and update of the Event Handler with all expected events and other critical fields such as parameter and tracking IDs. 2. Sending or reporting of events from the SAP TM system, for example, loading or unloading events from freight unit or freight order. To be able to create event handlers in SAP TM, you must configure the application object types (AOTs). From the AOTs, the extractors are created. These extractors send the data to SAP EM and create SAP EM event handlers. Content of Application Object Types Application Object Types contain the following: ●
●
●
Expected events, with planned dates and times Tracking IDs that uniquely identify the trackable object or business document, for example, a freight order Information and system parameters that contain information about the object
Content of Extractors The extractors contain the following:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
215
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
●
A freight order
●
A freight booking
●
A freight unit
●
A transportation unit
●
Other objects
Event Handlers and Reporting Events in SAP EM An event handler represents a business document (for example, freight order, freight unit, or transportation unit) or a business process (for example, within a Transportation Execution) that is relevant to tracking or monitoring functions. SAP EM creates an event handler for each object. The event handler contains all of the information necessary to track this application object. It contains this information in a form that is independent of its origin, so that SAP EM can map and track business processes in a uniform way. The event handler information makes it possible to enable the monitoring of events that are reported to SAP EM for an application object, and to check if the actual events occur in line with the expected events. In SAP TM, event types are used to send or report events to SAP EM.
Figure 117: Reporting Events in SAP EM
Events When events are reported, SAP EM uses the tracking ID that is provided in the event message to find the corresponding event handler. Basic Fields in an Event An event contains the following basic fields:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
216
Lesson: Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility
●
Date
●
Time
●
Time zone
●
Tracking ID
●
Tracking code
●
Event code
All of these fields are configured or coded in the event types.
Visibility Process Configuration
Figure 118: SAP-Delivered Visibility Processes
To monitor SAP TM Execution events, you can use the visibility scenarios from the freight order, freight booking, resource, or freight unit in the standard. This means that the application object types (AOTs) and the event type configuration are already available and only need to be activated. You also need to assign the application (in this case, SAP TM) to the SAP EM system. Visibility Scenario Prerequisites To use the visibility scenarios for transportation execution in SAP EM, you will need to ensure that the following prerequisites are fulfilled: 1. An RFC destination between SAP TM and SAP EM in transaction SM59 is created. 2. All services below default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/saptrx/in transactionSICF for the SAP EM Web interface to work. 3. Business functionSCM_EM_TMCONTENT01is activated in SAP EM.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
217
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
Configuration in SAP TM Once the prerequisites are fulfilled, you can perform the following configuration in SAP TM: 1. Define SAP EM. 2. Define used business process types, application object types, and event type. a. Assign SAP EM to the application object types. b. Mark the event management relevance for the application object. c. Assign SAP EM to all required events types. d. Mark the event management relevance for all required events types. 3. Activate the application object types. Configuration in SAP EM Perform the following steps in SAP EM: 1. Define an application system. 2. Assign a parameter profile to the mapping area. 3. Assign user profiles to users or a role.
Hint: When you use SAP Event Management for the first time, all Web interface fields are not yet compiled. To avoid problems in the Web interface, open the configuration transaction Configure Fields for User Profiles once.
Settings in SAP Transportation Management
Figure 119: Configuration in SAP TM
Define the System Configuration The RFC connection to the SAP Event Management system and the definition of the logical system serve as base definitions for connecting to SAP EM. In SAP TM, define the system configuration as follows:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
218
Lesson: Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility
1. Define Logical System for SAP Event Management. In Customizing for Integration with Other SAP Components, choose Event Management Interface → Define System Configuration → Define Logical System . 2. Define RFC Destination to SAP Event Management. In Customizing for Integration with Other SAP Components, choose Event Management Interface → Define System Configuration → Define RFC Connection to SAP EM . 3. Define SAP Event Management System. In Customizing for Integration with Other SAP Components, choose Event Management Interface → Define System Configuration → Define RFC Connection to SAP EM . Define the Application Object Type SAP delivers a predefined application object type with the relevant functions and extractors. The application object type determines the SAP EM relevance of objects and processes in SAP TM. To define the application object type, in Customizing for Integration with Other SAP Components, choose Event Management Interface → Define Application Interface → Define Used Bus. Proc. Types, Appl. Obj. Types, and Evt Types . Define the Event Type SAP delivers a predefined event type with the relevant functions and extractors. The event type determines whether the change to an SAP TM object requires an event to be sent to the relevant event handler in SAP EM. To define the event type, in Customizing for Integration with Other SAP Components, choose Event Management Interface → Define Application Interface→ Define Used Bus. Proc. Types, Appl. Obj. Types, and Evt Types . Set Freight Unit Types and Freight Order Types for SAP EM Integration To track the execution status of a freight order or freight unit, Execution the Tracking Relevancefield in the freight order type and in the freight unit type must be Execution set to Tracking with External Event Management . You can define the freight order in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management. Choose Transportation Management → Freight Order Management→ Freight Order→ Define Freight Order Types . You can define the freight unit in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management. Choose Transportation Management → Planning → Freight Unit→ Define Freight Unit Types .
Settings in SAP Event Management
Figure 120: Configuration in SAP EM
The remote function call RFC connection to the SAP Event Management system and the definition of the logical system serve as base definitions for connecting to SAP EM.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
219
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
Parameter Mapping The mapping profile is used to unify parameters when data is coming from SAP TM and to determine event handler types. To define the parameter mapping, in Customizing for Event Management, choose Event Management → Event Handlers and Event Handler Data → Parameters → Define Parameter Mapping . To Configure Integration Between Freight Orders and Event Management 1. View the Event Manager Definition for the SAP TM logical system ZMTCLNT800. a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose Integration with Other SAP Components → Event Management Interface → Define Application Interface → Define SAP EM . b) In theInformationdialog box, choose Continue. c) In theDisplay View “SAP Event Manager Definitions”: Overview screen, look for the row with ZMTCLNT800 in theDest.field. d) Here you will see the various event manager definitions. Field
Value
Event Manager
Name or identification of an Event Manager
EM Log. System
The logical System ID of Event Manager
SAP EM Version
SAP Event Manager release used
Local
Do not select the checkbox
Dest.
Enter the standard name of an RFC destination. If the receiver is an SAP system, the name of the instance in the SAP system is displayed. (For example ZMTCLNT800)
Sync.
Select checkbox if the communication to the Event Manager occurs synchronously for all BAPIs. Deselect this checkbox to improve performance. Select this checkbox for test purposes only. In a productive environment, it is recommended that you use asynchronous communication.
e) Exit the function. 2. View the business process type settings in SAP TM. a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose Integration with Other SAP Components → Event Management Interface → Define Application Interface → Define Used Bus. Proc. Types, Appl. Obj. Types, and Evt Types . b) On theChange View “Define Used Business Process Types”: Overview screen, select the row for a business process type (for example, TMS_TOR). c) In theDialog Structure screen area, choose Define Application Object Types . d) On theChange View “Define Application Object Types”: Overview screen, select an application object type (for example, ODT30_T0).
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
220
Lesson: Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility
e) Choose
(Details).
f) On theChange View “Define Application Object Types”: Details screen, in theEvent Managerfield, ensure that the name of the Event Manager is entered (for example, EM_TM_800). g) Ensure that theEM Relevance of Appl. Obj. checkbox is checked. 3. View the event types. a) In theDialog Structure , chooseDefine Event Types . b) In theChange View “Define Event Types”: Overview screen, select an event type (for example, ODT_20_Scheduled). c) Choose
(Details).
d) In theChange View “Define Event Types”: Details screen, on theGeneral Data tab, in the Event Manager field, ensure that the Event Manager name is entered (for example, EM_TM_800). e) Ensure that theEM Relevance of Appl. Obj. checkbox is selected. f) Return toCustomizing. 4. Enable event management tracking in SAP TM for freight order. a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Freight Order → Define Freight Order Types . b) Choose a freight order type. c) Choose
(Details).
d) On theChange View “Freight Order Types”: Details screen, in theExecution Settings screen area, in the Execution Track Relev. field, chooseExecution Tracking with External Event Management . e) If you select the Immediate Processing checkbox, the life cycle status is automatically set toIn Processwhen a freight order is created. f) The Propagate Execution Info setting indicates whether an event that is reported for a freight order is to be propagated to the predecessor freight units. g) If severe execution checks are activated, the system only allows you to perform cargo management related activities on the freight order interface if the handling execution status of the related items is set to a value that allows such activities. h) In theEvent Management Settings section, in the Application Object Type field, select an application object type for freight orders (for example, ODT30_T0). i) In theLast Exp. Event field, select the last expected event, for example, POD (Proof of Delivery). If this event is reported from the destination stop of a freight order, the freight order is finished from an execution perspective and the system changes the execution status of the freight orderExecuted to . j) Save and exit the function. 5. Enable settings for event tracking in SAP EM.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
221
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose Event Management → General Settings in SAP Event Management → Define Application System . b) In theInformationdialog box, choose Continue. c) On theDisplay View "Application System Definition": Overview , screen in the logical System field, enter the name of the system that is integrated with SAP EM (for example, TM_00_800). d) Save and exit the function. 6. Enable Settings for the event handlers in SAP EM system. a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose Event Management → Event Handlers and Event Handler Data . b) Maintain additional settings for Event Handlers, Expected Events, and Parameters. For more information, refer to the guide Integration of SAP TM and SAP Event Management. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Configure settings to enable transportation event visibility
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
222
Unit 10 Lesson 3 Handling Events in the Collaboration Portal
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn how to monitor and handle events in the Collaboration Portal. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Handle events in the Collaboration Portal
Event Handling in the Collaboration Portal
Figure 121: SAP TM Collaboration Portal
The SAP Transportation Management collaboration portal for carriers (SAP TM Collaboration Portal) supports collaborative business processes. As a carrier working with several shippers that use the SAP TM collaboration portal, you have separate access to each of your shippers. In each case, you can work only with this one shipper. The main benefits of the SAP TM Collaboration Portal are as follows:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
223
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
●
●
●
●
●
●
Small and mid size carriers do not need to have SAP TM installed. The SAP TM Collaboration Portal is a full browser-based solution, which means that the carrier does not need access to shipper’s network (for example, a VPN connection). All common browsers are supported (Internet Explorer 9, Mozilla Firefox, Safari, Google Chrome). The carrier does not have to install anything, but just log in into the collaboration portal with the access (logon and password) provided by the shipper as SAP TM Collaboration Portal owner or host. The carrier can see only request for quotations (RFQ) assigned to it, and the transmitted quotations. To increase the usability of the portal by the carrier, user settings in the portal are stored and are available after logging on again.
Event Notification and Handling
Figure 122: Event Notification and Handling
Since the introduction of the Collaboration Portal, new functionality has been added to the portal. One of the newer functionalities in the area of freight order management is event notification and handling. It enables carriers to report expected (planned) and unexpected events related to a freight order or the stops of a freight order, to the shipper.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
224
Lesson: Handling Events in the Collaboration Portal
Freight Orders for Execution
Figure 123: Freight Orders for Execution
Carriers enter the SAP Transportation Management Collaboration Portal on Homescreen. the This screen displays a worklist with the key performance indicators (KPIs) for the available areas in the form of tiles. From the tiles, shippers can navigate to the individual areas to continue their work. The area of freight order management has been enhanced with aEvent tile forHandling . The tile displays the open freight orders for execution, for which events still have to be reported, if necessary. The Freight Orders for Execution subscreen gives an overview of all of the freight orders assigned to the carrier. The list can be filtered by the freight order status, and the individual freight order for which an event should be reported can be selected. The locations where the events occur can be displayed on a map, or the sequence of locations can be displayed in a numbered list. The list supports sorting, searching for freight orders, and filtering. You can apply a quick filter in the toolbar to filter the freight orders by the status of the event confirmation to show only open freight ordersOpen ( ), freight orders for which all the planned events have already been reported (Closed), or freight orders that have been canceled by the shipper Canceled ( ). The next plannedOpen ( ) event is displayed for each freight order, together with the affected locations and the date and time. By selecting a single row in the list, the next open event can be directly reported.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
225
Optimizer Planning and Executio in SAP Transportation Manageme
. .
PARTICIPANT HANDBOOK INSTRUCTOR-LED TRAINING . Course Version: 16 Course Duration: 5 Day(s) e-book Duration: 25 Hours 45 Minutes Material Number: 50131927
SAP Copyrights and Trademarks
© 2018 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered http://global12.sap.com/ trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other countries. Please see corporate-en/legal/copyright/index.epx for additional trademark information and notices. Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. National product specifications may vary. These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP SE or its affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. In particular, SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation, or to develop or release any functionality mentioned therein. This document, or any related presentation, and SAP SE’s or its affiliated companies’ strategy and possible future developments, products, and/or platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time for any reason without notice. The information in this document is not a commitment, promise, or legal obligation to deliver any material, code, or functionality. All forward-looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations. Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements, which speak only as of their dates, and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions.
Typographic Conventions American English is the standard used in this handbook. The following typographic conventions are also used.
This information is displayed in the instructor’s presentation
Demonstration
Procedure
Warning or Caution
Hint
Related or Additional Information
Facilitated Discussion
User interface control
Example text
Window title
Example text
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
iii
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
iv
Contents vii
Course Overview
1
Unit 1:
2 5 8 17 21 30
Lesson: Lesson: Lesson: Lesson: Lesson: Unit 2:
31 34 45
Unit 3:
Unit 4:
Unit 5:
84 90 97 102 106
143
Transportation Unit Planning
Carrier Selection Lesson: Lesson: Lesson: Lesson: Lesson:
Unit 6:
113 120 126 142
Advanced Transportation Network
Lesson: Creating Passive Vehicle Resources Lesson: Planning Transportation Units with Passive Vehicle Resources Lesson: Planning Transportation Units with the Optimizer Lesson: Planning Transportation with Container Units
68 71
112
Optimizer Applications
Lesson: Creating Schedules Lesson: Analyzing the Results of the Path Finder
56 64
83
Describing Optimizer Planning Applying Optimizer Planning Settings Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios Applying Short-Cut Planning Creating Pooled Shipments
Lesson: Creating a Transportation Proposal Lesson: Describing Load Optimization Processes
46 51 55
Optimizer Planning
Explaining the Carrier Selection Process Selecting Carriers Based on Costs and Priorities Using Allocations Using Business Shares Improving Carrier Utilization
Freight Tendering Lesson: Explaining the Tendering Process Lesson: Configuring the Tendering Plan Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
Unit 7:
Freight Orders in Transportation Management Lesson: Creating Freight Orders
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
v
151
Unit 8:
Freight Order Setup
152
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Types
158 160
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Type Determination Lesson: Determining Business Partners
170
Unit 9:
171 175 184 197 203
Lesson: Lesson: Lesson: Lesson: Unit 10:
204 213
Unit 11:
231 239 251 252 261 269
Integrating Freight Orders with Shipments Creating Shipments from Freight Orders Creating Freight Orders from Shipments Communicating Freight Orders to Other Companies
Transportation Event Monitoring Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events Lesson: Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility Lesson: Handling Events in the Collaboration Portal
223 230
Freight Order Integration
Transportation Execution Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Output Lesson: Managing Freight Order Discrepancies
Unit 12:
Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM based on Shipments Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM Based on Deliveries Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM for Transit Warehousing
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
vi
Course Overview
TARGET AUDIENCE This course is intended for the following audiences: ●
Application Consultant
●
Business Process Architect
●
Business Process Owner/Team Lead/Power User
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
vii
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
viii
UNIT 1 Optimizer Planning
Lesson 1 Describing Optimizer Planning
2
Lesson 2 Applying Optimizer Planning Settings
5
Lesson 3 Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
8
Lesson 4 Applying Short-Cut Planning
17
Lesson 5 Creating Pooled Shipments
21
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
Describe optimizer planning
●
Create planning cost settings
●
Execute planning to determine the means of transport
●
Execute planning to consolidate deliveries
●
Execute planning to enforce minimum shipping requirements
●
Describe short-cut planning
●
Maintain integration settings for short-cut planning
●
Maintain configuration and execute short-cut planning
●
Model the transportation network for pooled shipments
●
Create pooled freight orders
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
1
Unit 1 Lesson 1 Describing Optimizer Planning
LESSON OVERVIEW This lesson examines how the vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimizer considers routes and locations in transportation planning to minimize costs and operate within constraints. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Describe optimizer planning
Route Optimization
Figure 1: SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) Document Flow
The vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimizer considers routing and the sequence in which resources arrive at certain locations. The VSR optimizer also considers the scheduling of tasks that are running in parallel. It evaluates potential changes to the routing and the
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
2
Lesson: Describing Optimizer Planning
effect such changes have on scheduling, helping to avoid the possibility of delayed deliveries and follow-on costs. Mathematical Model The goal of the optimizer is to assign tasks to vehicles and determine the route and sequence of tasks per vehicle so that all constraints are met and total costs are minimized. The optimizer achieves this goal by evolutionary local search, a population-based meta-heuristic that borrows selection principles from evolutionary algorithms and relies heavily on local optimization.
Figure 2: Mathematical Model
A more concrete example of the workings of the optimizer is its handling of potential date changes, which it handles by applying each date change to all tasks on the affected resource or dependent tasks on any other resources to derive the most appropriate choice. The consideration of several aspects in parallel is repeated for other variables, such as transshipment locations, and is necessary to create effective plans or to make improvements to existing plans. Costs and Constraints The total cost, which the optimizer is designed to minimize, is a weighted sum of the following items: ●
Non-delivery/execution penalty (per freight unit (FU))
●
Earliness and lateness penalty (per FU)
●
Fixed cost (per vehicle or tour)
●
Travel-dependent costs (per vehicle), for example, distance and duration.
●
Load-dependent costs (per vehicle and tour)
●
Sustainability costs such as CO2 emissions (from SAP TM 8.0 by BAdI)
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
3
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Describe optimizer planning
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
4
Unit 1 Lesson 2 Applying Optimizer Planning Settings
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, we examine the use of optimization costs in the planning process. You learn about the different kinds of planning costs that the vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimizer uses in an optimization run. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Create planning cost settings
Optimization Costs Fixed costs are calculated once by the system for each capacity used in the VSR optimization run. Capacities include vehicle resources and schedules. For schedules, the fixed costs are incurred per departure. In addition to fixed costs, other variable costs can be applied. The following are the variable transportation costs per unit for the following dimensions: ●
Duration
●
Distance
●
Transported quantity per distance
●
Intermediate stop
These costs refer to the use of the dimensions of a capacity, including empty runs, during the VSR optimization run. Duration and Distance Costs You can define the costs per duration for each VSR optimization run. You can also define a maximum value and a unit. The unit refers to both the costs and the maximum value. If you do not specify a unit, the system measures duration in seconds. You can define the costs per distance for each VSR optimization run. You can also define a maximum value and a unit. The unit refers to both the costs and the maximum value. If you do not specify a unit, the system measures distance in kilometers. You can also specify the cost basis. This determines if the system uses the costs per distance from costs theper distance field in the planning profile or from the transportation lane. Alternatively, you can specify that the system is to take the sum of both values into account. Transported Quantity per Distance and Intermediate Stop Costs You can define the costs per quantity for each VSR optimization run. You must also define a unit. You cannot define a maximum value for the costs per quantity. However, you can specify if the system is to use the costs per quantity from the transportation lane or from the costs per quantity specified in the planning profile.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
5
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
For costs per quantity from the transportation lane, you can specify if the system is to calculate the costs in a distance-independent way or if it is to multiply them by the distance.
Figure 3: Quantity and Distance
For costs per quantity from the planning costs, you can specify if the system is to calculate the costs in a distance-independent way per transportation lane or if it is to multiply them by the distance. The system determines the costs per stage if costs are calculated in a distanceindependent way. You are not allowed to define a unit. If multiplying by the distance, the system uses the fixed value that you have defined in the costs per quantity field. You can define the maximum number of intermediate stops and the costs per additional stop. Route-based Versus Destination-based Cost
Figure 4: Route-based Versus Destination-based Cost
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
6
Lesson: Applying Optimizer Planning Settings
The figure, Route-based Versus Destination-based Cost, illustrates the route-based and destination-based costs as follows: ●
Destination-based cost: -
Freight order A ( → B → C) = DistanceA( → B → C) * Cost (A → C) = 300 * 1.5 = $450.
-
Freight order A ( → C → B) = DistanceA( → C → B) * Cost (A → B) = 250 * 1.9 = $475.
●
Route-based cost: -
-
Freight order A ( → B → C) = DistanceA( → B) * Cost (A → B) + DistanceB( → C) * Cost (B → C) = 200 * 1.9 + 100 * 1.8 = $560. Freight order A ( → C → B) = DistanceA( → C) * Cost (A → C) + DistanceC( → B) * Cost (C → B) = 150 * 1.5 + 100 * 1.8 = $405.
Route-based and destination-based distance costs can yield different results. In North America, destination-based distance cost calculation is used frequently, whereas in Europe, route-based distance costs are primarily used. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Create planning cost settings
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
7
Unit 1 Lesson 3 Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, we consider the goals of the vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimizer in transportation planning. We look also at the use of costs to influence VSR optimization results, and analyze how constraints and tolerances effect means-of-transport selection. Finally, we examine the use of planning costs to enforce minimum shipping requirements in the VSR optimization run. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Execute planning to determine the means of transport
●
Execute planning to consolidate deliveries
●
Execute planning to enforce minimum shipping requirements
Truck-Load Planning Scenarios Freight orders can be created by manual planning or they can be built by the VSR optimizer. Optimizer planning is a key function of SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) and aims to select the best means of transportation. SAP TM decides between shipping an order directly to a customer less than truckload (LTL) scenario or consolidating orders from several customers in a single vehicle full truckload (FTL) scenario.
Optimization Execution The goal of the VSR optimizer is freight unit consolidation and the creation of a cost effective and timely route from source to destination. VSR Goals and Objectives ●
●
Goal: Determine a transportation plan that minimizes total costs and satisfies all constraints. Decisions: -
Per freight unit: transport or not?
-
Per transported freight unit: select path through transportation network (stages).
-
Per selected stage: select capacity or vehicle resource.
-
Per capacity or vehicle resource:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
8
Lesson: Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
●
■
Select relative ordering of activities (= routing).
■
Assign start time to each activity (= scheduling).
Total costs = sum of: -
Penalty costs (non-delivery, earliness, or lateness).
-
Capacity or vehicle costs (fixed, duration, stops, quantity, and distance).
The total cost is the sum of penalty costs for non delivery, early and late delivery, and vehicle costs for duration, distance, stops, and quantity. Optimizer Constraints
Figure 5: Optimizer Constraints
The optimizer operates within the constraints defined in the figure, Optimizer Constraints. The optimizer evaluates any changes in routing caused by constraints for their effect on the scheduling and timing. It communicates any change of time or date to all tasks on that resource or to any dependent tasks on any other resource. Considering both aspects in parallel ensures effective planning. The optimizer tries to assign freight units to vehicles and determine an effective delivery order for each vehicle so that total transportation costs are minimized. It considers several constraints and takes penalty costs into account as part of the total transportation cost. Optimizer Communication When the optimizer starts, the engine communicates with the SAP TM application; the optimizer requires the complete description of the transportation planning scenario to make informed decisions. For each freight unit, the engine decides if it wants to transport it directly or via transshipment locations.
Configuration of Planning Cost Settings The following penalty costs are defined in the planning profile and can be used to control the decisions made by VSR optimization:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
9
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
●
Premature pick-up
●
Delayed pick-up
●
Premature delivery
●
Delayed delivery
Using Soft Constraints The optimizer calculates additional costs if the transportation plan deviates from the requested pickup and delivery dates. This is done when using soft constraints in the pickup and delivery time window and defining penalty costs in the planning profile. There is a balance in the optimizer process between selecting the cheapest mode of transport and adhering to promised delivery dates and defined pickup dates. For example, the optimizer could decide to ship via an intermodal means of transport even if this means delivering a day late. This is on the condition that savings made by selecting a slower means of transport outweigh the penalty costs for delayed delivery. Penalty Costs
Figure 6: VSR Optimization and Windows
The penalty cost for premature pick-up is incurred when the scheduled pickup time falls between the earliest pickup time (hard constraint) and the allowed premature pickup (soft constraint). The penalty cost for delayed pick-up is incurred when the scheduled pickup time falls between the allowed late pickup time (soft constraint) and the latest pickup time (hard constraint).
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
10
Lesson: Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
The penalty cost for premature delivery is incurred when the scheduled delivery time falls between the earliest delivery time (hard constraint) and the allowed premature delivery time (soft constraint). The penalty cost for delayed delivery is incurred when the scheduled delivery time falls between the allowed late delivery time (soft constraint) and the latest delivery time (hard constraint).
Pickup and Delivery Window Definition
Figure 7: Pick Up and Delivery Windows
Defining Pickup and Delivery Windows ●
●
●
Forwarding orders, SAP ERP-orders, and deliveries work only with single day and time for pick up and delivery. To allow more flexibility for freight consolidation and routing optimization SAP TM Planning uses Time Windows. Combination of pick up and delivery definition and penalty costs controls how the optimizer schedules within the time window.
Windows control when goods are to be picked up and delivered. VSR optimization schedules the pickup or delivery exactly in the window defined. If there were no windows, VSR optimization would schedule these dates to minimize the total costs. You can also control the optimization when windows are not taken into account and goods are picked up or delivered too early or too late.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
11
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
Defining Tolerances You can create windows by defining tolerances within which a premature or delayed pickup or delivery is to be allowed. You specify for each tolerance if VSR optimization is to consider it a hard, soft, or hard and soft constraint. Specifying constraints controls if VSR optimization calculates penalty costs when the constraints are not adhered to. The following tolerances can be defined: ●
Maximum earliness
●
Maximum delay
●
Delay without penalty costs
●
Earliness without penalty costs
The dates and times defined for the pickup and delivery in the freight unit are the basis for calculating the tolerances. The exact time for the pick-up date or delivery date can be considered. Hard and Soft Constraints
Figure 8: Defining Pick Up and Delivery Windows
Conditions are used to set up pickup and delivery windows. The condition is specified in the freight unit type. Window Constraints ●
None
●
Hard (Acceptable dates)
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
12
Lesson: Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
●
Soft (Requested dates
●
Hard and soft (Both)
VSR optimization takes constraints into account when it assigns freight units to capacities. You can differentiate between hard and soft constraints: ●
●
VSR optimization always adheres to hard constraints. You model soft constraints using penalty costs, for example, lateness costs that are part of the total costs.
The following are the relevant condition types: ●
For pick up and delivery time window definition: /SCMTMS/TOR_TIMEWIND
●
For earliness and lateness cost definition: /SCMTMS/FU_PNLT_COST
Means of Transport Cost Evaluation
Figure 9: Means of Transport Costs
Using the planning cost settings, the optimizer can determine the best means of transport to use. For example, a break-even analysis between a large truck and a small truck can be modeled with this setting. There is a relation between pickup and delivery penalty time and cost per duration. Depending on business rules, it could be better to delay pickup or deliver early. The maximum distance and durations are useful for deciding on rail or air transport instead of road. The maximum number of stops and costs are useful for reducing the number of visits during a week at customers or suppliers.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
13
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
Stop Off Costs
Figure 10: Stop Off Costs
The figure, Stop Off Costs, shows two stop-offs between locations A and D. Stopover costs are applied to influence the outcome of VSR optimization. The source and target location in a route are not taken into account when calculating the number of stopovers. Maintain the number of stopovers plus one.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
14
Lesson: Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
Cost Function Application
Figure 11: Cost Functions
The figure, Cost Functions, shows the creation of a cost profile function and how penalty costs are calculated. During optimization, the system avoids transports if a certain load level is not reached. If this minimum load level is not reached, the system does not create a transport. It waits until this level is reached. In the example, there is a penalty of $1500 for a load less than 2000m ᵌ . After 2000mᵌ , the penalty cost is reduced from $500 to zero. Additional Linear Loading Costs Additional Linear Loading Costs Additional linear loading costs can be applied to increase truck usage. You define two segments for this cost function. For the first segment, you define penalty costs of $1500 and a load of zero cubic meters ᵌ(m ). Define a gradient of zero. If TRUCK001 leaves the plant with a load of less than 2000m ᵌ , the optimizer calculates penalty costs of $1500. For the second segment, you define penalty costs of $500 and a load of ᵌ2000m . Define a gradient of one. If TRUCK001 leaves the plant with a load of 2000m ᵌ to 2500mᵌ , the optimizer calculates penalty costs between $500 and zero in accordance with the gradient. The penalties decrease in intervals of one unit for each additional cubic meter loaded onto the truck. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Execute planning to determine the means of transport
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
15
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
●
Execute planning to consolidate deliveries
●
Execute planning to enforce minimum shipping requirements
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
16
Unit 1 Lesson 4 Applying Short-Cut Planning
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, we examine short-cut planning in SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM). We look also at the maintenance of the transportation requirement types, freight unit building rules, and freight orders for short-cut planning. Finally, we examine and execute short-cut planning. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Describe short-cut planning
●
Maintain integration settings for short-cut planning
●
Maintain configuration and execute short-cut planning
Short-Cut Planning Processes
Figure 12: Automatic Creation of Freight Order
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
17
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
Automatic planning allows you to automate the planning process in SAP TM. You can use this process for the following activities: ●
Automatic freight order creation
●
Automatic carrier selection
●
Automatic freight order tendering
●
Automatic quotation evaluation and carrier assignment
Short-Cut Planning Configuration
Figure 13: Freight Unit Building Rule
Freight orders can be created directly for your order-based or delivery-based transportation requirements. This is helpful when large orders already fill up a truck and do not need further consolidation or planning. The Forwarding Order Management (FWM) Business Document The system creates a freight order directly when you save an FWM business document (FO, OTR, or DTR) if the following requirements have been met: ●
●
●
The FWM business document is subcontracted and not consolidated with other FWM business documents. The FWM business document can be delivered in one freight order, meaning there is no pre-carriage or on-carriage. The FWM business document only has one source location and one destination location.
Transportation Requirement Types The automatic creation of freight units can be activated in SAP TM configuration for orderbased and delivery-based transportation requirements and forwarding orders.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
18
Lesson: Applying Short-Cut Planning
Automatic freight unit building is flagged for the desired OTR and DTR types in the context of automated planning.
Freight Unit Building Rules Automatic or direct creation of a freight order is possible via the freight unit building rule. Instead of defining a freight unit type in the freight unit building rule, a freight order type can be specified. A freight order is then created directly instead of a freight unit. No additional intervention is required by the planner in the transportation cockpit.
Freight Orders Carrier selection can be automatically triggered for a freight order by assigning process controller strategy CARR_SEL as a creation strategy to the freight order type in SAP TM configuration. When doing so, carrier selection is carried out for the freight order upon its creation. The tendering process can also be initiated using process controller strategies.
Carrier Profile Carriers are business partners that are assigned the business partner Carrier role. You characterize the transportation capabilities of a carrier with the carrier profile. This object stores information that is used in a similar constellation for multiple carriers. You create only one profile for each carrier. You can store the following objects in a carrier profile: ●
Freight code sets
●
Transportation lane and carrier-specific parameters
●
Product freight groups
●
Transportation groups
●
Equipment groups and equipment types
●
Fixed transportation costs
●
Dimension costs
You use the carrier profile when selecting a carrier. In SAP TM, to define the carrier profile, choose Master Data→ General → Define Carrier Profile. Carrier Selection Settings Definition of settings can be done in the carrier selection settings or in the transportation lane. ●
Carrier selection settings
●
Determination of costs
●
Transportation charge interpretation
●
Business share usage
●
Transportation allocation usage
●
Incompatibility usage
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
19
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
The carrier selection settings are part of the planning profile settings and are required to launch a carrier selection run. Carrier selection settings can be retrieved from the freight order type as default carrier selection settings or via a condition maintained in the freight order type customizing. Specify in the carrier selection settings that automatic tendering is to start after the carrier selection run.
Tendering Profile The tendering profile is used to define a tendering plan. It contains basic tendering data and is a prerequisite for automatic tendering. You can use a tendering profile when you manually create a tendering plan. Within the profile, you can define multi-step tendering in a tendering plan. This allows a company to mix tendering types. Profile Definitions Within the tendering profile, you can define multiple variants such as direct, peer-to-peer, and broadcast tendering. You can also decide if the rule based tendering is fully automatic or semi-automatic. The tendering profile also allows you to define the medium of tendering communication. It can be web-based, e-mail, SMS, or B2B oriented. You can identify a multi-currency setting, event monitoring, and exception based management. You can classify a fully configurable process, request for quotation (RFQ) publishing, and authorization-based RFQ processing and data visibility.
Automatic Planning Execution Automatic planning allows you to automate the planning process in SAP TM. You can use this process for: ●
Automatic freight order creation
●
Automatic carrier selection
●
Automatic freight order tendering
●
Automatic quotation evaluation and carrier assignment
When a sales order is created in SAP ERP, it is transferred to SAP TM where an order-based transportation requirement is created. If all planning steps are automated in SAP TM, no additional user intervention is needed; a freight order is automatically created and tendered to a carrier. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Describe short-cut planning
●
Maintain integration settings for short-cut planning
●
Maintain configuration and execute short-cut planning
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
20
Unit 1 Lesson 5 Creating Pooled Shipments
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you examine the process of modeling the transportation network for pooled distribution. You learn about the purpose and definition of a transshipment location. You then consider the use of the transportation network for pooled distribution to generate pooled shipments. Finally, you identify the requirement for a pooled shipment in multiple freight orders and execute planning for pooled distribution. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Model the transportation network for pooled shipments
●
Create pooled freight orders
Pooled Distribution
Figure 14: Pool Distribution
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
21
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
In the pooled distribution process, the SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) system determines whether it is more cost-effective to deliver freight directly to the customer via truckload or using a pool location to consolidate freight. The second option is cheaper yet more time-consuming. In the pool distribution process, a shipper wants to send goods from a shipping point to customers using pool or hub locations for consolidation. For planning, sales orders are created in the SAP ERP system and then transferred as order-based transportation requests into the SAP TM system. VSR Optimization in Pooled Distribution The VSR optimizer determines whether it is more cost-effective and less time-consuming to deliver freight to customers via less than truckload (LTL) directly with no consolidation allowed or to a pool location for consolidation. From there, freight can be delivered to customers via full truck load (FTL) with multiple stop offs.
Transshipment Locations
Figure 15: Transshipment Locations
A transshipment location is used for unloading goods from one vehicle resource and loading it onto another vehicle resource during the transportation process. Transshipment locations are used when different means of transport or different carriers have to be used in the transportation process. You can also use transshipment locations when consolidating or deconsolidating goods to be transported. Definition of a Transshipment Location A transshipment location is defined by assigning a location to either another location or to a transportation zone. When you assign a transshipment location to a transportation zone, it can be used as a transshipment location by all locations that are part of that transportation zone. If you define a transshipment location and want to use it in your transportation processes, you must define transportation lanes that take the transshipment location into consideration.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
22
Lesson: Creating Pooled Shipments
Rough Planning
Figure 16: Rough Planning
Rough Planning Business Rationale ●
●
For pre- and on-carriages, rough planning is sufficient. For pre- and on-carriages, neither transportation lanes, vehicles, or schedules are required, thus reducing the effort for master data maintenance.
For many business processes, it is not important to plan complete end-to-end transportation in detail. For example, it may be important to find the right flights, but if the airport can be reached within a predefined time interval, the planning for this stage of the journey does not need to be planned with the same precision. The assignment of transshipment locations to transportation zones (entry or exit point into a transportation network) allows planners to specify a duration that can be used for rough planning. This means that a detailed transportation network (transportation lanes, for example) is not required for pre or oncarriage. Transshipment locations are defined only as entry and exit points in the network. If entry and exit points are connected indirectly via schedules or freight bookings, the transshipment points for these do not have to be defined as transshipment locations (from SAP TM 9.0). If stages are maintained (via transportation proposal or manually) constraints resulting from stage information can be considered or respected.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
23
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
Transportation Lanes
Figure 17: Transportation Lanes
A transportation lane represents a relationship between two locations, two transportation zones, or a combination of locations and zones. It connects two locations or all locations within the zones for a specific means of transport. You use this business object when planning distribution and procurement between different locations. A transportation lane is defined by a source location or zone, a destination location or zone, and a means of transport. You can assign carriers to the transportation lane. A transportation lane points only in one direction. To model the reverse direction, you need to create another transportation lane. Editing a Transportation Lane You can change or display transportation lanes that you have defined in SAP TM by choosing Master Data→ Transportation Network→ Define Transportation Lane. You can also view and edit multiple transportation lanes on Mass theMaint. (Display/Change) tab. Transportation lanes are used in transportation processes such as dispatching or subcontracting. The origin and destination locations, carrier, and means of transport are assigned to the transportation lane.
Multi-Stage Transportation The VSR optimizer evaluates the various possibilities for transporting the selected freight units. It then opts for pooled distribution whenever it is cost-effective to do so. In a standard pooled distribution process, the VSR optimizer creates one freight order to transport the
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
24
Lesson: Creating Pooled Shipments
cargo to the transshipment location. It then creates a second freight order to transport the cargo out of the transshipment location. Other scenarios are also possible. Multiple freight orders allow splitting up of resource assignment, carrier assignment, and other downstream planning and execution activities. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Model the transportation network for pooled shipments
●
Create pooled freight orders
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
25
Unit 1 Learning Assessment
1. Which of the following items is not a constraint considered by the VSR optimizer? Choose the correct answer. X
A Vehicle capacity
X
B Driver experience
X
C Handling resources
X
D Depot location
2. Using the planning cost settings, the optimizer can determine the best means of transport to use. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
3. The SAP TM system creates a freight order directly via the freight unit building rule when you save an FWM business document if the FWM business document only has one source location and one destination location, if the FWM business document is subcontracted and not consolidated with other FWM business documents, and if the FWM business document can be delivered in one freight order, meaning there is no pre-carriage or oncarriage. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
26
Unit 1: Learning Assessment
4. To create carrier selection profiles in SAP TM, what is the correct menu path to choose? Choose the correct answer. X
A Planning→ Selection Profiles→ Create Selection Profile
X
B Planning→ Planning Profiles→ Create Planning Profile
X
C Planning→ Planning Profile Settings → Carrier Selection Settings → Create Carrier Selection Settings
X
D Planning→ Capacity Selection Settings → Create Capacity Selection Settings
5. Any freight order with more than one stage must visit at least one transshipment location. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
6. A transshipment location allows you to change the means-of-transport. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
27
Unit 1 Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Which of the following items is not a constraint considered by the VSR optimizer? Choose the correct answer. X
A Vehicle capacity
X
B Driver experience
X
C Handling resources
X
D Depot location
2. Using the planning cost settings, the optimizer can determine the best means of transport to use. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
3. The SAP TM system creates a freight order directly via the freight unit building rule when you save an FWM business document if the FWM business document only has one source location and one destination location, if the FWM business document is subcontracted and not consolidated with other FWM business documents, and if the FWM business document can be delivered in one freight order, meaning there is no pre-carriage or oncarriage. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
28
Unit 1: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. To create carrier selection profiles in SAP TM, what is the correct menu path to choose? Choose the correct answer. X
A Planning→ Selection Profiles→ Create Selection Profile
X
B Planning→ Planning Profiles→ Create Planning Profile
X
C Planning→ Planning Profile Settings → Carrier Selection Settings → Create Carrier Selection Settings
X
D Planning→ Capacity Selection Settings → Create Capacity Selection Settings
5. Any freight order with more than one stage must visit at least one transshipment location. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
6. A transshipment location allows you to change the means-of-transport. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
29
UNIT 2 Optimizer Applications
Lesson 1 Creating a Transportation Proposal
31
Lesson 2 Describing Load Optimization Processes
34
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
Plan freight orders using transportation proposals
●
Create a vehicle for load optimization
●
Create freight units for load optimization
●
Maintain load planning settings
●
Perform load planning
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
30
Unit 2 Lesson 1 Creating a Transportation Proposal
LESSON OVERVIEW This lesson provides an overview of the transportation proposal functionality offered by SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM). LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Plan freight orders using transportation proposals
Transportation Proposals A transportation proposal defines how a freight unit can be transported through a transportation network (which is defined by locations, transshipment locations, transportation zones, transportation lanes, vehicle resources, schedules, and bookings). For a given transportation demand (freight unit), the system determines a set of alternative transportation proposals. The transportation proposal functionality serves the following purposes: ●
●
To help the user identify the different transportation options for a freight unit. In a complex network, in which end-to-end transportation requires several stages, transportation proposals are an easy way to make the different options transparent. Transportation proposals can differ in relation to routing, means of transport, and time required. Each of these variables can increase or reduce costs, and the proposals thus provide the planner responsible with the necessary information to make an appropriate choice. To create the stages upfront, for example, to choose the option of ocean transport, because the customer has placed their order well in advance and this is the cheapest choice. In this use case, no freight orders are created based on the proposal result, but only the stage information is stored. This allows the task of planning the different stages to be assigned to different planners and to be completed at different times.
Figure 18: Visualization Of Transportation Proposals
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
31
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
Entry Points for Transportation Proposal Determination The entry points for transportation proposal determination are as follows: ●
Forwarding Order→ Stages → Actual Route→ Define Route
●
Transportation Cockpit→ Select Freight Unit(s) → Transportation Proposal
Layout of the Transportation Proposal Result The layout of the transportation proposal result screen can be flexibly configured, similar to the transportation cockpit layout. The results can be displayed in a table format or visualized on a map. If the transportation proposal has been carried out for several freight units (because these compete for the same capacity, for example), the solution is always for a valid combination of assignments. In the table-based layout, each stage is shown in a separate line. In complex networks, there could be millions of routing options for a given transport, with only minor differences between them. Depending on the objective of the planner, results can be presented according to defined criteria. Transportation Proposal: User-Defined Preferences ●
Route variation
●
Carrier variation
●
Departure date variation
●
Time relevance
●
Cost variance
Preferences can be weighed against each other on the basis of relevance: none, low, medium, or high.
Figure 19: Transportation Proposal User Interface
Features of the Transportation Proposal The features of the transportation proposal are as follows:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
32
Lesson: Creating a Transportation Proposal
●
●
●
Implicit definition of transshipment locations by schedules and freight bookings (simplified definition of transportation network) Mode of transport constraints on freight unit and freight unit stage level Fast determination of transportation proposals, yielding more alternatives according to predefined variation criteria (for example, route, carrier, and departure date), and trade-off between time and cost (controlled variation according to pre-defined criteria)
●
Consideration of preferences for locations, carrier, mode of transport, dates, and times.
●
Display of multiple solutions on the result map
●
Rough planning (detailed planning on the main leg and rough planning for pre leg and subsequent leg, based on rough definition of transportation durations)
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Plan freight orders using transportation proposals
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
33
Unit 2 Lesson 2 Describing Load Optimization Processes
LESSON OVERVIEW This lesson examines the necessary maintenance of capacity master data for load maintenance. You learn about freight unit creation for load optimization, and you can create a vehicle for load optimization. You look at freight unit dimensions and can practise creating freight units for load optimization. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Create a vehicle for load optimization
●
Create freight units for load optimization
●
Maintain load planning settings
●
Perform load planning
Load Optimization During truck planning, rules are applied to fulfill legal restrictions. For example, certain axle loads may not be exceeded. In addition, a certain loading sequence of the goods to be transported optimizes the transportation plan. Load planning concerns the loading of goods to be transported in an optimized manner into a transportation unit, be it be a truck, trailer, or container resource. You can plan the loading space of box trucks, trailers, semi-trailers, and containers in the transportation cockpit or directly in one of the following business documents: ●
Road freight order
●
Trailer unit
●
Container unit
Planning is carried out at the level of business document items. Load planning returns an approximate calculation of how the available loading space can be optimally used, taking into account the maximum axle loads and the maximum weight of a vehicle resource. The calculation is based on the master data that you enter for the resource. In automatic load planning, also known as load optimization, the load optimizer creates a load plan for your business document. It considers capacity restrictions in terms of the height, width, weight, and length of the loading space. For vehicle resources with two axle groups, it also considers the maximum axle load.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
34
Lesson: Describing Load Optimization Processes
Vehicle Capacity
Figure 20: Vehicle Capacity
Vehicle Capacity Attributes ●
●
●
VSR: -
One-dimensional, for example, volume or mass.
-
Up to eight dimensions.
VSO: -
Three-dimensional, for example, pallet or box size.
-
Visual representation.
Vehicle capacity is maintained in vehicle resource master data.
In vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) planning, SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) considers the resource capacities of weight and volume. However, the new load planning function requires much more information on master data level. Not only are weight and volume limitations considered more precisely, but weight distribution of axles is also planned. This is required to fulfill legal restrictions when creating a load plan. Within the resource master data, on Physical the Properties tab, there are additional capacity and resource configuration fields to maintain. You can specify attributes regarding dimension, weight, and type of resource. One specific attribute is the definition of axle groups. From SAP TM 9.1, a resource viewer (master data transaction) is offered to display the resource configuration.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
35
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
Vehicle Types
Figure 21: Vehicle Types Example 1: Box Truck
The table, Box Truck, provides a detailed explanation of the elements of the figure, Vehicle Types Example 1: Box Truck: Table 1: Box Truck Measurement in Figure
Name in the Master Data Description
a1
Axle Group Distance 1
Distance between axle group 1 and the front of the box truck
c
Cargo body distance
Distance between the start of the loading space and the front of the box truck
a2
Axle Group Distance 2
Distance between axle group 2 and the front of the box truck
d
Connector Distance
Distance between the trailer coupling of the box truck and the front of the vehicle
s2
Distance Between Axles
Distance within axle group 2
h
Interior Height
Height of the loading space
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
36
Lesson: Describing Load Optimization Processes
Measurement in Figure
Name in the Master Data Description
l
Interior Length
Length of the loading space
Vehicle Types Example 2: Semi-Trailer
Figure 22: Vehicle Types Example 2: Semi-Trailer
The table, Semi-Trailer, provides a detailed explanation of the elements of the figure, Vehicle Types Example 2: Semi-Trailer: Table 2: Semi-Trailer Measurement in Figure
Name in the Master Data Description
a1
Axle Group Distance 1
Distance between axle group 1 and the front of the trailer
s1
Distance Between Axles
Distance within axle group 1
k
King Pin Distance
Distance between the king pin and the front of the trailer
h
Interior Height
Height of the loading space
l
Interior Length
Length of the loading space
p
Split Deck Position
Position in the trailer at which you have added the split deck
Freight Unit Dimensions Dimensions of individual packages are determined from the business document items; that is, freight unit items are the basis for load planning and load optimization in the transportation cockpit.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
37
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
The following are relevant dimensions: ●
Length
●
Height
●
Width
●
Gross weight
Load Planning Settings Load planning settings define a process controller strategy. This strategy defines a sequence of methods to be executed for the load planning and enables a flexible combination of standard and custom logic. With the strategy, it is possible to define a set of rules to be applied when optimizing the load. The rules can be given a priority, deactivated to test the planning with a different rule set, and adjusted with certain attributes. Load Planning Settings Definition ●
Load planning strategy
●
Load optimization runtime
●
Load planning rules (including their priorities and parameters)
Load planning settings are assigned in the planning profile. By assigning a planning profile in the freight order type, different load planning settings can be used for different freight order types.
Load Planning Rules In automatic load planning, you can define rules to be considered by the system during a load optimization run. You can choose between the following types of rules: ●
Rules that apply to automatic planning for all resource types
●
Rules that apply only to the automatic load planning of box trucks
●
Rules that apply only to the automatic planning of trailers and semi-trailers
●
Rules that apply only to the automatic load planning of the upper decks of double-deck trailers
You can define different rules for the lower and upper deck of double-deck trailers. The combination of stack, row, and line indicates the exact position of each package loaded onto the resource. Packages loaded on top of each other form a stack. Packages loaded next to each other from left to right form a row. The first row of a deck is always placed towards the start of the loading space. Packages loaded one behind the other from front to back form a line. The first line of a deck is always on the left side of the deck in the direction of travel. Rules for Load Planning ●
Stack height ascending in driving direction
●
Stack height descending in driving direction
●
Maximum height difference of adjacent stacks
●
Maximum height difference of stacks within a row
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
38
Lesson: Describing Load Optimization Processes
●
Maximum height difference of stacks within a line
●
Penalty for packages that cannot be loaded based on weight
●
Penalty for packages that cannot be loaded based on weight multiplied by volume
●
Packages with high density must be at the bottom of the stack
●
Packages can be positioned anywhere in the stack regardless of weight and density
Features of Load Planning Rules
Figure 23: Load Planning Rules Example: Loading Pattern
Load planning rules are characterized by the following features: ●
Loading pattern
●
Orientation
Transportation Cockpit The transportation cockpit layout can be enhanced to perform the following activities: ●
Initiate load planningOrdersscreen ( area).
●
Initiate load planningTransportation ( Unitscreen area).
●
Visualize and analyze load planing Order ( Detailsscreen area).
●
Explain the load planning result Visibilitybutton). (
Load Planning The load plan is the result of load planning. It provides you with an overview of how the loading space available for transporting a business document is used currently.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
39
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
In both the transportation cockpit and in the business document, you can display the complete load plan as a 3D load plan or a table load plan of business document items. In the 3D load plan, you can show or hide individual objects as well as entire rows, columns, or stacks and fill them with different colors. Furthermore, you can show and hide gridlines in your decks in the 3D load plan. If items cannot be loaded, the load plan includes information on the loading sequence and the exact position on the vehicle. In addition to the load plan, a load distribution is available for each axle and the complete vehicle. This document proves that the load plan fulfills legal requirements. An additional tab holds statistical indicators such as the used volume and area. The Load Plan The load plan contains the following information about the business document item: ●
Resource
●
Item in the resource
●
Loading sequence
●
Row, stack, and level in the loading space
●
Gross weight
●
Height, width, and length
●
Stackability
Load Plan Analysis The following is the load distribution and statistical data based on the current load plan: ●
Number of loaded business document items
●
Used area on the lower deck of your double-deck trailer
●
Utilization of the loading volume in percent
●
Used area on the upper deck of your double-deck trailer
●
Maximum weight for each axle group compared to the current weight for each axle group
●
Maximum trailing load compared to the current trailing load
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Create a vehicle for load optimization
●
Create freight units for load optimization
●
Maintain load planning settings
●
Perform load planning
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
40
Unit 2 Learning Assessment
1. Why is rough planning sometimes sufficient for pre- and on-carriage? Choose the correct answer. X
A Main carriage is the only portion of a transportation route that ever requires planning.
X
B Pre-carriage and on-carriage are planned by the shipper and the customer respectively, no detailed plans are required.
X
C A carrier or LSP may be extremely familiar with the routes for pre-carriage, for example from a warehouse to an airport. The same degree of planning is therefore not required for each individual shipment.
X
D Pre-carriage and on-carriage must always be planned with the same degree of detail as the main carriage.
2. Which of the following can be expressed as preferences for a transportation proposal? Choose the correct answers. X
A Route variation
X
B Departure date variation
X
C Driver preference
X
D Incompatibilities
3. Which of the following load planning rules are available in SAP TM 9.1? Choose the correct answers. X
A Stack height ascending in driving direction
X
B Packages with high density must be on top of the stack
X
C Maximum height difference of packages in one row
X
D U.S. Federal Bridge Formula
X
E Truck: Load all packages with the same loading formula
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
41
Unit 2: Learning Assessment
4. Load planning considers the business document items to determine the dimensions of the individual packages. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
5. For which of the following documents can you execute load planning? Choose the correct answers. X
A Freight order
X
B Transportation unit
X
C Forwarding order
X
D Handling resource
6. Load optimization can consider only one planning rule. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
42
Unit 2 Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Why is rough planning sometimes sufficient for pre- and on-carriage? Choose the correct answer. X
A Main carriage is the only portion of a transportation route that ever requires planning.
X
B Pre-carriage and on-carriage are planned by the shipper and the customer respectively, no detailed plans are required.
X
C A carrier or LSP may be extremely familiar with the routes for pre-carriage, for example from a warehouse to an airport. The same degree of planning is therefore not required for each individual shipment.
X
D Pre-carriage and on-carriage must always be planned with the same degree of detail as the main carriage.
2. Which of the following can be expressed as preferences for a transportation proposal? Choose the correct answers. X
A Route variation
X
B Departure date variation
X
C Driver preference
X
D Incompatibilities
3. Which of the following load planning rules are available in SAP TM 9.1? Choose the correct answers. X
A Stack height ascending in driving direction
X
B Packages with high density must be on top of the stack
X
C Maximum height difference of packages in one row
X
D U.S. Federal Bridge Formula
X
E Truck: Load all packages with the same loading formula
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
43
Unit 2: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. Load planning considers the business document items to determine the dimensions of the individual packages. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
5. For which of the following documents can you execute load planning? Choose the correct answers. X
A Freight order
X
B Transportation unit
X
C Forwarding order
X
D Handling resource
6. Load optimization can consider only one planning rule. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
44
UNIT 3 Advanced Transportation Network
Lesson 1 Creating Schedules
46
Lesson 2 Analyzing the Results of the Path Finder
51
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
Create carrier schedules
●
Generate departures
●
Use the Path Finder to analyze results
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
45
Unit 3 Lesson 1 Creating Schedules
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn about carrier schedules, schedule types, and schedule capacities. You create a carrier schedule before you examine and generate departures. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Create carrier schedules
●
Generate departures
Carrier Schedules
Figure 24: Sailing Schedule with Gateway (CFS)
When shipping products via air or ocean, consider that your partners are typically renting space at a port facility. This facility is used by many parties, and so options for moving product may be limited. While the road-based scenario can make use of a variety of transportation lanes due to the flexibility of the carriers, ocean and air carriers often face more competition and more
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
46
Lesson: Creating Schedules
regulation. This limits the flexibility for departures and arrivals. From a transportation planning perspective, the implication is that you may need a more structured and predictable plan for scheduling purposes. With SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM), your organization can take advantage of different types of schedules to model specific departure and arrival rules suited to air and ocean shipping. Carrier Schedules for Actual Transportation Carrier schedules represent the actual transportation executed by the schedule vehicle, be it by plane, vessel, train, or truck. Usually, these schedules involve stopping at locations such as ports and airports that are used commonly and shared by many different carriers. Flights for air transportation and vessel voyages for ocean are examples of carrier schedules. Carrier schedules can also be truck schedules. Location and time information are relevant to a schedule. For example, the planner asks the following questions: ●
When and from where does the plane depart?
●
When do you have to be there to board it?
●
When will it arrive?
●
Which carrier is responsible for the transportation?
●
What can be transported?
Carrier schedules do not just have a start and end destination; they can have multiple stops, which is common for air transportation. Carrier schedules can be executed by different carriers on different stages using a connection schedule. It is possible to use a multi-stop carrier schedule in any sequential location combination, so it is not required to start at the first and leave at the last location. Schedules can be created manually in SAP TM and uploaded from an external source. You can also upload schedules from an external data source to SAP TM by calling function module /SCMTMS/BAPI_SCHEDULE_SAVEMULT. This function is available for the sea, air, and road transportation modes. Alternatively, you can upload schedules for the air transportation mode in a spreadsheet or CSV format to SAP TM by executing report / SCMTMS/SCH_UPLOAD. For more information, see the system documentation. You can delete schedules created manually and uploaded by calling function module / SCMTMS/BAPI_SCHEDULE_DELMULTI or by executing report /SCMTMS/SCH_DELETION.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
47
Unit 3: Advanced Transportation Network
Schedule Types
Figure 25: Overview of Schedules
SAP TM allows businesses to create different schedule types to handle the multiple shipping scenarios they may encounter. Schedules can be maintained for each business partner or carrier, and can identify different loading and unloading points, such as ports and airports. If you have reappearing transportation traffic in your transportation network scenario, you can use the schedules functionality. A combination of transportation mode, gateway customer fact sheets (CFS), direct, and reference fields define the type of schedule. A gateway schedule includes two gateway locations. In ocean scenarios, the locations could be the CFS-locations. In air scenarios, they can be the gateway locations. Gateway Schedules: Subcategories The following are the subcategories in gateway schedules: ●
Direct The schedule goes from A to B without changing the mode of transport. For example, GW Nurnberg to GW Hamburg via truck.
●
Indirect The schedule goes from A to B but the mode of transport changes. For example, GW Hamburg to GW Cape Town via truck and ocean.
Air and Ocean Scenarios: Subcategories The following are the subcategories in ocean and air scenarios:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
48
Lesson: Creating Schedules
●
Sailing schedules with vessel information
●
Master flight schedules with aircraft information
Carrier schedules describe a sequence of transportation stops where the start location and the target stop are not gateways. A gateway is a transportation hub where freight is consolidated and deconsolidated. Carrier Schedules ●
Ocean Carrier Schedule Use the ocean carrier schedule to define a standard sequence of transportation stops that are served by a ship. By specifying departure rules, you can generate voyages automatically.
●
Carrier Flight Schedule Use the carrier flight schedule to define a standard sequence of transportation stops that are served by a plane. By specifying departure rules, you can generate flights automatically.
●
Road Schedule Use the road schedule to define a standard sequence of transportation stops that are served by a truck.
Schedule Capacities In the schedule type, you can define if the schedule should have the following items assigned to it: ●
Limited capacities
●
Transportation costs
Departure Calendar By specifying departure rules in carrier schedules, you can generate voyages, flights, and departures automatically. The system calculates the arrival and departure dates and times at each transportation stop in the sequence, taking into account the transit duration, cut-off times, and availability of the goods for each stop. You can then modify each generated voyage individually. You can define the following durations and times for each stop: ●
Transit duration
●
Length of stay
●
Cargo cut-off time
●
Availability time
You can generate concrete departures from your departure rule and adjust them individually for each departure if required. You can define departure rules at schedule or transportation stage level for carrier schedules and gateway schedules. You can also apply departure rules from a referenced carrier schedule to a gateway schedule.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
49
Unit 3: Advanced Transportation Network
Automatic Calculation of Times In theDeparture Rules screen area of your schedule, if you selectAuto the Fill Timescheckbox and specify particular times for various transportation stages, the system calculates the missing times for the various transportation stages of the departure rule automatically. It also takes the different time zones of each of the locations into account. In carrier schedules, for example, the system uses the arrival time at the destination location of the first transportation stage and the length of stay at the destination location of the first destination stage to calculate the departure time at the source location of the second transportation stage.
Departures Possible Alterations to Departures (Voyages, Flights, Trips) The following alterations can be made to departures: ●
Created
●
Changed
●
Deleted
Changes to Each Departure Changes can be made to each departure in the following areas: ●
The location sequence
●
Dates and times
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Create carrier schedules
●
Generate departures
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
50
Unit 3 Lesson 2 Analyzing the Results of the Path Finder
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you examine transportation network complexity and consider the use and benefits of the path finder in transportation planning. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Use the Path Finder to analyze results
Transportation Network Complexity Scenario building can be time consuming. Scenario validation, especially for transportation optimization, is even more time consuming. The planner needs to establish if all elements of the transportation network are maintained correctly to enable the optimizer to find a valid solution. You can use the path finder function to search for legs in your transportation network and take the following considerations into account during the process: ●
Locations
●
Transshipment locations
●
Transportation lanes
●
Schedules
●
Transportation zones
The path finder enables you to easily determine whether a connection exists between two locations and, therefore, whether you have correctly configured your master data. However, the path finder does not take incompatibilities into consideration. Path Finder Execution You can execute the path finder and check the result in either the transportation network cockpit or on the transportation proposals user interface. ●
Transportation Network Cockpit When you open the context menu for a location in the transportation network cockpit, you can chooseFind Path To Locationand enter a destination in the displayed dialog box. The system then calculates all of the available connections in the transportation network and displays them on the map. The color of the connections indicates whether a valid transportation lane or schedule exists.
●
Transportation Proposals
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
51
Unit 3: Advanced Transportation Network
When you call the user interface for transportation proposals, you can choose the appropriate button to show or hide the available connections on the map. As in the transportation network cockpit, the color of the connections indicates whether a valid transportation lane or schedule exists. ●
Explanation Tool When you select one or more freight units, you can choose Show Network Path to analyze the underlying transportation network that is taken into account when planning the selected freight units.
Path Finder Report ●
●
●
Requests -
Source location
-
Destination location
Options -
Determine path
-
Determine connections
Restrictions -
Outbound, inbound, or implicit hub
-
Transportation mode
-
Means of transport
Path Finder Report: /SCMTMS/FIND_TN_PATH The required input for the tool is a start and a destination location. Using assigned transshipment locations and existing connections (transportation lanes, schedules, and booking), the path finder tries to find all paths. The result indicates if there is a valid connection or not (all existing are listed) for each stage of a path. It is thus easy to find out if you have assigned a transshipment location, but if it cannot be reached from your start location. The report has some limitations. For example, it is not possible to search within a certain timeframe and respect the validity of the connections. Also, transportation mode and meansof-transport filters are not available and incompatibilities are not considered. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Use the Path Finder to analyze results
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
52
Unit 3 Learning Assessment
1. Carrier schedules can reference a corresponding schedule. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
2. What is the minimum number of locations required to define a carrier schedule? Choose the correct answer. X
A 1
X
B 2
X
C 3
X
D 4
3. The path finder can be used to visualize proposals. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
53
Unit 3 Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Carrier schedules can reference a corresponding schedule. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
2. What is the minimum number of locations required to define a carrier schedule? Choose the correct answer. X
A 1
X
B 2
X
C 3
X
D 4
3. The path finder can be used to visualize proposals. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
54
UNIT 4 Transportation Unit Planning
Lesson 1 Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
56
Lesson 2 Planning Transportation Units with Passive Vehicle Resources
64
Lesson 3 Planning Transportation Units with the Optimizer
68
Lesson 4 Planning Transportation with Container Units
71
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
Create passive vehicle resources
●
Analyze transportation units
●
Create transportation units
●
Outline transportation unit planning
●
Apply optimizer settings to passive vehicle resources
●
Create container units
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
55
Unit 4 Lesson 1 Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn about passive vehicle resources and their creation in SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM). You then examine transportation units and learn how to analyze rail units. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Create passive vehicle resources
●
Analyze transportation units
Means of Transport The figure, Transportation Resources: Mode of Transport and Means of Transport, provides information about the means of transport in SAP TM.
Figure 26: Transportation Resources: Mode of Transport and Means of Transport
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
56
Lesson: Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
Transportation Resources ●
●
●
Mode of Transport (MoT): For example, road or sea. Means of Transport (MTr): For example, railcar, truck, refrigerated truck, less than truckload (LTL), full truckload (FTL), barge, and vessel. Vehicles and resources: For example, maintenance of capacities and depot locations for individual vehicles.
Passive Vehicle Resources
Figure 27: Vehicle Resources
Depending on the means of transport, a vehicle resource can be modeled with or without capacity and may be active or passive, as follows: ●
Active The vehicle resource can move by itself.
●
Passive The vehicle resource must be pulled by another resource.
MTr combinations can be used to model truck and trailer combinations.
Vehicle Types ●
●
●
You can define your vehicle resources, such as railcars and trailers, as resources with the necessary details in the master data. Alternatively, you can also define a vehicle group and type for railcars and trailers that contains only general information about these vehicles. You can define a vehicle type and group in the freight unit building rule. This means that the rule can be used to create a container, railcar, or transportation unit depending on the equipment or vehicle group category.
Vehicle Group and Vehicle Type The vehicle and vehicle group types specify attributes such as the physical properties of a certain kind of vehicle. When you have created a vehicle type you can do the following:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
57
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
●
●
Use the type as a template to create vehicle resources, copying the attributes of the type to the new resource. Request a special type of vehicle resource in a forwarding order or in a booking order. This is similar to the function already available for container groups and types.
Parameters for Vehicle Resources You can define, among others, the following parameters for vehicle resources: ●
Passive Means of Transport You can define vehicle resources that cannot move by themselves. In Customizing, select the Passive Means of Transport checkbox for the means of transport that is assigned to the vehicle resource.
●
Vehicle Combination You can combine means of transport to create vehicle combinations.
Means-of-Transport Combinations
Figure 28: Compartments and Trailers
A means of transport combination is an instance of a particular means of transport, or a group of identical instances of means of transport, that can provide transportation services. You use this business object to map the capacity and availability of vehicles that you want to use for transportation. MTr combinations have the following attributes: ●
They can be used to model a truck and trailer combination.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
58
Lesson: Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
●
●
●
●
You can specify the number of the objects of each MTr within the combination. For example, one truck and two trailers. You specify capacities (several units of measure (UoM)): Maximum capacities of the combination. Additional (freely definable) attributes can be used for compatibilities and incompatibilities, based on a customizable attribute definition (code + text). Coupling or uncoupling durations are defined per passive MTr.
Transportation Units Table 3: Transportation Unit (TU) Feature
Freight Unit
Transportation UnitFreight Order
Represents demand +
+
-
Default route to de+ fine stages
+
-
Provides capacity
-
+
+
Different quantities per stage
-
+
+
Cargo management -
+
+
Subcontracting
-
+
-
Using the transportation unit business document, you can depict transport requirements or capacity, for example: ●
A trailer and its load
●
The capacity of a railcar or several railcars that are transported together
●
A container and its load
You use the transportation unit to consolidate freight units. You can then plan the transportation unit as a unit for several transportation stages. That is, you can assign it to one or more freight orders. Within the transportation unit type, you configure the most important settings for the transportation unit. For example, you use the transportation unit category to indicate whether you want to create the transportation unit type for a trailer, a railcar, or a container. When you then create the related business document, such as a trailer unit, for example, the system offers you only the relevant transportation units.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
59
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
Document Structure with Transportation Units
Figure 29: Document Structure with Transportation Unit
Document Structure with Transportation Units: An Explanation Table 4: Document Structure with Transportation Units: An Explanation The following table provides explanatory information about the figure, Document Structure with Transportation Units. Transportation Order
Structure
Trailer TU 1
●
Contains FU 1 and FU 2
●
Defines own stages
Mover FO 1
●
Covers 1 TU stage
Mover FO 2
●
Covers 2 TU stages
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
60
Lesson: Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
Trailer Units
Figure 30: Trailer Units
TU is a new document or object in SAP TM. The planning features for tractor and trailer resources are in the Transportation Cockpit. The TU was introduced in SAP TM 9.0. A TU is a document that represents a trailer, such as a passive vehicle resource. The trailer document is used for certain logistical activities, such as a trailer swap scenario where the same physical trailer is used to transport goods with multiple tractors, or a scenario where the trailer is loaded first and then it is routed through a network of trailer exchange locations. The trailer document represents both of the following: ●
A capacity that can be used to transport freight units
●
A transportation demand that requires a freight order to be moved
The Trailer Unit The logistical processing of transports with trailers comprises of trailer units. You require a trailer unit if a trailer is moved by more than one tractor. In the transportation unit type, you configure the most important settings for the trailer units. You cannot perform subcontracting for trailer units. Trailer units contain the following information: ●
General Data (such as locations and dates) You can enter one-time locations at stage level. The system stores these new locations and adjusts stages in the document. It also adjusts the locations in the assigned execution documents.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
61
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
●
Transportation Stages On theStagestab, you can see the following information:
●
-
Assignment of the trailer to one or more tractors
-
The route the trailer takes
-
Transportation stage types
Freight On theFreighttab, you can see the following information:
●
-
Quantities and weights
-
Goods information
-
Dangerous goods information
-
Seal information
-
Information about foreign trade
Overview The Overviewtab is an integrated view of the Stagesand Freighttabs. It contains the following information: -
Assignment of the trailer to one or more tractors
-
The route the trailer takes
-
The maximum utilization as well as planned departure and arrival times
Trailer units also contain the following information: ●
Execution information, such as, actual departure times.
●
Document dependencies and predecessor and successor documents (document flow).
●
Status information and blocking information.
Rail Car Units A railcar unit makes up the logistic processing of transports with railcars. It describes the assignment of cargo to a railcar. A railcar unit can comprise of one or more railcars. If a customer orders a full carload and you have already defined the railcar items in the forwarding order, the system can create a railcar unit instead of a freight unit during freight unit building. The relevant item in the forwarding order must be a passive vehicle resource type and you must have entered a transportation unit in the freight unit building rule. If you have not already created the railcar items in the forwarding order, you can use the railcar unit as a consolidation document. This means that the freight unit is created based on a product item. You then assign this product freight unit to the railcar unit. Alternatively, you can assign the freight unit directly to a railcar that you have created in the rail freight order. A railcar unit must be assigned to a rail freight order before you can carry out the follow-on processes. You can assign the individual stages for the railcar unit to one or more rail freight orders. You cannot subcontract railcar units. The railcar unit is used only for logistical purposes and for the assignment of different subcontracting documents.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
62
Lesson: Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
Within the transportation unit type, you configure the most important settings for the railcar unit. Railcar units contain the same information as trailer units. The following points are variances: ●
●
General Data -
Source location and destination location (rail)
-
Number of railcars
-
Number of assigned rail freight orders
Resources and Equipment -
Position of a railcar in the train
-
Equipment group and type
-
Railcar details such as whether the railcar belongs to the shipper or the carrier
-
Information about seals. The handling execution status and the cargo execution behave in the same way as for rail freight orders.
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Create passive vehicle resources
●
Analyze transportation units
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
63
Unit 4 Lesson 2 Planning Transportation Units with Passive Vehicle Resources
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn about the manual creation of transportation units. You practise creating a transportation unit with a passive vehicle resource, and then examine freight orders with transportation units. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Create transportation units
●
Outline transportation unit planning
Manual Creation of Transportation Units Transportation Unit Creation ●
●
Options for manual creation: -
In the transportation cockpit
-
Via a separate transaction in freight order management
Options for automatic creation: -
Via freight unit building rules
-
Via the VSR optimizer
Transportation units can be created via the following options: ●
Manual creation in the transportation cockpit You create a trailer unit by assigning existing transportation stages (that is, freight units) to a trailer (document or resource).
●
Manual creation on the user interface for creating trailer units You create the trailer unit and enter the items Freight via Order Management → Road → Trailer Unit→ Create Trailer Unit .
●
Automatic creation from a transportation requirement (OTR, DTR, FWO) If, instead of creating freight units, you want to create trailer units automatically from your forwarding order (FWO), enter a transportation unit type in the freight unit building rule. This function is also available for order-based requirements (OTR) and delivery-based transportation requirements (DTR).
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
64
Lesson: Planning Transportation Units with Passive Vehicle Resources
Transportation Unit Planning
Figure 31: Transportation Unit Planning
The figure, Transportation Unit Planning, examines transportation unit planning processes in SAP TM.
Freight Orders with Transportation Units The figure, Freight Orders with Transportation Units, provides information about freight orders with transportation units in SAP TM.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
65
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
Figure 32: Freight Orders with Transportation Units
Train Composition Rail freight orders make up the logistical processing of transports with trains. A rail freight order can model a train with one or more locomotives and one or more railcars. You can execute rail freight orders or award them as a subcontract. A rail freight order includes the following items: ●
Locomotives (Vehicle Resources) If a train has several locomotives, you can model them using multi-items. During planning, the system considers only the main locomotive that you have specified at header level. The other locomotives are not taken into account during scheduling or when considering incompatibilities.
●
Railcars (Passive Vehicle Resources) Railcar items can either result from the assigned railcar units or be created directly in the rail freight order. The latter is true in less complex scenarios.
●
Cargo You assign cargo items to your railcars.
Rail Freight Order Structure General Data
●
-
-
Source location and destination location (rail) Number of railcars. The actual number of railcars is displayed here. If you have agreed scale prices with your carrier, you can enter the number of railcars for the respective scale as the rating value once you have confirmed this with the carrier. The system then
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
66
Lesson: Planning Transportation Units with Passive Vehicle Resources
calculates the tariff based on this amount instead of the actual value. When doing so, it considers the calculation basis and rate table that you have defined. -
●
Indicates if there are multiple executing carriers
Items -
Position of a railcar in the train
-
Equipment group and type
-
Railcar details, such as whether the railcar belongs to the shipper or the carrier
The Itemstab page replaces the Cargoand Equipmenttab pages. You can personalize your user interface so that the system displays the old tab pages. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Create transportation units
●
Outline transportation unit planning
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
67
Unit 4 Lesson 3 Planning Transportation Units with the Optimizer
LESSON OVERVIEW This lesson examines the planning profiles and settings required to execute the optimizer in SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM). LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Apply optimizer settings to passive vehicle resources
Planning Profiles Planning profiles are used to influence and control the outcome of the optimizer. A planning profile must be specified for an optimizer run and takes into account the various settings of the profile. These settings control different steps of the optimization process. There are several sub-profiles which must be created for use in the planning profile. There are a number of planning profile assignments, as follows: ●
Selection profile for transportation units
●
Selection profile for freight orders
●
Selection profile for freight bookings
●
Capacity selection settings
●
Optimizer settings
●
Load planning settings
●
Planning cost settings
●
Incompatibility settings
●
Carrier selection settings
Capacity Selection Settings ●
Vehicle resources
●
Container resources
●
Schedules
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
68
Lesson: Planning Transportation Units with the Optimizer
Incompatibility Settings
Figure 33: Incompatibility Settings
The figure, Incompatibility Settings, provides information about incompatibility settings in SAP TM.
Automatic Planning
Figure 34: Optimizer Constraints
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
69
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
The vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimizer can create trailer documents as a result of considering all constraints. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Apply optimizer settings to passive vehicle resources
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
70
Unit 4 Lesson 4 Planning Transportation with Container Units
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn about freight unit creation using equipment types. You examine container consolidation and container unit planning in the transportation planning process. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Create container units
Equipment Types
Figure 35: Equipment Types
Equipment types are the most integral part of the entire shipping industry. These shipping containers store the various products that need to be shipped from one part of the world to another.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
71
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
Depending on the type of products that are shipped or the special services needed for them, equipment types may vary in dimension, structure, materials, or construction. Various types of shipping containers are used to meet the diverse requirements of the cargo shipping world. The following are some of the most common types of shipping containers in use today: ●
Dry storage containers
●
Flat rack containers
●
Open-top containers
●
Tunnel containers
●
Open-side containers
●
Double-door containers
●
Refrigerated containers
●
Insulated and Thermal containers
Resources and Equipment Types In SAP TM, a resource can be linked to a piece of equipment. Equipment types determine the type of truck or equipment that is requested to carry out the shipping. When your business requires specific types of containers or equipment, you can include this factor in your business process. With SAP TM, you can define equipment groups and specify different types of shipping containers. For example, in the air industry, the term Universal Loading Device is used to describe the type of container that is appropriate depending on the type of plane that is used. In the ocean and road industry, it is the type of container or trailer that is required based on the weight or dimension of the items being shipped. In SAP TM you can define equipment groups as well as equipment types. Within an equipment group, you define different types of equipment that have various limitations based on weight, volume, or temperature. Equipment groups are specific to a transportation mode. Depending on the assigned transportation mode, you can enter values for ocean-specific or land-specific containers, or for air-specific unit load devices (ULDs).
Transportation Unit Resource An instance of a particular transportation unit, such as a container, you can use the transportation unit resource to map the capacity and availability that you want to use for transportation. You can choose up to eight dimensions and units of measurement to describe the capacity. Note that the mass and volume are predefined by default. Planning can only take the transportation unit resource capacity into account if these correspond to the dimensions and units of measurement that you define in a freight unit building rule. The equipment, and equipment group types, specify attributes such as the physical properties of a certain kind of transportation unit resource. By creating a transportation unit resource, you can do the following: ●
●
Use the type as a template to create transportation unit resources, copying the attributes of the type to a new resource. Request a special type of transportation unit resource in a forwarding order or in a booking order.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
72
Lesson: Planning Transportation with Container Units
Transportation Unit Resource ●
Master data object to represent individual containers
●
Can be created with reference to equipment group type
●
Parameters for transportation unit resource resources include the following: -
Capacity
-
Minimum number of seals
-
Physical properties
-
Downtimes
-
Grouping attributes
-
Alternative names
Container Units You can use equipment groups and types when creating forwarding orders or forwarding quotation items of the container category. Data that relates to the physical properties of the container is then available in the forwarding order and subsequent business documents for the planner. In addition, after you have entered the equipment group, the equipment type, and the number of containers in the forwarding order, the system calculates the tare weight and the capacity of the container in the twenty-foot equivalent unit (TEU), based on settings applied in Customizing. A container unit models the logistical handling of the transportation of one or several containers. Each of these containers can contain several freight units. A container unit must be assigned to a freight document before you can carry out the followon process. You assign the individual stages for the container unit to one or more freight documents. You cannot subcontract container units. The container unit is used only for logistical purposes and for the assignment of different subcontracting documents. Within the transportation unit type, you configure the most important settings for the container unit. Container units contain the same information as trailer units. Container Unit Attributes ●
●
●
General Data -
Source location and destination location
-
Number of containers
-
Number of assigned freight documents
-
Information about whether container provisioning and return is required
Freight and Container Details -
Transportation unit resource
-
Equipment group and equipment type
-
Information about whether the container is owned by the shipper
Equipment
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
73
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
-
Seal information
-
Document references
Transportation Unit Creation Using Equipment Types If a customer orders a full container and you have already defined the container items in the forwarding order, the system can create a container unit instead of a freight unit during freight unit building. The relevant item in the forwarding order must be of Passive Vehicle Resource type, and you must have entered a transportation unit in the freight unit building rule. If you have not already created the container items in the forwarding order, you can use the container unit as a consolidation document. This means that a freight unit is created based on a product item. You must assign this product freight unit to a container unit. Alternatively, you can assign the freight unit directly to a container that you have created in the freight document.
Figure 36: Transportation Unit Creation Using Equipment Types
You can also use freight unit building rules to take into account equipment groups and equipment types as well as the physical properties of your equipment when creating transportation units (TUs). During freight unit building, the system consolidates the business document items into containers and displays them as transportation units. For these TUs, the system copies the physical properties as well as the equipment group that you defined in Customizing. SAP TM only considers equipment for the business document Packageand of Product Item (schedule line) types. The system determines a freight unit building rule for these types of item, and you have specified in this freight unit building rule that the system is to copy the equipment from the business document item, an error message appears and the creation of the freight units or transportation units is cancelled.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
74
Lesson: Planning Transportation with Container Units
For example, You have forwarding order with the following two items: ●
Item 10: Ten pallets at 10,000 kilograms each
●
Item 20: Nine pallets at 9,000 kilograms each
If you use the equipment type CNT_Example in the freight unit building rule, SAP TM creates the following item: ●
Item 10: One container, CNT_EXAMPLE, gross weight: 22,000 kilograms, Tare weight: 3,000 kilograms
This item has two sub-items that correspond to the items of the forwarding order.
Incompatibilities for Container Units ●
●
●
●
●
Container unit — Container unit (vehicle : Twolevel) container units are not allowed on the same level. Container unit — Vehicle resource : A container unit is not allowed on a vehicle resource, for example, an equipment type is not allowed on a certain truck type. Container unit — Transshipment location : A container unit is not allowed to be routed via a transshipment location, for example, because of storage constraints. Container unit — Freight booking : A container unit containing hazardous goods cannot be booked on some freight bookings. Container unit — Schedule : A container unit containing hazardous goods cannot be booked on some schedules.
Manual Planning of Container Units In the Transportation cockpit, you can plan and reassign container units by busing drag and drop. Alternatively, you can reassign by selecting the relevant rows and choosing Reassignment . Table 5: Manual Planning — Container Units Source (drag)
Target (drop)
CU stage
FO (railcar unit, trailer unit) Assign CU stage to FO (railcar unit, trailer unit) and add missing locations of FO (railcar unit, trailer unit)
CU stage
Location in FO (railcar unit, Assign CU stage to FO (railtrailer unit) car unit, trailer unit) and add missing locations at position of drop location of FO (railcar unit, trailer unit)
CU stage
Compartment in FO
Assign CU stage to compartment of FO and add missing location to FO
CU stage
FB
Assign CU stage to FB and Add missing locations t CU
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
Action
75
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
In the layout settings for the Transportation cockpit, you defined a layout for which you have selected theReassignmentcheckbox on the Orders Areaor Transportation Units Area tab pages. Alternatively, you can select Reassignment the checkbox on the Hierarchies Area tab page. You select the layout that you have defined in the layout settings for the Transportation cockpit. In theFreight Orders/Freight Bookings screen area, you choose Dual View . You can now execute your reassignment activities. In Customizing, make relevant settings to configure your standard layout for reassignment in the layout settings for the transportation cockpit. The following hierarchy types are predefined for use with container units: ●
●
●
●
TUCNT for location-based reassignment of container units with the associated freight units TUCLD for location-based reassignment of container units with the associated freight documents TUCNS for reassignment of container units with the associated freight units based on the freight unit stage TUCSD for reassignment of container units with the associated freight documents based on the freight unit stage
In addition, you can define your own hierarchy types.
Container Triangulation Container triangulation can be used to save on transportation charges by combining a request for empty provisioning, and a request for empty return. For example, you have to organize the pickup and delivery of an empty container that is no longer required from a consignee, and organize the subsequent transportation of this empty container to the container yard. You have to organize the pickup of a second container of the same type from the container yard and the provisioning of this empty container to another customer. By combining both requests into one order, you have the first empty container transported directly to the second customer.
Note: Triangulation is supported for container units and railcar units only. Triangulation is not supported for trailer units.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
76
Lesson: Planning Transportation with Container Units
Figure 37: Container Triangulation
Triangulation and Transportation Units There are at least two transportation units, one for the empty provisioning and one for the empty return (movement category Empty Returnand Empty Provisioning ). The two transportation units must have the same equipment type. The transportation unit for the empty provisioning must be unplanned. You can combine a transportation unit for the empty provisioning (empty provisioning TU) and a transportation unit for the empty return (empty return TU) in a single transportation unit (triangulation transportation unit). From a technical point of view, the system keeps the empty return TU and deletes the empty provisioning TU. The new triangulation transportation unit (triangulation TU) now refers to two forwarding orders and is assigned the movement categoryTriangulation. As with any other transportation unit you can plan this transportation unit on a freight order. When you revoke triangulation, the system dissolves the triangulation TU into the two original transportation units. Triangulation is supported for unplanned transportation units only. To perform triangulation, select a container unit or a railcar unit in the personal object worklist for container units or railcar units, and choose Triangulation→ Create Triangulation . If you have selected the option for a container unit or railcar unit for the provisioning, the system automatically proposes only container units or railcar units for the return, and vice versa. You can also perform triangulation by selecting two container units, or two railcar units, (one for the provisioning and one for the return), choose Triangulation→ Create Triangulation .
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
77
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Create container units
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
78
Unit 4 Learning Assessment
1. Which of the following are the allowed transportation unit categories? Choose the correct answers. X
A Container
X
B Railcar
X
C Trailer
X
D Vehicle resource
2. How can you create transportation unit documents? Choose the correct answers. X
A Manually, using a separate transaction
X
B Automatically, using the VSR optimizer
X
C Via drag-and-drop in the transportation cockpit
X
D Via drag-and-drop in a freight unit worklist
3. Is there any limitation related to the number of active and passive vehicle resources in a truck and trailer scenario? Choose the correct answer. X
A Active vehicle resources: Exactly one; Passive vehicle resources: No limit
X
B Active vehicle resources: No limit; Passive vehicle resources: No limit
X
C Active vehicle resources: At least one; Passive vehicle resources: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
X
D Active vehicle resources: Exactly one; Passive vehicle resources: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
79
Unit 4: Learning Assessment
4. Is there any limitation related to the number of active and passive vehicle resources in a rail scenario? Choose the correct answer. X
A Train: At least one; Railcars: No limit
X
B Train: No limit; Railcars: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
X
C Train: Exactly one; Railcars: No limit
X
D Train: At least one; Railcars: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
5. In which transportation modes can you use container units? Choose the correct answers. X
A Rail
X
B Road
X
C Sea
X
D Air
X
E Pipeline
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
80
Unit 4 Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Which of the following are the allowed transportation unit categories? Choose the correct answers. X
A Container
X
B Railcar
X
C Trailer
X
D Vehicle resource
2. How can you create transportation unit documents? Choose the correct answers. X
A Manually, using a separate transaction
X
B Automatically, using the VSR optimizer
X
C Via drag-and-drop in the transportation cockpit
X
D Via drag-and-drop in a freight unit worklist
3. Is there any limitation related to the number of active and passive vehicle resources in a truck and trailer scenario? Choose the correct answer. X
A Active vehicle resources: Exactly one; Passive vehicle resources: No limit
X
B Active vehicle resources: No limit; Passive vehicle resources: No limit
X
C Active vehicle resources: At least one; Passive vehicle resources: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
X
D Active vehicle resources: Exactly one; Passive vehicle resources: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
81
Unit 4: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. Is there any limitation related to the number of active and passive vehicle resources in a rail scenario? Choose the correct answer. X
A Train: At least one; Railcars: No limit
X
B Train: No limit; Railcars: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
X
C Train: Exactly one; Railcars: No limit
X
D Train: At least one; Railcars: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
5. In which transportation modes can you use container units? Choose the correct answers. X
A Rail
X
B Road
X
C Sea
X
D Air
X
E Pipeline
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
82
UNIT 5 Carrier Selection
Lesson 1 Explaining the Carrier Selection Process
84
Lesson 2 Selecting Carriers Based on Costs and Priorities
90
Lesson 3 Using Allocations
97
Lesson 4 Using Business Shares
102
Lesson 5 Improving Carrier Utilization
106
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
Execute carrier selection
●
Define carrier costs
●
Configure carrier selection
●
Consider allocations
●
Perform carrier selection based on business shares
●
Explain continuous moves
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
83
Unit 5 Lesson 1 Explaining the Carrier Selection Process
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will execute carrier selection. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Execute carrier selection
Carrier Selection Process
Figure 38: Document Flow – Subcontracting
Carrier selection is used to determine the right combination of carrier and carrier assignments based on cost, incompatibilities, priority, and business share goals. With carrier selection, you can assign a suitable carrier to freight orders or freight bookings manually or automatically. Carrier Selection can be started from the following:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
84
Lesson: Explaining the Carrier Selection Process
●
Freight order or freight booking UI
●
Transportation Cockpit (FOR/FB List)
●
Running freight optimization report /SCMTMS/BACKGRD_PLN
●
Running carrier selection report /SCMTMS/VSR_OPT_BGD in batch or online mode
Ultimately, the carrier is assigned to the freight order.
Figure 39: Carrier Selection Process Flow
Once a freight order has been built, a shipper will need to choose (and communicate with) the business partner responsible for moving the product. We will refer to this as carrier selection. Carrier selection is used to assign a suitable carrier to your subcontractable business documents (for example, freight orders), either manually or automatically. The aim is to find a carrier with the lowest costs under consideration of the defined constraints. In manual carrier selection, you manually assign the required carrier to your business documents. If you have configured a check against transportation allocations, the system takes this into account and checks transportation capacities (transportation allocations) that you have defined for the individual carriers. If, during the allocation, the system finds relevant transportation allocations without capacity or that certain rules are violated by the allocation, warning messages appear. A separate optimization is available for automatic carrier selection. It takes selected optimization options into account when determining the most cost-effective carrier for all business documents that you have selected. If none of the carriers are available, the system does not assign any carrier to the relevant business documents.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
85
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
Figure 40: Carrier Availability
Based on the carrier availability, the lanes are maintained in SAP Transport Management (SAP TM) specific to means of transport. A carrier can be available for a lane, but may be incompatible for a specific customer who could exist on that lane. Similarly, a carrier can be incompatible with the order characteristics if, for example, an order contains hazardous items but the carrier does not have any experience in handling such items. A carrier may be maintained on a lane, but could have met the allocation requirements for the period and, for this reason, is not considered during carrier selection. The allocation requirements can be specific to a means of transport or zone hierarchy. Carrier availability can also be influenced by the purchasing organization the carrier is associated with in the freight agreement. Thus, the carrier may be available only for a specific purchasing organization within a company. This is based on the purchase organization definition in SAP TM, as defined by the individual client requirement. You can define different carriers on an inbound or outbound lane. Every lane has a validity period, and the lane-level validity applies to the carriers associated with that lane, which is specific to the means of transport. A carrier availability can be turned on and off for a specific lane by updating the validity.
Carrier Selection Strategies Strategy Options During planning in SAP TM, strategies are defined which are optimization options for carrier selection. The system takes these strategies into account during the automatic carrier selection process. You define strategies either in the transportation lane or in carrier selection settings. Initially, the system considers the appropriate transportation lane for each freight order. This allows it to consider different settings in one run. Taking strategies and settings into consideration, the optimizer then creates a carrier ranking list containing the different carrier options. The strategy options supported are as follows:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
86
Lesson: Explaining the Carrier Selection Process
●
Cost and Priority
●
Business Share
●
Transportation Allocation
●
Continuous Move
Figure 41: Carrier Selection Strategies
As well as manually assigning a carrier to a freight order, you can also use automatic carrier selection and influence it by different strategies and settings, as follows: ●
●
●
●
Cost and Priority - the cost from either transportation charge management or planning costs can be used to determine the carrier. The best carrier can be based on the following: -
Cost * Priority
-
Cost + Priority
-
Priority if no cost is to be used
-
Cost only
Business shares – if a fixed percentage of freight business is to be allocated to a certain carrier, then the business shares can be used. Transportation Allocation – if there is either a minimum or a maximum restriction that regulates how much business you are doing with a certain carrier in a certain region for a certain means of transport. Continuous Moves – combine freight documents for subcontracting to achieve lower rates.
Carrier Selection Strategies The following strategies can be used for carrier selection: ●
Cost: All carriers that meet the criteria (based on valid lane, incompatibilities, business share, and allocation) are selected and ranked in ascending order of the total cost calculated based on TCM (freight agreement, calculation sheet, rate table/scale required for the O/D pair, means of transport combination). Internal cost is maintained on the lane
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
87
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
or on the planning profile. Alternatively, the system can also be set up to assign the lowest cost carrier to the FOR based on the settings in the carrier selection profile. ●
●
●
Priority : The business decides the preferred carriers for specific lanes and assigns a priority ranking to each carrier per lane. Based on the lane settings or carrier selection profile settings, the carriers that meet the criteria mentioned are selected and ranked in descending order of their lane priorities. The highest-priority ranking (for example, 1 to 10, with 1 being the highest priority) is picked up as the number 1 carrier in the ranking list. The priority 1 carrier can then be assigned directly to the FOR based on the carrier selection settings. Cost + priority : The carriers are ranked in ascending order of their TCM/lane cost and the priority assigned on the lane. The lowest-cost carrier is selected for automatic assignment. However, for tendering, all the carriers in the ranking list are relevant (peer-to-peer/ broadcast) based on the specific flag maintained at carrier level in the lane. Cost * priority : The carriers are ranked in ascending order of their TCM/lane cost * the priority assigned on the lane. The lowest-cost carrier is selected for automatic assignment. However, for tendering, all the carriers in the ranking list are relevant (peer-to-peer/ broadcast), based on the specific flag maintained at the carrier level in the lane.
Carrier Selection Ranking When using automatic carrier selection, the system will create a carrier ranking list of the relevant carriers for a particular freight order or freight booking. For each relevant carrier, users can see a variety of information that influenced the selection process. This could include the means of transport cost, delivery performance ratings, and others. After automatic carrier selection has been performed, the ranking list will be visible in the freight order.
Figure 42: Carrier Ranking List
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
88
Lesson: Explaining the Carrier Selection Process
Carrier Selection Result
Figure 43: Carrier Selection Result (Ranking List)
Based on the settings maintained earlier, when we perform carrier selection, the system determines the least costly carriers and ranks them from lowest to highest cost, or from lowest to highest priority. This ranking is then considered for tendering. It can, however, be manually switched in the freight order. Additions and deletions are also possible. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Execute carrier selection
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
89
Unit 5 Lesson 2 Selecting Carriers Based on Costs and Priorities
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will define carrier costs and configure carrier selection. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Define carrier costs
●
Configure carrier selection
Prerequisites for Carrier Selection
Figure 44: Influences To Carrier Selection
There are a number of factors that influence carrier selection, including the following: ●
Master data
●
Planning Profile
●
Lane settings
●
Incompatibilities
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
90
Lesson: Selecting Carriers Based on Costs and Priorities
Master data ●
●
●
Define available carriers in the transportation lane Create allocation or business shares data if they are to be used during carrier selection Carriers either CIFed from SAP ERP or created in SAP TM Note: Only CIFed carriers can be used for settlement of cost back to SAP ERP
Planning Profile ●
Selection profile for carrier selection defining how the freight orders will be selected
●
Planning Strategy setting
●
Carrier Selection settings
Lane Settings ●
●
The lane settings identifies if cost will be considered, and if so, the origin of the costs. It can also specify the settings for business shares and allocation. If costs and priority will be used, the priority assigned to carriers can be specified here as well
Incompatibilities ●
You can create incompatibilities such as carrier with product groups or carrier with vehicles, and so on.
Carrier Selection Master Data The following master data is required before performing carrier selection: ●
●
●
Transportation lane has to be set up between two zones or location pairs, specific to a means of transport. The validity period is defined per lane, and carriers are assigned to the lane created. The prerequisite to lane creation is the setup of locations and zones, which can be manually created in SAP TM, or created when the shipping points customers, and vendor are CIFed from SAP ERP to SAP TM. The carrier is CIFed from SAP ERP or can also be locally maintained in TM, depending on the scenario.
Costs and Priorities in Carrier Selection In carrying out carrier selection, the system can put more weight on priorities or costs. In terms of priority, the system can determine the most favorable carrier based on the priorities you have defined. In effect, this means that the system chooses the carrier with the highest priority, while taking into account the various restrictions that may be in place. Alternatively, the system can determine the carrier on the basis of lowest total cost. Costs in this case can refer to internal costs or to charges calculated in charge management (we will look at this option in a separate lesson).
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
91
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
Internal Costs Internal costs draw on transportation costs and carrier costs as defined for your carriers. For example, you may have defined a transportation cost per business document (freight order, for example), or you could have defined a transportation cost per unit of weight or volume. Carrier costs are typically defined per unit of distance (kilometers or miles). You define internal costs in the transportation lane or in the carrier profile. Note: When we speak of internal costs here, we are not speaking of real world costs. Internal costs are used for weighting only, as part of the carrier selection process. Settings - Transportation Lane
Figure 45: Settings - Transportation Lane
To carry out carrier selection based upon cost and priority, you must maintain the appropriate setting on the lane as follows: ●
Strategy must have Relevance to Carrier Selection selected
●
In thePriority/Costsfield, specify the cost or priority setting
●
DefineCost Origin
Note: For distance-based lane rating, if the fixed flag is maintained on the lane, the distance is picked up from the lane. Otherwise, the distance will be recalculated during optimization.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
92
Lesson: Selecting Carriers Based on Costs and Priorities
Settings - Lane / Means of Transport
Figure 46: Settings - Lane / Means of Transport
On the transportation lane, for each carrier you can maintain internal costs in case the cost origin is set to internal cost. If priorities are used as part of the strategy, a priority per carrier can be maintained here as well You have to maintain the tendering type relevance for a specific carrier at transportation line level. Thus if the carrier is relevant to peer-to-peer tendering for the lane SP3100 - > USCUST-01, the peer-to-peer flag must be checked and the required priority maintained in the lane. A similar setup is required for broadcast. To Define Carrier Costs 1. In NWBC, choose the Master Datafolder and then choose Transportation Network → Transportation Lanes→ Define Transportation Lane . 2. UnderTransp. Lane Maintenance , enter transportation lane values in the following fields according to your requirements: ●
Start Location/Zone
●
Dest. Loc./Zone
3. ChooseChange. 4. Note that carriers are assigned to a specific means of transport (MTr), and each carrier can have a different cost per KM or mile.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
93
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
5. Display details for a means of transport by double-clicking the means of transport in the MTr column. 6. Note the carriers assigned to this MTr in the bottom left screen area. 7. Note theUnitcolumn and that carrier costs can be defined per kilometer or mile unit. 8. Define the costs appropriately in the adjacent Carrier Costscolumn. 9. Transportation costs can also be defined, and may use other units such as weight or volume.
Carrier Selection Settings
Figure 47: SAP TM Carrier Selection - Settings / Planning Profile
Carrier selection settings are included in optimization. Although some of the same settings are available in the carrier settings on the transportation lane, these settings override settings maintained directly on the lane. The settings in this profile are based on strategies such as lowest cost, business share, and priority. It considers continuous move options and equipment allocations and can tender automatically based on the tendering strategy. The profile also contains more enhanced settings, such as the ability to automatically perform carrier selection after vehicle scheduling and routing. In the direct shipment options (DSO), carrier selection can be enabled at time of freight unit building by using the carrier selection settings (additional setup is required to enable the DSO functionality). The profile also allows carrier selection in the freight order, which then uses this information for tendering. Critical Carrier Selection Settings ●
Incompatibilities between order and carrier, or customer and carrier, can also be maintained in the carrier selection settings.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
94
Lesson: Selecting Carriers Based on Costs and Priorities
●
●
The system can be set up to use allocations, business share, and strategy for carrier selection and for the determination of cost origin in two different ways: maintained on the lane or maintained in the carrier selection settings. The carrier selection settings have priority over the settings maintained on the lane. You can also define if you want to stop at carrier ranking or continue with tendering. If so, the system will prompt you to maintain the tendering manager and tendering profile. The tendering profile contains the tendering type (peer-to-peer or broadcast).
Other Carrier Selection Settings ●
●
●
●
Maintain incompatibilities and associate these to the carrier selection settings. These incompatibilities could be order versus carrier, or customer versus carrier incompatibility. Transportation charge interpretation tells the system what to do when no charges are found for a carrier. Action after carrier selection alerts the system for the next action, based on the list above. If automatic tendering is selected, you need to maintain the tendering manager and the tender profile. Manual assignments can be considered final, or can be changed based on the settings maintained in the Advanced Settings tab.
To Create Carrier Selection Settings 1. In NWBC, choose the Application Administration folder and then choose Planning→ Planning Profile Settings → Carrier Selection Settings → Create Carrier Selection Settings. 2. Make your settings as required under General Data , Other Settings , andAdvanced Settings. Required fields are marked with a red asterisk. Depending on your requirements, the most important fields are typically as follows: ●
Incompatibility Settings
●
Allocation Usage
●
BS Usage(Business Share)
●
Strategy
●
Carrier Cost Origin
Note: The settings maintained here take precedence over those maintained for a transportation lane. For example, settings in relation to strategy and carrier cost origin can be made for both carrier selection settings and transportation lane settings, but those made here have priority.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
95
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Define carrier costs
●
Configure carrier selection
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
96
Unit 5 Lesson 3 Using Allocations
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will perform carrier selection based on transportation allocations. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Consider allocations
Transportation Allocations Transportation allocations allow companies to assign defined quantities of capacity to certain business partners. This includes set minimum or maximum capacity restrictions that regulate how much business is allowed with a certain carrier in a certain region for a certain means of transport. A separate business object is used to model these allocations.
Figure 48: Transportation Allocation
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
97
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
Transportation Allocations
Figure 49: Transportation Allocations
Often, firm relationships exist with carriers in the form of contracts. These contracts can guarantee that an amount of business is allocated to a carrier, which if not met, results in penalties. SAP TM has the tools to track these relationships or, alternatively, divide up business between different carriers. The following are examples of transport allocations: ●
●
●
A carrier commits to at least 25 shipments or truckloads from Nashville each day. However, for business reasons, the availability changes each day. A carrier normally provides two trucks per day from Dayton, Ohio. For business reasons, the carrier is able to offer, on Tuesday and Friday only, five trucks to the shipper. A carrier can include additional capacity to the existing number of shipments by truck. For example, a carrier could add five additional trucks during the week between Tuesday and Thursday.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
98
Lesson: Using Allocations
Transportation Allocation Characteristics
Figure 50: Transport Allocations In Carrier Selection
Transportation Allocation Characteristics ●
●
Carrier capacity can be defined for any geographical level in arbitrary dimension. When defining the allocation, the trade lane can be specified as follows: Both source location/zone and destination location/zone can be specified
From
Source location/zone only
Within
Using zone hierarchy
To
Destination location/zone only
Inbound
Destination zone is specified
Outbound
Source zone is specified
Extended carrier selection optimizer interface -
-
●
Along
During carrier selection either using optimizer or manual planning, the allocation can be checked During tendering, the allocation can be checked
Carrier capacity and utilization can be extracted to SAP NetWeaver
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
99
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
Extended Scope of Transportation Allocation
Figure 51: Extended Scope of Transportation Allocations
In SAP TM, you can define a connection between allocations and the freight agreement for a specific carrier. Only when a single trade lane has been defined for an agreement item, can an allocation from the item of the single party freight agreement be created. The type of allocation created is defined in the Agreement TypeCustomizing activity. If the carrier or trade lane in the agreement is changed, the user receives a message in an alert box stating that the allocation is no longer relevant. Other Transportation Allocation Features ● Transportation allocation types can be defined in Customizing. ●
●
Transportation allocation supports air freight capacity check and the integration of schedules. Further optional attributes can be specified. Bucket quantities are extended - multiple dimensions for the same bucket can be specified.
●
Handling code support.
●
Transportation mode/user-specific user interface capability.
Trade Lanes
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
100
Lesson: Using Allocations
Figure 52: Trade Lanes
A trade lane is an abstract representation of transport classification. A trade lane instance does not represent a connection between any transportation network nodes (zone/location, and so on), it is a context independent classification of any transportation-related activities. Trade Lanes may build up a hierarchy, that is, more generic trade lanes imply more specific trade lanes (for example: “Within Germany using means of transport Truck” implies “Along from Frankfurt to Hamburg using means of transport Chilled Truck” and “Within Bavaria using means of transport Truck for liquids”). Trade lanes may overlap each other (for example, “From Germany using Airplane” and “Within Europe using Airplane”). Trade lane hierarchies include transportation zone hierarchy (for example: “From Germany“ implies “From Bavaria”, which implies“From Plant_Munich”), means of transport hierarchy (for example: “Within Germany with Mtr Truck” implies “Within Germany with Mtr Chilled_Truck”) and means of transport – mode of transport relations (for example: “Within Germany with Mode of Transport Road” implies “Within Germany with Mtr Chilled_truck”). LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Consider allocations
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
101
Unit 5 Lesson 4 Using Business Shares
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will perform carrier selection based on business shares. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Perform carrier selection based on business shares
Business Shares Selecting Carriers Based on Business Share
Figure 53: Selecting Carriers Based on Business Shares
Objectives of Business Shares ● Assign defined percentages to certain business partners ●
Support negotiation of freight agreements
●
Avoid dependency on a single vendor
●
Consider the capacity of a carrier for a certain relation/route/geography
Like transportation allocations, business shares make use of trade lanes.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
102
Lesson: Using Business Shares
Business Share (Example)
Figure 54: Selecting Carriers Based on BS and Transportation Allocation
When defining the business share context, you create the business share buckets. The percentage of business share a carrier can have for these individual buckets is the actual business share a carrier is allowed to have. There are different types of bucket available during business share creation. They are yearly, quarterly, monthly, weekly, and daily. Example One Carrier A can have a weekly bucket of 75% of the business share on the lane between Hamburg and Frankfurt between the validity periods March 1 2015 to 31 May 2015. In the same context, Carrier B can have a weekly bucket of 25% defined.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
103
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
Figure 55: Business Share Tolerances and Penalty Costs
Tolerances and penalty costs can be defined for business shares. As long as business shares are within the tolerance limits, the cost calculations during carrier ranking are not affected. Tolerances are always defined in percentages (%). If the total business share of the carrier exceeds the defined tolerances, either shortfall or over, a penalty applies. The shortage penalty costs are added to all carriers, other than the one selected. The excess penalty costs are added to the carrier under consideration. Penalties are maintained as numeric values in the business share. This number is multiplied by the deviation percentage to arrive at the penalty cost. It only makes sense to use business shares if you have defined penalty costs. It is recommended to also always define tolerances to give the optimizer a certain amount of leeway. Example Two There is a penalty of 1000 defined in the business share. An excess tolerance of 10% is also defined. During business share calculation, if the excess is 12%, the excess liable for penalty is 2%. This 2 is multiplied by 1000 to arrive at the total excess penalty costs of 2000.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
104
Lesson: Using Business Shares
Note: When calculating the total costs for a carrier, if you are working with TCM costs, there will be a currency assigned to the costs. To assign a currency to business share penalty costs, go to: Carrier Selection Settings -> Advanced Settings -> Common Currency . For example, if you are working with carriers from multiple geographic locations with multiple currencies to arrive at the correct ranking, the system uses the common currency (maintained in the Carrier Selection Settings ) for all its calculations. The currency displayed in the carrier ranking list is always the local currency of the carrier (maintained in the freight agreement). All FORs in the business share context are selected for the business share penalty calculations, though these FORs are not selected during the planning run. For example, assume in a business share context there are two carriers, A and B. There are no tolerances defined. Carrier A is awarded a 60% business share and Carrier B a 40% business share. There are already 10 freight orders awarded, of which Carrier A is assigned six and Carrier B is assigned four. Now let us perform carrier selection for the eleventh FOR. If Carrier B is assigned this FOR, Carrier A will have a shortfall of business share, and the penalty cost for the shortfall will be charged to Carrier B, on top of the usual costs determined during carrier selection. If Carrier A is assigned the eleventh FOR, Carrier B will have a shortfall of business share, and the penalty cost will be charged to carrier A, on top of the usual costs determined during carrier selection. Both options are evaluated by the system and the ranking done accordingly.
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Perform carrier selection based on business shares
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
105
Unit 5 Lesson 5 Improving Carrier Utilization
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will improve carrier utilization with continuous moves. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Explain continuous moves
Continuous Moves Continuous move scenarios can identify opportunities to avoid empty runs or utilize capacity more effectively. As part of automatic carrier selection, the system tries to combine freight orders by forming continuous moves. The aim is to reduce the costs of subcontracting by assigning additional freight orders to the same carrier. If the carrier is providing a special discount for continuous move or round-trip move, the discount percentage can be maintained at carrier level in the lane. Optimizer will pick this additional discount during carrier selection for the continuous move or round-trip lane. The system takes into account continuous moves during automatic carrier selection only.
Figure 56: SAP TM Carrier Selection: Continuous Move - Scenario Overview
As part of the automatic carrier selection, the system tries to combine freight order by forming continuous moves. A continuous move is when the transportation service provider (TSP) agrees to take on a completely new shipment straight after the completion of a freight order. The aim is to reduce the costs of the by assigning additional freight orders to a carrier.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
106
Lesson: Improving Carrier Utilization
Types of Continuous Moves The following types of continuous move are available: ●
Simple continuous move The carrier accepts one or more additional business documents and, after executing the first business document, directly executes the following business documents one after the other.
●
Round trip A round trip is a simple continuous move for which the source location of the first business document and the destination location of the second business document are identical. A round trip can only consist of exactly two business documents, the system cannot take into account complex round trips where multiple source locations (pickup) or destination locations (delivery) are served.
The system can combine two or more business documents in a continuous move if the following conditions are met: ●
●
●
The relevant carrier is available for both business documents. The arrival date/time of the first business document lies in the departure window of the second business document. The departure date/time of the second business document lies in the arrival window of the first business document.
Furthermore, the distance between the destination location of the first business document and the source location of the second business document must not exceed the smaller maximum distance that you have defined for the carrier in the transportation lanes. Cost Calculation for Continuous Moves The system first determines the costs per business document (for example, freight order). Here it considers the strategy and origin of the carrier costs that you defined in the carrier selection settings. The system then determines the discount per business document. When doing so, it takes into account the settings that you have made in the transportation lane for the carrier and the means of transport. The system deducts this discount from the costs determined previously for each business document. If you specified in the carrier selection settings that the system is to perform a recalculation of costs from charge management for continuous moves, the system considers the discounts for continuous moves for the business documents from charge management in the recalculation, however, only for the carriers that offer continuous moves. The system saves the result in the ranking list. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Explain continuous moves
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
107
Unit 5 Learning Assessment
1. Which of the following statements about carrier selection are correct? Choose the correct answers. X
A Carrier selection based on business share means that a fixed percentage of business is allocation to a certain carrier.
X
B Carrier selection based on transportation allocations is maintained on the transportation lane level.
X
C Carrier selection based on transportation allocations means that there is either a minimum or maximum restriction that regulates how much business you do with a certain carrier in a certain region for a certain means of transport.
X
D Available carriers are defined in the transportation lane.
2. Which of the following factors influence carrier selection? Choose the correct answers. X
A Master data
X
B Planning profile
X
C Lane Settings
X
D Freight order type
X
E Incompatibilities
3. Incompatibilities between order and carrier, or customer and carrier, can also be maintained in the carrier selection settings. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
108
Unit 5: Learning Assessment
4. When defining transportation allocations, a trade lane can be specified. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
5. Based on what you have learned about business share in transportation planning, which of the following statements is true? Choose the correct answer. X
A Business share is an in-built mechanism in SAP TM for ensuring all carriers in a region have sufficient business.
X
B Business share buckets provide a means of numerous shippers pooling together to create merged (shared) freight orders.
X
C Business share settings define the percentage of business to be allocated to various carriers. Costs are incurred for non-adherence and the system takes these into account during optimization.
X
D A company may have working formalised relationships with a number of carriers. Business share allocation ensures that all carriers receive the same amouont of business from the comapany.
6. What are the aims of continuous moves? Choose the correct answers. X
A To reduce the costs of the freight order.
X
B To utilize capacity more effectively.
X
C To reduce the costs of subcontracting.
X
D To ensure the lowest-cost carrier is always assigned.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
109
Unit 5 Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Which of the following statements about carrier selection are correct? Choose the correct answers. X
A Carrier selection based on business share means that a fixed percentage of business is allocation to a certain carrier.
X
B Carrier selection based on transportation allocations is maintained on the transportation lane level.
X
C Carrier selection based on transportation allocations means that there is either a minimum or maximum restriction that regulates how much business you do with a certain carrier in a certain region for a certain means of transport.
X
D Available carriers are defined in the transportation lane.
2. Which of the following factors influence carrier selection? Choose the correct answers. X
A Master data
X
B Planning profile
X
C Lane Settings
X
D Freight order type
X
E Incompatibilities
3. Incompatibilities between order and carrier, or customer and carrier, can also be maintained in the carrier selection settings. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
110
Unit 5: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. When defining transportation allocations, a trade lane can be specified. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
5. Based on what you have learned about business share in transportation planning, which of the following statements is true? Choose the correct answer. X
A Business share is an in-built mechanism in SAP TM for ensuring all carriers in a region have sufficient business.
X
B Business share buckets provide a means of numerous shippers pooling together to create merged (shared) freight orders.
X
C Business share settings define the percentage of business to be allocated to various carriers. Costs are incurred for non-adherence and the system takes these into account during optimization.
X
D A company may have working formalised relationships with a number of carriers. Business share allocation ensures that all carriers receive the same amouont of business from the comapany.
6. What are the aims of continuous moves? Choose the correct answers. X
A To reduce the costs of the freight order.
X
B To utilize capacity more effectively.
X
C To reduce the costs of subcontracting.
X
D To ensure the lowest-cost carrier is always assigned.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
111
UNIT 6 Freight Tendering
Lesson 1 Explaining the Tendering Process
113
Lesson 2 Configuring the Tendering Plan
120
Lesson 3 Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
126
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
Explain tendering types
●
Explain the tendering process in SAP TM
●
Tender a freight order
●
Configure the settings to enable order tendering
●
Determine communication methods with carriers
●
Collaborate using the SAP TM collaboration portal
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
112
Unit 6 Lesson 1 Explaining the Tendering Process
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will tender a freight order using different tendering processes. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Explain tendering types
●
Explain the tendering process in SAP TM
●
Tender a freight order
Order Tendering
Figure 57: Subcontracting: Tendering - Context Process Flow
Once carrier selection has taken place, communication with the selected carrier needs to be initiated. This process is referred to as order tendering. Different tendering processes can be deployed depending upon the technology used by the carrier. You use this process to tender (offer) a freight order to one or more potential transportation service providers (TSPs). Tendering is a bidding process, in which you request one or multiple TSPs to submit a quote for a transportation service that is defined in a freight order. You can select the TSP that you want to execute the transportation service by evaluating the quotes. The main characteristics of the tendering process are flexible configuration and the reduction of required manual interaction to support ease of use and lower total cost of ownership (TCO).
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
113
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
Order Tendering Process
Figure 58: Order Tendering Process
The figure Order Tendering Process shows an example of the freight order tendering process.
Tendering Types In general, there are two types of tendering, as follows: Long-term tendering is where contracts are negotiated for a longer period, for example, a year. Long term tendering is a process that is covered in Strategic Freight Management, which we will look at in the Managing Freight Contracts lesson. Short term tendering is where tendering is executed based on specific orders. This is known as order tendering. SAP TM supports the following short term tendering scenarios: ●
Peer-to-Peer Tendering
●
Broadcast Tendering
The strategies for each are determined in tendering profiles in SAP TM. Parties and Roles in the Tendering Process At least two parties are involved in the tendering process - a customer who wants to subcontract a transportation service that is defined in a freight order, and a supplier (subcontractor) or TSP, who potentially carries out the transportation service. There are two roles on the customer side of the tendering process. The first is a transportation dispatcher, who is responsible for the transportation service, that is, the freight order. The second is the tendering manager, who is responsible for configuring and executing the tendering process and acquiring an acceptable quote from a TSP to perform the transportation service. Manual and Automatic Tendering When a transportation dispatcher initiates the tendering process, they have two options: manual process configuration or automatic tendering. If they want to tender only a single freight order, the transportation dispatcher can choose between the two options. If they initiate a tendering process using manual configuration, the tendering manager must configure and start the tendering process manually. If the transportation dispatcher wants to tender more than one freight order, they must initiate automatic tendering and use the automatic tendering configuration in the system.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
114
Lesson: Explaining the Tendering Process
Peer-to-Peer Tendering
Figure 59: Peer to Peer Tendering
Peer-to-peer tendering is a process whereby freight orders are tendered sequentially or “offered” to preselected carriers or transportation service providers (TSPs). Peer-to-peer tendering involves the sequential sending of freight requests for quotation (freight RFQs) to each proposed carrier. The system waits until the carrier sends a freight quotation (FQ) or until the maximum response time has passed. If the TSP does not send a quote within the maximum response time, the peer-to-peer tendering process continues, and the system sends a request for quote to the next TSP. If peer-to-peer tendering ends without an acceptable quote, the tendering process continues with the next tendering process step that you have configured. If the TSP sends a quote before the maximum response time has elapsed, the system evaluates the quote and can either accept or reject it. In the case of rejection, a new RFQ is sent out. The process continues until at least one acceptable FQ has been received. The system awards this a Quotation Acceptable evaluation result and the process ends successfully. There are two types of peer-to-peer tendering: response required and no response required. Broadcast Tendering Broadcast tendering is a tender process whereby freight orders are simultaneously tendered (offered) to preselected TSPs. All TSPs have to respond within a given maximum response time. There are two types of broadcast tendering: best offer and first acceptable offer. Depending on which one of these is being used, either the first acceptable quote wins or, after the maximum response time, the system evaluates all the acceptable quotes and selects the TSP that has submitted the quote with the lowest price. If broadcast tendering ends without an acceptable quote, the tendering process continues with the next tendering process step that you have configured.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
115
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
Figure 60: Broadcast Tendering
Tender Types Available in SAP TM ●
●
●
●
Peer–to– Peer Tendering – Response Required : If a Carrier does not respond in a given amount of time, it is automatically considered a rejection. Peer–to– Peer Tendering – No Response Required : If a Carrier does not respond in a given amount of time, it is automatically considered an acceptance. Broadcast Tendering – Best :Offer Out of all responses within the given timeframe, the best offer (that is, lowest) is accepted. Broadcast Tendering – First Acceptable : The Offer first response is accepted
A typical setup is a two-step tendering process. The first step is enabled for Peer-to-Peer Tendering with a max response time of 30 minutes per carrier. If no response is received from any of the carriers then the second step is started. The second step is broadcast tendering, where all carriers will receive the tender request and the tender will be awarded to the carrier who responds first or offers the best price.
RFQ-Based Tendering Process Available Tendering Processes The following tendering processes are available, based on the settings maintained in the tendering profile: ●
RFQ-based, award manually
●
RFQ-based, award automatically
●
Direct tendering, send freight order directly
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
116
Lesson: Explaining the Tendering Process
Figure 61: Process: RFQ-based Tendering
This process is common in European regions where you send an RFQ to the carrier, and the carrier then quotes their price for the tender in the form of a freight quotation. You either accept or reject the freight quote manually or automatically, based on the parameters set in the tendering profile. Acceptance is then sent to the awarded carrier.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
117
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
Direct Tendering Process
Figure 62: Process: Direct Tendering
You can use a direct tendering process to send a freight order (FO) directly to a specified carrier without creating a freight RFQ. Carriers can confirm or reject the FOs. If a carrier does not respond within a certain period of time, the tender can be considered as accepted automatically. If required, confirmation can be sent as an e-mail to the confirmed carrier. Direct and RFQ tendering are separate tendering processes, but can be combined if required.
Facilitated Discussion: Carrier Tendering Criteria Freight Order Tendering A tendering process starts if you or the system determine more than one possible carrier. This tendering process can use a mixture of different modes of tendering (peer-to-peer or broadcast tendering). You can define a timeout in the system, so that it either tenders the freight order to another carrier or switches from one tendering type to the next. The tendering process results in one carrier being selected to execute the freight order. Carriers can accept or decline these freight RFQs and change data, such as the price, when they return the freight quotations. You can then automatically accept the tendering and send the freight order back to the awarded carrier.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
118
Lesson: Explaining the Tendering Process
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Explain tendering types
●
Explain the tendering process in SAP TM
●
Tender a freight order
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
119
Unit 6 Lesson 2 Configuring the Tendering Plan
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will configure the settings to enable order tendering. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Configure the settings to enable order tendering
Configuration Settings for Tendering
Figure 63: General Settings for Tendering
The standard settings for tendering are defined in the Define General Settings for Tendering Customizing activity. You can also specify the tendering communication and process settings that you can use in the Define Freight Order Types Customizing activity. In Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation Management→ Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Tendering → Define General Settings for Tendering . In the01 - Visibility Settings view, you can select the settings that determine the visibility level of a price limit, submitted price, and stop dates in a tendering process. In the02 - Rejection Reason Codes view, you can define reason code identifiers (IDs) and descriptions to classify the reasons for rejecting freight request for quotations (freight RFQs).
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
120
Lesson: Configuring the Tendering Plan
E-Mail and SMS Content Settings
Figure 64: Tendering Profile: E-Mail and SMS
In the03 - E-mail and SMS Content view, you can define the following settings: Documents for Notifications You can specify the names of the documents that the system uses to create e-mails. You can specify separate documents for the e-mail subject field, the e-mail body text, and SMS text content. You can also specify additional information that the system adds to other e-mail body text or SMS text. The system uses the e-mail or SMS type to determine where it adds the additional text. You must define the documents that you use in this view asGeneral text documents in transaction SE61. Triggering Notifications at Process Events You can specify that the system sends an e-mail or an SMS message to a carrier when an event occurs in the tendering process. Events include sending a freight RFQ to a carrier and awarding a freight quotation (FQ). Bundling Notifications You can schedule the sending of e-mails and SMS messages in a batch report. With this, the contact person for the carrier receives e-mails or SMS messages only when the batch report runs in your system. The e-mails or SMS messages contain information about all the new events that have taken place since the last bundle of e-mails or SMS messages were sent. This means that the carrier does not receive 10 separate e-mails for new freight RFQs, but one e-mail containing the information on all 10 new freight RFQs. Process Settings In the04 - Process Settings view, you can specify the following process settings for tendering:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
121
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
●
Default tendering manager
●
Visibility settings
●
Tendering profile
●
Carrier selection settings
●
Maximum response duration
●
Considering the calling hours of a business partner
You can use the process and communication settings that you define in the Define Freight Order Types Customizing activity to specify the tendering settings for each freight order type. The following are the settings in the freight order type that the system uses to determine the Customizing settings for tendering: ●
Default, where the system uses the system default settings
●
Freight order type, where the system uses the type of freight order
●
Conditions, where the system uses the runtime characteristics of a freight order
Communication Settings In the05 - Communication Settings view, you can specify the following communication settings for tendering: ●
●
●
●
Send alerts to tendering managers whether or not the managers have subscribed to a tendering alert category Use EDI messages to communicate with carriers Send particular types of e-mails to carriers. (Types include e-mails for freight RFQs, FQ cancelations, and FQ awards) Send freight RFQs as e-mails or SMS messages
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
122
Lesson: Configuring the Tendering Plan
Carrier-Specific Communication Settings
Figure 65: Tendering Profile: Carrier Communication and Defaults
In the06 - Carrier -Specific Communication Settings view, you can define communication settings for a particular carrier that are different from the general communication settings defined in the 05 - Communication Settings view. This includes the following settings: ●
●
Send EDI messages to this carrier and not to other carriers Send particular types of e-mails and SMS messages to this carrier and not to other carriers
In the07 - Default Settings view, you must specify one default set of process settings and one default set of communication settings for your tendering processes. The system uses these settings if it cannot determine specific settings based on the freight order type. You can also enable the system to create change documents to record the changes you make to the tendering profiles that you edit.
Tendering Profiles
Figure 66: Tendering Profile Setup
The tendering profile contains basic tendering data and is a prerequisite for automatic tendering. You can use a tendering profile when you manually create a tendering plan. Within the profile, you can define multi-step tendering. This allows a company to mix tendering
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
123
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
types. For example, you can first use peer-to-peer tendering, and if this is unsuccessful you can use broadcast tendering. Tendering Profile Details
Figure 67: Tendering Profile Details
To create a new tendering profile, in SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, on the Application Administration tab, chooseTendering → Tendering Profiles→ Create Tendering Profile. The tendering profile is set up according to business requirements. Parts of the Tendering Profile The following are the main parts of a tendering profile: Tendering step You can specify one or more tendering steps Tendering type The following are the tendering types: ●
Peer-to-Peer Tendering — Response Required
●
Peer-to-Peer Tendering — No Response Required
●
Broadcast Tendering — Best Offer
●
Broadcast Tendering — First Acceptable Offer
Tendering process mode The following are the tendering process modes: ●
Freight RFQ Based, Award Manually
●
Freight RFQ Based, Award Automatically
●
Direct Tendering, Send Freight Order Directly
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
124
Lesson: Configuring the Tendering Plan
Carrier/Carrier Assignment Method The assignment of a carrier is optional in a tendering profile. When you use a profile to create a new tendering plan, the system can retrieve a carrier according to the carrier assignment strategy. The following are the standard carrier assignment strategies: ●
Get Carriers from Ranking List
●
Get Carriers from the Transportation Lane Master Data
●
Get Assigned Carrier from Freight Order
●
Assign Carriers Manually
Relative price limit You can set a relative price limit for each tendering step. Maximum response duration This is the longest period of time within which a carrier must respond Manual evaluation This requires the tendering manager to manually evaluate each freight quotation (FQ). Carrier-specific freight agreement (FA) Visibility settings LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Configure the settings to enable order tendering
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
125
Unit 6 Lesson 3 Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will look at different tendering collaboration scenarios and ways to communicate with carriers. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Determine communication methods with carriers
●
Collaborate using the SAP TM collaboration portal
Tendering Communication Methods As part of the tendering process, it is important to review the communication methods that support the tendering scenarios. For carriers who may not be able to support EDI (electronic data interchange) scenarios, SAP has developed a Web-based collaboration portal to improve communication. This requires subcontractors to log on to SAP TM using the Web in order to process a freight order. On a periodic basis, each subcontractor views their RFQs (modeled as tendering requests) and submits quotations (modeled as tendering responses). Each subcontractor is provided with their own user IDs and passwords, as well as the relevant authorization to restrict visibility to only the loads that have been tendered to them. Additional methods are supported, such as receiving RFQs by e-mail and SMS and submitting quotations by e-mail without the need to access an SAP TM system at all. In this case, an RFQ is sent to a carrier by e-mail or SMS message. The carrier responds to the e-mail using a regular e-mail client on a PC or a mobile device. The e-mail is then converted (using PI) into a quotation. Carriers can accept RFQs directly, reject them with a specified reason, or accept them with changes. Mobile tendering using a smartphone app is also supported and allows a mobile device to receive new RFQs, respond to RFQs, and include changes to dates and prices. Users can check addresses and routes on a map, e-mail or phone the contact person, create a calendar entry for awarded tenders, and check other appointments in the calendar.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
126
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
Figure 68: Tendering Communication Methods
Advanced Communication If a subcontractor is more technically advanced, B2B communication can be used. In this situation, a copy of the freight order is created for the carrier (the tendering manager or system administrator can control what is included in the copy that is visible to the carrier). The copy is persisted in the system to retain what was communicated to the carrier. A freight request for quotation (tendering request) is sent via PI and received as a forwarding quotation in the supplier’s SAP TM system. The carrier can accept the order directly or, if the first carrier rejects the order, the freight order will be sent to the next carrier. Finally, a quotation confirmation is sent back to the customer and is converted into a quotation (tendering response) in the customer’s SAP TM system. The Change Controller allows you to react to changes in the FO, for example, by stopping tendering when there are major changes in the FO.
Tendering via B2B Messages
Figure 69: Connection of RFQ-based Tendering and Forwarding Quotation via B2B Messages
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
127
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
In RFQ-based tendering via business-to-business (B2B) messages, a freight request for quotation (modeled as a “tendering request”) is received by the supplier's TM system as a forwarding quotation. The quotation confirmation is sent back to the customer and is converted into a quotation (“tendering response”) in the customer’s TM system. Direct Tendering via B2B Messages
Figure 70: Connection of Direct Tendering and Forwarding Order via B2B Messages
In direct tendering via B2B messages, the freight order is sent directly to the carrier, where is it received as a forwarding order. The carrier can accept the order directly. If the carrier rejects the order, the freight order will be sent to the next carrier.
Tendering via Email and SMS
Figure 71: Tendering via E-mail and SMS
In the Tendering via E-mail and SMS scenario, an RFQ (modeled as a "tendering request") is sent to a carrier by e-mail or SMS. The carrier responds to the e-mail using a regular e-mail client on a PC or a mobile device and sends it back to the ordering party. The e-mail is then converted into a quotation (modeled as a "tendering response").
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
128
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
You can define communication settings for a particular carrier that are different from the general communication settings.
Mobile Tendering Freight RFQs can easily be integrated with carriers who cannot implement a complex B2B integration. Mobile tendering allows a mobile device to receive new RFQs, respond to RFQs, and include changes to dates and prices. Users can check addresses and routes on the map, e-mail or phone the contact person, create a calendar entry for awarded tenders, and check other appointments in the calendar.
Figure 72: Mobile Tendering
To Tender with a Mobile App 1. Download the SAP Transport Tendering app from the Apple App Store. 2. Open the app and follow the instructions to complete the installation. To run the app on real data, you need to connect to your company's SAP server by entering the server address. 3. Requests are grouped under four headings, as follows: ●
Open
●
Quoted
●
Completed
●
All
4. Choose any of the headings to view details of requests in that category. 5. Use the app as appropriate to accept or reject quotes.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
129
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
SAP TM Collaboration Portal
Figure 73: SAP TM Collaboration Portal
The SAP Transportation Management collaboration portal for carriers (SAP TM Collaboration Portal) supports collaborative business processes. As a carrier working with several shippers that use the SAP TM collaboration portal, you have separate access to each of your shippers. In each case, you can work with one shipper only. The shipper can provide you with access to the following areas in the SAP TM collaboration portal: ●
●
●
In theFreight Order Management area, you can take part in a tendering process started by a shipper. You can view your shipper's freight requests for quotation, and submit freight quotations to the shipper. You can accept, change, or reject the shipper's freight requests for quotation. You can report planned and unexpected events for a freight order as well as enter quantity deviations. In theFreight Settlement area, you can enter differences in logistical item quantities, charge amounts in a freight order, and create a freight settlement dispute case against the shipper. In theFreight Agreement Management area, you can respond to your shipper's freight agreement RFQs with your rates for the transportation services.
Note: In this training course we focus on the tendering functionality. Other Collaboration Portal functionalities are covered in other TM training courses. The following browsers are supported: ●
Windows
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
130
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
●
-
Internet Explorer 9 and upwards, including IE10
-
Firefox 24 (Firefox Extended Support Release - ESR) and latest version
-
Chrome (latest version)
MAC OS X -
Safari 5.1 and upwards
SAP TM Collaboration Portal - Topics Overview
Figure 74: SAP TM Collaboration Portal - Topics Overview
The main benefits of the SAP TM Collaboration Portal are: ●
●
●
●
●
Small and mid-size carriers do not need to have SAP TM installed Full browser based solution means that carrier even does not need to have access to shipper’s network (that is connection via VPN, and so on) All common browsers are supported (Internet Explorer 9, Mozilla Firefox, Safari, Google Chrome) Carrier does not have to install anything, but just log in into the collaboration portal with the access (login and password) provided by the shipper as SAP TM collaboration portal owner/host Carrier can see only request for quotations (RFQ) assigned to it and his transmitted quotations
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
131
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
●
User settings in the portal are stored and available after re-logon to increase the usability of the portal by the carrier
As a carrier, you enter the SAP Transportation Management collaboration portal through the Home screen. This screen displays a worklist with the key performance indicators (KPIs) for the available areas in the form of tiles. From the tiles, you can navigate to the individual areas to continue your work. You can see only the areas that are relevant for you. The following KPIs are available for Freight Order Management: ●
●
●
Open freight RFQs: the number of freight RFQs to which you can respond with a freight quotation Pending freight quotations: the number of freight quotations that you have submitted to the shipper and for which a decision about the award is pending Open freight orders for execution: the number of open freight orders for which you still have to report at least one event
SAP TM Collaboration Portal - Process Overview
Figure 75: SAP TM Collaboration Portal - Process Overview
As a carrier, you can display the freight requests for quotation (RFQs) that you have received from a shipper. You can also display the freight quotations that you submitted to your shipper for a specific freight RFQ. If you do not make any changes you can accept one or more freight RFQs. If you make changes you can accept only one freight RFQ. You can reject one or more freight RFQs and provide a reason for rejection. Furthermore, you can display the details about the tendered freight order, such as item details, location information, and business partner.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
132
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
The business process of tendering in the Freight Order Management area in the SAP Transportation Management collaboration portal corresponds to the tendering process in the standard SAP TM system.
Technical Architecture of the SAP TM Collaboration Portal
Figure 76: Freight Requests for Quotation (RFQs)
On theFreight Requests for Quotation screen, you can view all freight requests for quotation that you have received from a specific shipper. You can display open and closed freight RFQs. From the toolbar, you can apply the quick filter to filter freight RFQs by their status (open, closed, all). In the table view, you can apply a filter to those fields that support the filter function by entering a filter value in accordance with the SAP UI5 standard. You can show or hide individual columns and change their sequence by using drag and drop. You can find freight RFQs using the search field in the toolbar. The system returns all freight RFQs that contain the search term in a field (fuzzy search) irrespective of whether the field is shown or hidden. If a field can be sorted, you can display the contents of the individual columns in ascending or descending order.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
133
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
RFQs Details
Figure 77: RFQs Details
On theFreight Requests for Quotation screen, you have the following options: ●
●
●
●
You can accept one or more freight RFQs at the same time. You can reject one or more freight RFQs at the same time and specify a reason for rejection. You can accept a freight RFQ with changes. You can view the stop sequence and the tendering details (cargo information, locations, and business partners).
●
You can display the source location and destination location of a freight RFQ on a map.
●
You can view the lowest suggested price submitted by another carrier.
●
You can export the content of a freight RFQ from the table view to a Microsoft Excel file.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
134
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
Accept RFQ with Changes
Figure 78: Accept RFQ with Changes
The stop sequence view enables you to see which cargo items were loaded and unloaded at each stop. For each stop in the stop sequence, you can view the expected arrival and departure times, as well as the gross weight and volume of the truck once the loading or unloading operation has been completed at a specific location. You can also view the weight, volume, quantity, and dimensions for each separate cargo item, and see whether the item is classified as dangerous goods. You can also see whether each cargo item is to be loaded or unloaded at the specific location. On the Freight Requests for Quotation screen, the table view and detail view show the calculated gross weight and volume for the entire freight order. You can view the calculated quantity in the table view only. When your shipper sends a freight request for quotation (RFQ), you can accept it without making any changes, accept it with changes, or reject it. Accepting Freight RFQ Without Changes If you are in agreement with the freight RFQ, you can accept it without making any changes. Accepting Freight RFQ with Changes Depending on the tendering settings, you can use the following functions: ●
If you want to accept a freight RFQ with changes, you can change the price and dates. You can suggest your own price in relation to the price limit of the shipper. You can change
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
135
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
both the amount and the currency. Your suggested price appears on the freight quotation as the submitted price. ●
You can overwrite dates (start and end date) requested by the shipper. These appear on the freight quotation as the submitted dates. Acceptable dates are fixed limits defined by the shipper and are used to delimit the requested dates. You cannot change the acceptable dates.
Rejecting a Freight RFQ ●
●
If you reject a freight RFQ, you can specify a rejection reason. If you reject several freight RFQs at the same time, each one is assigned the same rejection reason.
Freight Quotations
Figure 79: Freight Quotations
You can display all of the freight quotations that you have sent to a shipper. If you want to display information about a specific freight quotation in the detail view, you must select a single row. If you have accepted a freight RFQ with changes, your suggested price is shown on the freight quotation as the submitted price. On the Freight Request for Quotation screen, the system always displays the information from the freight RFQ most recently submitted. You can display the source location and destination location of a freight quotation on a map. You can view the lowest suggested price submitted by another carrier. You can export the content of a freight quotation from the table view to a Microsoft Excel file.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
136
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
Facilitated Discussion: SAP TM Collaboration Criteria List the ways your organization can use the different collaboration methods during tendering. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Determine communication methods with carriers
●
Collaborate using the SAP TM collaboration portal
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
137
Unit 6 Learning Assessment
1. Broadcast tendering refers to a process whereby all quotations received (in response to an RFQ) are broadcast to all carriers in an effort to improve transparency. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
2. During the tendering process, a shipper sends a freight order directly to a specific carrier without creating a freight RFQ. What tendering process is the shipper using? Choose the correct answer. X
A Direct tendering
X
B Broadcast tendering
X
C Best offer tendering
X
D First response tendering
3. Which of the following statements about freight order tendering are correct? Choose the correct answers. X
A During the tendering process, only one tendering mode can be used.
X
B During the tendering process, carriers can update prices when the return freight quotations.
X
C The tendering process results in one carrier being selected to execute the freight order.
X
D The tendering process starts if you or the system determine more than one possible carrier.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
138
Unit 6: Learning Assessment
4. In the standard settings for tendering, which settings control the information from a freight RFQ that can be seen and edited by a carrier? Choose the correct answer. X
A Visibility Settings
X
B Carrier -Specific Communication Settings
X
C E-mail and SMS Content Setting
X
D E-mail and SMS Content Setting
5. When does the system use the settings defined in Default the Settings view? Choose the correct answer. X
A When the system cannot determine a freight order type specific settings.
X
B When the system is performing automatic tendering.
X
C When carrier does not have its own SAP TM system.
X
D When the system receives a freight RFQ rejection from a carrier.
6. A carrier does not have an SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) system. What tendering scenario can be used between the carrier and the shipper? Choose the correct answer. X
A Tendering via E-mail
X
B Tendering via SMS
X
C Tendering via B2B messages
X
D Tendering via Collaboration Portal
7. To use the Collaboration Portal, a carrier must have SAP TM installed. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
139
Unit 6 Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Broadcast tendering refers to a process whereby all quotations received (in response to an RFQ) are broadcast to all carriers in an effort to improve transparency. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
2. During the tendering process, a shipper sends a freight order directly to a specific carrier without creating a freight RFQ. What tendering process is the shipper using? Choose the correct answer. X
A Direct tendering
X
B Broadcast tendering
X
C Best offer tendering
X
D First response tendering
3. Which of the following statements about freight order tendering are correct? Choose the correct answers. X
A During the tendering process, only one tendering mode can be used.
X
B During the tendering process, carriers can update prices when the return freight quotations.
X
C The tendering process results in one carrier being selected to execute the freight order.
X
D The tendering process starts if you or the system determine more than one possible carrier.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
140
Unit 6: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. In the standard settings for tendering, which settings control the information from a freight RFQ that can be seen and edited by a carrier? Choose the correct answer. X
A Visibility Settings
X
B Carrier -Specific Communication Settings
X
C E-mail and SMS Content Setting
X
D E-mail and SMS Content Setting
5. When does the system use the settings defined in Default the Settings view? Choose the correct answer. X
A When the system cannot determine a freight order type specific settings.
X
B When the system is performing automatic tendering.
X
C When carrier does not have its own SAP TM system.
X
D When the system receives a freight RFQ rejection from a carrier.
6. A carrier does not have an SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) system. What tendering scenario can be used between the carrier and the shipper? Choose the correct answer. X
A Tendering via E-mail
X
B Tendering via SMS
X
C Tendering via B2B messages
X
D Tendering via Collaboration Portal
7. To use the Collaboration Portal, a carrier must have SAP TM installed. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
141
UNIT 7 Freight Orders in Transportation Management
Lesson 1 Creating Freight Orders
143
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
List the methods of creating freight orders in SAP TM
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
142
Unit 7 Lesson 1 Creating Freight Orders
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn the different methods of creating freight orders in SAP TM. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
List the methods of creating freight orders in SAP TM
Role of Freight Orders in Transportation
Figure 80: SAP TM Document Flow
Depending on the scenario in which SAP TM is used, different types of transportation requests can be created in SAP TM to start the transportation process. These requests can include forwarding orders (FWO), order-based transportation requirements (OTR), and delivery-based transportation requirements (DTR). Upon receiving the requests, freight units are created to become the basic element for planning the movement through the network. The freight unit is a logical transport unit used
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
143
Unit 7: Freight Orders in Transportation Management
in planning. This transportation unit can be a pallet or container, but it can also be two pallets that need to be transported together, for example, for customs reasons. Freight orders record the manual or system-generated transportation planning (intermodal) activities. These freight orders are the result of planning and the consolidation of freight units on a vehicle-booked capacity or scheduled means of transport. Once freight orders are created, the carrier's short-term tendering works with additional business documents, Requests for Quotation (RFQs). Once this has been completed, transport order execution can be triggered and follow-on settlement processing can begin. Freight Orders and Freight Bookings are both the result of transportation planning and the freight document for execution. Different follow-up processes can be triggered based on Freight Orders, including subcontracting (carrier selection, tendering), charge calculation, ERP delivery and shipment creation, and tracking and tracing. Freight Orders and Freight Bookings
Figure 81: Freight Orders / Freight Bookings
Freight orders/bookings contain the following: ●
Planning information, for example, planned means of transport and stages, routing, planned pickup and delivery dates, durations and distances
●
Document dependencies, as well as predecessor and successor documents
●
Transportation charges and cost distribution
●
●
Cargo information: quantities and weights, goods information; corresponding freight orders; pick-up and delivery freight orders Execution information
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
144
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders
●
Business partner information
●
Output management
●
Customs-relevant information
●
Status information and blocking information
●
Subcontracting
Integration of Freight Orders / Booking to other Applications or Components
Figure 82: Integration of Freight Orders / Booking to other Applications or Components
In a freight order, execution is planned by a carrier or the shipper. The freight order contains the following: ●
The plan for the logistical processing, for example, when and onto which vehicle freight units are to be loaded
●
Planned departure times for the vehicles
●
Execution data, and so on
Above all, freight orders are used for land transportation. You can perform carrier selection for freight orders. You can then either subcontract freight orders directly to a carrier, or you can first perform tendering. Change controllers can be used to define how the system reacts to changes. On the other hand, in freight booking the execution is planned by a carrier, such as a ship owner. The freight booking contains the plan for the logistical processing, such as the fixed departure times of the ship. A freight booking is used to reserve freight space on a ship or in an airplane or can be created during transportation planning. The freight booking is also the document for the actual execution.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
145
Unit 7: Freight Orders in Transportation Management
Freight Order Creation Methods
Figure 83: Creating Freight Orders
You have the following four options of creating freight orders (FOs): 1. Manual Creation 2. Creation from Transportation Planning 3. Direct Creation from a Business Document in Forwarding Order Management (FWM) 4. Creation by Copying Manual Creation Manual creation is generally used when you already know the most important transportation data, such as source location, destination location, and business partner, because you regularly transport goods for a certain customer using a certain carrier. To manually create a freight order, you require the following information: general data for the freight order (shipper, consignee, carrier, resource, locations, dates and times, schedules, and terms of payment), information about any additional intermediate stops, the items involved (add freight units to the freight order or enter the items directly on the freight order), and information about the charges involved (as calculated, or configure the system to calculate charges). Once the required information has been entered, you can check the consistency and save the freight order. The freight order can then be sent over to the carrier and confirmed or rejected on behalf of the carrier. Necessary documents can be printed, and a freight settlement document created after the execution.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
146
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders
A possible variant of this process is that you simply enter the general data. You then call the transportation cockpit and assign freight units to your freight order. You then perform all additional planning steps in the transportation cockpit: for example, you can have the system calculate the transportation charges and you perform carrier selection or tendering. Creation from Transportation Planning Many companies responsible for shipping large volumes of products can use the optimizer planning in SAP TM. This gives planners a high-level perspective of their transportation demands. In planning, freight orders are created based on business documents, such as forwarding orders. To do this, freight units are first created from the inbound business documents. Capacities are then assigned to these freight units. Various constraints are taken into account, such as requested delivery dates. Freight orders are the result of the planning. You can perform planning either manually or automatically. Vehicle Scheduling and Routing (VSR) optimization is used to generate optimized freight orders. This generation is based, on the one hand, on minimization of the defined costs (for example, vehicle costs and distance-dependent vehicle costs). It also considers the selected constraints (for example, windows for delivery and incompatibilities). VSR optimization can be scheduled in the background. The optimizer evaluates all options for consolidation and all possible ways through the transportation network to obtain an optimal plan based on the cost settings made in the Planning Cost Settings area of the planning profile. Direct Creation from a Business Document in Forwarding Order Management (FWM) Freight orders can also be created directly from a business document in forwarding order management (FWM business documents). It is possible to create a freight order directly for a forwarding order stage from within the forwarding order screen. The system creates a freight order directly when you save an FWM business document (forwarding order, order-based or delivery-based transportation requirement) if the following requirements have been met: ●
●
●
The FWM business document is subcontracted and not consolidated with other FWM business documents. The FWM business document can be delivered onefreight in order, meaning there is no pre-carriage or on-carriage. The FWM business document only has one source location and one destination location.
The various options by which freight orders can be created directly are the following: ●
FWM business document type determines the freight order creation.
●
FWM business document stage type determines the freight order creation.
●
FWM business document attributes determine the freight order creation.
Creation by Copying You can create a freight order by copying an existing one (a reference document). The system copies the header data and the logistical data. However, it does not copy references to freight units and execution information.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
147
Unit 7: Freight Orders in Transportation Management
Other Creation Methods There are also other methods for freight order creation, such as creation via Web Service, creation from ERP shipment, bill of lading creation, creation of pick-up and delivery freight order from booking, and creation from a customer pick-up or self-delivery stage. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
List the methods of creating freight orders in SAP TM
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
148
Unit 7 Learning Assessment
1. Which method of freight order creation is best suited for companies who are shipping large volumes of products? Choose the correct answer. X
A Manual Creation
X
B Creation from Transportation Planning
X
C Direct Creation from a Business Document in Forwarding Order Management (FWM)
X
D Creation by Copying
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
149
Unit 7 Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Which method of freight order creation is best suited for companies who are shipping large volumes of products? Choose the correct answer. X
A Manual Creation
X
B Creation from Transportation Planning
X
C Direct Creation from a Business Document in Forwarding Order Management (FWM)
X
D Creation by Copying
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
150
UNIT 8 Freight Order Setup
Lesson 1 Configuring Freight Order Types
152
Lesson 2 Configuring Freight Order Type Determination
158
Lesson 3 Determining Business Partners
160
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
Use freight order types
●
Determine organizational units in freight orders automatically
●
Create freight order types
●
Set up freight order type determination based on the appropriate usage
●
Identify the business partner roles assigned to freight orders
●
Determine business partners in freight orders
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
151
Unit 8 Lesson 1 Configuring Freight Order Types
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn how create, configure and use freight order types. You also learn how to determine organizational units in freight orders automatically. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Use freight order types
●
Determine organizational units in freight orders automatically
●
Create freight order types
Freight Order Types
Figure 84: Freight Order Types
A freight order type defines parameters that influence how the system processes the freight order. When manually creating a freight order, the user has to select a freight order type. Freight Order Type Settings Here are some of the settings that can be configured in the freight order type:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
152
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Types
Basic Settings ●
Enabling charges and settlement
●
Determining shipper and consignee
●
Specifying if a freight order can be subcontracted
●
Defining whether a freight order is to be deleted or only canceled
●
Specifying if the freight order is to be used for customer self-delivery or pickup
Execution Settings ●
●
●
Define whether the system is to perform the execution steps within SAP Transportation Management. Specify additional conditions that need to be fulfilled so that the Ready status for Executioncan be set. Define the settings for integration with SAP Event Management.
Tendering Settings ●
You can define process and communication settings or define a condition to determine these settings.
Organizational Unit Determination ●
You can define how the system determines the purchasing organization and the execution organization.
Change Controller Settings ●
You can define settings for the change controller, for example, a default change strategy and a condition for change strategy determination.
Service Level Determination ●
If you have not defined a condition or you have defined one and the system cannot determine a result, the system uses the default service level.
Default Means of Transport Determination ●
If you have not defined a condition or you have defined one and the system cannot determine a result, the system uses the default means of transport.
Output Settings ●
You can define an output profile and a text schema, for example.
Additional Settings ●
Dangerous goods profile
●
Default FSD Type, internal settlement document type
●
Carrier selection settings
●
Enable compliance checks
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
153
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
●
Partner determination profile
●
Number range for house bill of ladings
In the freight order type, you can specify if a freight order is to be used for customer selfdelivery or pick-up. Freight Order Type Customizing The freight order type determines how a freight order is processed in SAP TM. There are some basic settings allowing for flexible customization options.
Figure 85: Freight Order Type Customizing
Freight Order Type
Figure 86: Freight Order Type
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
154
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Types
The figure, Freight Order Type, shows a system view of some of the options related to customizing freight order types. Usage of Different Types of Freight Orders and Freight Bookings
Figure 87: Freight Order/Booking Types in the Document Flow
The figure gives an overview of how different types of freight orders and freight bookings can be used in a transportation scenario and the document flow. The freight orders for pick-up and delivery represent the freight documents for the initial or final phase of the main carriage respectively. Such transfer orders can be created out of the freight booking document. To Use Freight Order Types 1. In SAP TM, In theNetWeaver Business Client , chooseFreightOrderManagement. 2. ChooseRoad → Overview Freight Orders. 3. In theActive Queries area, choose the All query. 4. In theDocument Typecolumn, note the freight order type. 5. In theDocumentcolumn, click the hyperlink to open a freight order. 6. Open theGeneral Data tab. 7. In theDocument Typefield, note the freight order type. 8. Close the freight order document.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
155
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
Freight Order Organizational Unit Determination
Figure 88: Determination of Organizations in Freight Documents
It is possible to configure the automatic determination of the purchasing/execution organizations in the freight documents. Automatic determination can be customized in the freight order or freight booking document types in the following ways: with a default organization assignment, based on the user assignment, and by specifying an organization determination condition /SCMTMS/ of type TOR_ORGUNIT.
Organizational Unit Conditions for Freight Orders The system first checks the Conditionfield. If you have not entered a condition, or if the condition does not return a result, the system checks whether Consider the Organization Unit of Usercheckbox is selected, and whether the user is assigned to a purchasing organization and an execution organization. If the checkbox is not selected or the user is not assigned to a purchasing organization and an execution organization, the system uses the data maintained in theDefault Org Unit area. To View Organizational Units in the Freight Order 1. In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Freight Order Management . 2. ChooseRoad → Edit Road Freight Order . 3. In theFreight Orderfield, enter the freight order number and choose Continue. 4. Open theGeneral Data tab. 5. Scroll to theOrganizational Data section. 6. In thePurchasing Organization field, the purchasing organization is specified. 7. In thePurchasing Groupfield, the purchasing group is specified. 8. In thePlanning and Execution Organization field, the planning and execution organization is specified. 9. In thePlanning and Execution Group field, the planning and execution group is specified.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
156
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Types
10.Close the freight order document.
Freight Order Type Creation The freight order type, freight booking type, freight unit type, transportation unit type, and service order type need to be unique across these five business document categories. For example, you cannot create a freight unit type 0003 and a freight order type 0003. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Use freight order types
●
Determine organizational units in freight orders automatically
●
Create freight order types
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
157
Unit 8 Lesson 2 Configuring Freight Order Type Determination
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn how to set up and configure freight order type determination based on the appropriate usage. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Set up freight order type determination based on the appropriate usage
Freight Order Type Determination
Figure 89: Freight Order Type Determination
It is possible to assign a freight order type to the following: ●
Forwarding order stage types
●
Freight unit types (direct shipment options)
●
Freight unit building rules (short-cut planning)
●
Freight booking types (to create pickup and delivery transfer orders)
●
Planning profiles
Freight Order Determination The system determines freight order types in one of the following ways: ●
●
If freight orders are created during planning and the freight order type is configured in the Business Document Type area of the planning profile, then the system determines the freight order type according to your settings. If freight orders are created from forwarding order stages, the system determines the freight order type based on the Customizing activity Define Default Freight Document Types for Stages .
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
158
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Type Determination
●
●
If freight units are converted into freight orders when direct shipment options (DSO) are determined, the system uses the freight order type that you specified for DSO in the freight unit type. If the system cannot identify the freight order type, then it uses the default freight order type that is defined in the Customizing activity.
Business Rule Framework (BRF) and Conditions
Figure 90: FO Type Determination Based on BRF and Conditions
The business rule framework (BRF) and conditions can be used for determining freight order types, based on various business rules or needs. For determining freight order types based on BRF and conditions, set up the freight order type Determination Condition /SCMTMS/TOR_TYPE. This condition can be assigned to the freight unit type (for direct shipment options) or the planning profile. During the creation of the freight order, the system evaluates the BRF and condition, and then identifies the freight order type based on the available data. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Set up freight order type determination based on the appropriate usage
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
159
Unit 8 Lesson 3 Determining Business Partners
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn how to identify the business partner roles assigned to freight orders. You will also learn how to determine business partners in freight orders. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Identify the business partner roles assigned to freight orders
●
Determine business partners in freight orders
Freight Order Business Partners
Figure 91: Freight Orders Default Business Partners
By default, there are a number of party roles specified in a freight order, such as a carrier, executing carrier, shipper, consignee, and communication party. In addition, other party roles can be either manually added or automatically determined by the system.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
160
Lesson: Determining Business Partners
Business Partner Roles Assignment
Figure 92: Business Partners In Freight Orders
It is possible to maintain different party roles within the freight order business document. From a business perspective, there are a number of relevant and required party roles, such as a carrier, shipper, or consignee. Carrier Information Maintenance Carrier information can be maintained in the following ways: ●
Entered manually
●
Determined based on the carrier selection process
●
Determined based on the tendering process
●
Copied over into the freight document when selecting a schedule
●
Determined fromPartner Determination functionality
The shipper and consignee information is primarily required when a house bill of lading is generated for the business document. A house bill of lading serves as a receipt to the shipper for the goods that are being shipped. Shipper and Consignee Maintenance Shipper and consignee information can be maintained in the following ways: ●
●
●
Entered manually Determined from the predecessor business document (related forwarding order, OTR or DTR) Determined using the Partner Determination functionality
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
161
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
Business Partner Determination
Figure 93: Business Partner Determination
Based on various factors, the business partners relevant for a business process can vary. Factors affecting the business partners and the partner roles can be, for example, shipment type, traffic direction, mode of transportation, and so on. In addition, sometimes certain control mechanisms need to be in place, which influence how and when it is possible to modify business partners. For this purpose, partner determination procedures can be used. Partner determination procedures are sets of rules for how the system works with business partners during a business process. It brings together partner functions, and also includes additional information on the behavior of the business partners. Automatic determination of the relevant business partners results in a more efficient system and also reduces the chance of manual errors. Configuring a Partner Determination Procedure It is possible to define a partner determination procedure and assign it to different document categories at a document-type level. Then, when you create documents of that type, the system works with the partners involved according to the rules specified in the procedure. Therefore, the system can automatically handle partners for an internet sales transaction differently than it handles a business activity, for example, without end users concerning themselves with these differences. The settings in the procedure apply both to partners determined automatically and those entered manually. The steps involved in configuring a partner determination procedure are the following: 1. Set up the relevant and required party roles in the system. 2. Define partner determination profiles and assign required settings to the party role (for example mandatory, or optional) and specify the logic for determining the party role value (for example, reference another party role, determined from BAdI). 3. Assign the partner determination profile in the freight order/freight booking document type in Customizing.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
162
Lesson: Determining Business Partners
The partner determination profile influences the following: ●
The party roles available in a business document.
●
The level of control the user has in entering the party role.
●
●
Depending on the settings you define in Customizing, whether you change or delete a party role, or add one from a list of available party roles. You can also specify settings that prevent specific party roles from being changed or deleted. How the system determines business partners for the party roles.
Business Partner Determination: Relationships The system uses one of the following relationships, which you specify in Customizing, to determine a business partner: Party role and source party role A party role can be specified as the source party role for a particular party role. In the application, a business partner is entered in the field that is specified as the source party role, and the system automatically copies the business partner to the associated party role. For example, in Customizing, you specify the party role as Invoicing Party, the source type as Party Role, and the source role as Carrier. In the application when the carrier is maintained as ABC, the system assigns ABC as the business partner for the invoicing party. Party role and the source party role in business partner master data (relationship) The system uses the relationship between organizations and business partners in the Customer Partner Determination and Vendor Partner Determination tabs in theBP (Maintain Business Partner) transaction to determine a business partner in a business document. For example, take a logistics service provider (LSP), which has a business with a business partner APP_1. In the BP (Maintain Business Partner) transaction of APP_1 with partner functionSold-to Party, maintain on the Customer Partner Determination tab of the BP transaction for APP_1, and create a relationship between sales organization 561234 and the business partner APP_INV (APP_INV fulfills the role of invoicing party for APP_1). In the profile Customizing, specify the party role Invoicing as Party , the source type as BP Relationship, and the source role as Ordering Party. In a forwarding order, you specify the organization as 561234 General on the Data tab and the ordering party as APP_1 on Business the Partnertab. The system checks the business partner master data for APP_1. OnCustomer the Partner Determination tab, it finds that APP_1 uses APP_INV as the invoicing party for organization 561234. It assigns APP_INV as the business partner for the invoicing party. BAdI There is also an option to determine business partners based on BAdIs. If business partners are determined based on special business rules or conditions, then the BAdI can be implemented and pointed to the relevant party role. To Configure Business Partner Determination Note that, in this procedure, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the number assigned to you by your instructor
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
163
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
1. To view the standard party roles available in the SAP TM. a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Master Data → Business Partners→ Define Party Roles . b) Go back. 2. To configure the business partner determination profile. a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Master Data → Business Partners→ Define Partner Determination Profiles . b) On theChange View "Define Partner Determination Profile": Overview screen, choose New Entries . c) In thePart. Det. Prof.column, enterPP##. d) In theDescriptioncolumn, enterGRP## - Partner Determination Profile. e) Press Enter. f) Select the new entry. g) In theDialog Structure , double-clickAssign Party Roles . h) ChooseNew Entries . i) Enter the following data: Party RoleParty RoleSequence Edit LevelSrce Type Srce Role Not Mod. Desc. 1
Ordering 1 Party
Mandato- Party ry Role
--
Selected
6
Shipper
2
Mandato- Party ry Role
--
Selected
5
Consign- 3 ee
Optional Party Role
--
Selected
12
Carrier
4
Mandato- Party ry Role
--
Selected
10
Bill-to Party
5
Choose from List
6
--
203
Notify Party
6
Optional Party Role
12
--
TM001
Additional Notify Party
7
Optional Party Role
5
–
Party Role
j) Save and exit the function. 3. To assign the business partner profile to a freight order type.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
164
Lesson: Determining Business Partners
a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Freight Order Management→ Define Freight Order Types . b) Select and open freight order type T0##. c) In theAdditional Settings section, in the Partner Determination Profile field select GRP## - Partner Determination Profile. d) Save and exit the function. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Identify the business partner roles assigned to freight orders
●
Determine business partners in freight orders
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
165
Unit 8 Learning Assessment
1. A freight order type defines the parameters that influence how the system processes a freight order. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
2. When automatically determining organizational units in freight orders, which of the following does the system check first? Choose the correct answer. X
A Whether the user is assigned to a purchasing organization
X
B Whether theConsider Organization Unit of User checkbox is selected
X
C Whether there is a condition in the Conditionfield
X
D Whether the user is assigned to an execution organization
3. Which of the following statements about organizational units are correct? Choose the correct answers. X
A Organizational units are used to represent the organizational structure of a company.
X
B Organizational units are used to allocate revenue and costs to different groups within a company.
X
C Organizational units in SAP TM are determined by organizational units in SAP ERP.
X
D Organizational units can be determined automatically based on predefined conditions.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
166
Unit 8: Learning Assessment
4. If the system is unable to determine a freight order type, the default freight order type specified in the customizing activity is chosen. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
5. Which of the following party roles are specified by default in a freight order? Choose the correct answers. X
A Carrier
X
B Shipper
X
C Consignee
X
D Communication party
X
E Purchasing organization
6. The partner determination profile influences how the system determines business partners for party roles. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
167
Unit 8 Learning Assessment - Answers
1. A freight order type defines the parameters that influence how the system processes a freight order. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
That is correct. A freight order type defines the parameters that influence how the system processes a freight order. 2. When automatically determining organizational units in freight orders, which of the following does the system check first? Choose the correct answer. X
A Whether the user is assigned to a purchasing organization
X
B Whether theConsider Organization Unit of User checkbox is selected
X
C Whether there is a condition in the Conditionfield
X
D Whether the user is assigned to an execution organization
3. Which of the following statements about organizational units are correct? Choose the correct answers. X
A Organizational units are used to represent the organizational structure of a company.
X
B Organizational units are used to allocate revenue and costs to different groups within a company.
X
C Organizational units in SAP TM are determined by organizational units in SAP ERP.
X
D Organizational units can be determined automatically based on predefined conditions.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
168
Unit 8: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. If the system is unable to determine a freight order type, the default freight order type specified in the customizing activity is chosen. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
5. Which of the following party roles are specified by default in a freight order? Choose the correct answers. X
A Carrier
X
B Shipper
X
C Consignee
X
D Communication party
X
E Purchasing organization
6. The partner determination profile influences how the system determines business partners for party roles. Determine whether this statement is true or false. X
True
X
False
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
169
UNIT 9 Freight Order Integration
Lesson 1 Integrating Freight Orders with Shipments
171
Lesson 2 Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
175
Lesson 3 Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
184
Lesson 4 Communicating Freight Orders to Other Companies
197
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
Describe the integration scenarios between freight orders and shipments
●
Explain the business scenarios for freight order-based shipments
●
Configure the settings to enable freight order-based shipments
●
Create shipment-based freight orders
●
Configure settings to enable shipment-based freight orders
●
Explain the business scenarios for business-to-business communication
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
170
Unit 9 Lesson 1 Integrating Freight Orders with Shipments
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn about the integration scenarios between freight orders and shipments. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Describe the integration scenarios between freight orders and shipments
Shipment Integration Scenarios
Figure 94: Freight Order - Shipments Integration
Note: The termsinbound and outbound , in the context of SAP ERP shipment integration, are from the perspective of SAP TM. The shipment integration process is typically used when customers have multiple systems. SAP Enterprise Resource Planning (SAP ERP) performs tasks such as the purchasing of material from external and internal suppliers, the storage of material in plant warehouses, and the shipping of these materials to customers. Transport to and from the warehouse can be managed by a transport module or transport system.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
171
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Transport planning is performed in an external system - SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM). SAP TM can be used to perform certain functions of the transportation process (such as planning, tendering, and charge calculation). However, transportation management as a whole is performed in SAP ERP. Shipment Scenarios There are two possible variations of this business scenario: ●
Shipment integration outbound In this scenario, SAP ERP has deliveries (inbound or outbound), which contain the necessary information for the fulfillment of the orders. The deliveries are transmitted to SAP TM, where they become delivery based transport requests (DTR). Planning is performed in SAP TM resulting in freight orders. These freight orders are then sent back to SAP ERP, where they become SAP ERP shipments so the execution can proceed. In this scenario, the transportation planning is performed in SAP TM and the SAP ERP shipment is used only for execution.
●
Shipment integration inbound In this scenario, sales orders created in SAP ERP result in deliveries that are relevant for transportation. A shipment is created for the deliveries. When the shipment is ready for tendering, indicated by its status, and saved, the shipment is sent to SAP TM and a freight order is created. Tendering is then carried out in SAP TM. The tendering result is sent back to SAP ERP and the shipment is updated with the proper forwarding agent.
Both of these scenarios are used by customers who have already implemented and are using SAP LE-TRA, the transportation component of SAP ERP, and have invested in enhancements development and want to protect these investments. In such cases, they use SAP TM only for specific purposes. The terms inbound and outbound , in the context of SAP ERP shipment integration, are from the perspective of SAP TM. There is a 1:1 relation between the SAP ERP shipment document and the SAP TM freight order.
Hint: It is also possible to use SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) for the purpose of execution. SAP EWM integration is covered in a different enablement.
Enhancements for Shipment Integration
Figure 95: Enhancements for Shipment Integration
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
172
Lesson: Integrating Freight Orders with Shipments
There are many Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) available, which customers can use to the extend the standard functionality of SAP TM to match their business processes. BAdIs for Outbound Integration ● BAdI for TransportationOrderSCMExecutionRequest_Out You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service interfaceTransportationOrderSCMExecutionRequest_Out . ●
BAdI for TransportationOrderSCMExecutionCancellationReq_Out You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service interfaceTransportationOrderSCMExecutionCancellationRequest_Out .
●
BAdI for TransportationOrderSCMExecutionConfirmation_In You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service interfaceTransportationOrderSCMExecutionConfirmation_In .
●
BAdI for TranspOrderSCMExecutionStatusNotification_In You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service interfaceTransportationOrderSCMExecutionStatusNotification_In .
●
BAdI for TranspOrderSCMExecDeliveryAssignmentChngdNotif_In You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service interfaceTransportationOrderSCMExecutionDeliveryAssignmentChangedNotification_In .
●
BAdI for TranspOrderSCMExecutionItmPckgAssgnmtChngdNotif_In You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service interfaceTransportationOrderSCMExecutionItmPckgAssgnmtChangedNotification_In .
BAdIs for Inbound Integration BAdI for TransportationOrderSCMRequest_In
●
You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service interfaceTransportationOrderSCMRequest_In . This BAdI contains the method CHANGE_MODIFICATION. You can use this method to handle new fields within the inbound service interface TransportationOrderSCMRequest_In. For example, if you extend a business object in the sending system, you can use this method to extend the inbound service interface. You can then map the new fields to existing or new fields in the transportation order business object. ●
BAdI for TransportationOrderSCMCancellationRequest_In You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service interfaceTransportationOrderSCMCancellationRequest_In .
●
BAdI for TranspOrderSCMTenderingResultNotification_Out You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service interfaceTransportationOrderSCMTenderingResultNotification_Out .
In Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, you can access the BAdIs by choosing SAP Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Transportation Management → Integration→ Enterprise Services→ ERP Logistics Integration→ ERP Shipment Integration .
Facilitated Discussion: Integration Scenarios
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
173
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Describe the integration scenarios between freight orders and shipments
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
174
Unit 9 Lesson 2 Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn about freight order-based shipment scenario and how to configure the settings to enable freight order-based shipments. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Explain the business scenarios for freight order-based shipments
●
Configure the settings to enable freight order-based shipments
Freight Order-based Shipments Scenarios
Figure 96: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
In this scenario, you carry out transportation planning in SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) for transportation activities that are based on deliveries received from SAP ERP. You can then carry out transportation execution in SAP ERP for the freight orders that were created during transportation planning.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
175
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Note the following: ●
●
SAP TM creates a delivery-based transportation requirement (DTR) for each delivery received from SAP ERP. There is always a one-to-one relationship between an ERP delivery and a DTR. SAP ERP creates an ERP shipment for each freight order received from SAP TM. There is an n-to-one relationship between DTRs and a freight order; and, therefore, between the ERP deliveries that were originally sent to SAP TM and the ERP shipment that SAP ERP creates based on a freight order.
Outbound integration of shipment processing enables you to do the following: ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Transfer freight orders from SAP TM to SAP ERP and create shipments in SAP ERP based on the freight orders. Update a freight-order-based shipment in SAP ERP if the relevant freight order is changed in SAP TM and the changes are transferred to SAP ERP. Delete a freight-order-based shipment in SAP ERP if the relevant freight order is deleted in SAP TM. Send a confirmation from SAP ERP to SAP TM when a shipment is created in SAP ERP based on a freight order in SAP TM. Update the execution status of a freight order in SAP TM based on the overall status of the corresponding shipment in SAP ERP using a status notification. Update a freight order in SAP TM based on a notification about changes to deliveries assigned to a shipment in SAP ERP. Update a freight order in SAP TM based on a notification about changed item and handling unit assignments to container handling units of a shipment in SAP ERP.
When the freight order is updated, the related shipment document is updated automatically.
Note: The outbound integration scenario can also be used when the execution is performed in SAP EWM (instead of SAP ERP). In this case the EWM system needs the packaging material information for planning purposes. The necessary information for creating handling units must be sent from SAP TM to SAP ERP and is essential for scenarios where an EWM system is used to pick/pack/load. Process 1. You send ERP deliveries to SAP TM, and the SAP TM system creates delivery-based transportation requirements (DTRs) for the deliveries. 2. You plan the transportation process in SAP TM based on the DTRs. During planning, you create freight orders. 3. You carry out tendering for the freight orders in SAP TM (optional). 4. You send the freight orders to SAP ERP to carry out transportation execution. 5. SAP ERP creates a shipment for each freight order.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
176
Lesson: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
Figure 97: Freight Order Based Shipment Creation
In a freight order-based shipment, the freight order can be created using SAP TM. The freight order creation can be based upon sales orders sent to SAP TM as Order Transportation requests (OTRs). The delivery may be created via the delivery proposal process in SAP TM. The delivery proposal can be triggered using a batch job or online in the POWL of the Order Transportation Request or in the Transportation Cockpit. When the delivery is created in SAP ERP, the TRDO output is created. The output triggers the Delivery Transportation Request (DTR) to be created in SAP TM. Once the DTR is created in SAP TM, the freight order is automatically enabled for shipment creation.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
177
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Shipment Creation
Figure 98: Shipment Creation
The shipment can be triggered from SAP TM fright order using the following processes: ●
●
Batch job Process Freight Orders (/SCMTMS/TOR_FO_PROC). When you use this report, you can select freight orders using a selection profile or by specifying selection criteria explicitly. In the freight order UI, you can choose to trigger the shipment directly. Note that you do not have to be in Changemode to trigger this process.
Freight Order Shipment Integration
Figure 99: FreightOrderShipmentIntegration_image.pptx
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
178
Lesson: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
When integrating the SAP TM freight order with SAP ERP shipment, configure the following settings: ●
In SAP ERP, determine output condition types for confirmation and status notification
●
Determine partner profile for message type SHPMNT05 with the following message codes: -
-
●
CRE – to create the SAP ERP shipment the first time CNF – to process confirmation message. This message updates the shipment number reference in the TOR Root
-
STA – to process the status change messages from SAP ERP
-
UPD – to update the SAP ERP with the changes from SAP TM
Generate output condition records from SAP ERP for confirmation and status changes
Freight Order-Based Shipment Settings
Figure 100: Outbound Shipment Integration - Settings
Settings and Prerequisites in SAP ERP ●
●
●
Set up an external number range that matches the freight order (FO) number range. Adopt route and determine legs -these settings prevent the system from carrying out additional calculations related to transportation stages when it creates a shipment. Data about stages is taken from the IDoc. Maintain transportation planning point ‘1000’ - SAP TM does not use transportation planning points. Transportation planning point 1000 is, therefore, transferred by default to SAP ERP. If you require other transportation planning points that are stored with the SAP
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
179
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
ERP shipment, implement BAdI BADI_LE_SHIPMENT to determine and save the correct transportation planning point for the shipment. ●
Ensure that the delivery types are relevant for transportation planning
●
Set up shipment types
Note: If you also want to integrate SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM), set up an external number range with the same interval for transportation units (TUs) in SAP EWM. This ensures that, in the context of outbound shipment integration, a freight order in SAP TM has the same number as the corresponding shipment in SAP ERP and transportation unit in SAP EWM. For more information, see the respective scenario configuration guides. Settings and Prerequisites in SAP TM ●
Assign an output profile to the FO types.
●
Choose the correctDocument Creation Relevance field: -
Shipment creation in SAP ERP
-
Shipment creation with HUs for vehicles and containers
-
Shipment creation with HUs for vehicles only
-
Shipment creation with HUs for containers only
●
Each DTR should contain all items from the corresponding delivery.
●
The FO are based on DTRs only.
●
●
●
●
The FO should contain all freight units (FUs) from each related DTR (no subsequent delivery split in SAP ERP). The FO must contain FUs that are derived from either exclusively inbound deliveries or exclusively outbound deliveries. The FO contains FUs that are related to deliveries from the same ERP system. The FO should be In Processand not have one of the following statuses: Blocked for execution,Blocked for planning or Marked for deletion .
Packaging Information If you want the shipments in SAP ERP to contain packaging information in the form of handling units, specify that packaging information is to be sent to SAP ERP along with the other freight order data. Packaging information is required if you want to send the shipments from SAP ERP to SAP EWM to carry out warehouse planning and execution. If you select shipment creation with handling units, configure the required settings for vehicle resources or containers, as follows:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
180
Lesson: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
●
●
To enable SAP ERP to generate a handling unit for a vehicle resource, assign a packaging material in the resource master data. In SAP NWBC, choose Master Data→ Resources → Define Resource . You specify the packaging material on Transporttab. the To enable SAP ERP to generate a handling unit for a container, assign a packaging material to the container's equipment type and group. This can be done in Customizing for transportation management under Master Data→ Resources → Define Equipment Groups and Equipment Types → Equipment Type .
To Configure Settings Freight Order-based Shipments 1. Enable Freight Order types for ERP Shipment Integration Outbound. a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Freight Order Management→ Freight Order→ Define Freight Order Types . b) Select the row for the freight order type and choose(Details). c) Check if theNumber Range Interval is an internal number range. In the field, press F4 and make a note of the From number and the To number. d) In theAdditional Settings section, in the Document Creation Relevance field, enter Shipment Creation in SAP ERP, or Shipment Creation with HUs for Vehicles and Containers or Shipment Creation with HUs for Containers Only or Shipment Creation with HUs for Vehicles Only. e) Save and exit the function. 2. Create shipment type in SAP ERP for ERP Shipment Integration Outbound. a) In SAP ERP, in Customizing for Logistics Execution, choose Logistics Execution → Transportation→ Shipments → Define Number Ranges for Shipments . b) ChooseChange intervals . c) If required, define a new external number range for the freight order using the same number range that was used in the ERP shipment. d) Click Save and exit the function. e) In Customizing, choose Define Shipment Types . f) ChooseNew Entries . g) Create a new shipment type T0##, with the following details: Field
Value
Shipment Type
T0##
Description
GRP## Ship. Int. Outbound
NR int. assgnt
01
No. range ext.
FO
ShpmtComplType
Loaded Outbound Shipment
Shipping Type
01 (Truck)
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
181
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Field
Value
Service Level
Load
Process Control
Individual shipment using one mode of transport
Leg Indicator
Direct Leg
Adopt route
Do not adopt stages
Determine legs
Blank. No legs to be determined
GR-RelevanceInd
Normal
Pick check
Shipment completion only for full picking
Weight unit
LB
Volume unit
CDM
h) Save and exit the function. 3. Maintaining transportation planning points. a) In SAP ERP, in Customizing for Enterprise Structure, choose Definition→ Logistics Execution→ Maintain Transportation Planning Point . b) Create transportation planning point 1000 by copying the existing transportation planning point 0001 to be used for SAP TM integration. SAP TM does not use transportation planning points. Transportation planning point 1000 is, therefore, transferred by default to SAP ERP. If you require other transportation planning points that are stored with the SAP ERP shipment, implement BAdI BADI_LE_SHIPMENT to determine and save the correct transportation planning point for the shipment. c) In SAP ERP, in Customizing for Enterprise Structure, choose Definition→ Logistics Execution→ Maintain Transportation Planning Point for External Systems . An entry for the transportation planning point defined above should exist. 4. Maintain the output control settings. a) Configure output control settings to send shipments from SAP ERP to SAP TM in the context of SAP TM Outbound Shipment Integration. This involves Customizing activities for maintaining field catalogs, condition tables, access sequences, condition types, and schemas. For detailed information, refer to the integration guide Basic Settings and Integration for SAP ERP. 5. Configure inbound and outbound processing. Configure the settings for inbound communication to SAP ERP (inbound IDocs) and outbound communication from SAP ERP (outbound IDocs). For detailed information, refer to the integration guide Basic Settings and Integration for SAP ERP. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Explain the business scenarios for freight order-based shipments
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
182
Lesson: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
●
Configure the settings to enable freight order-based shipments
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
183
Unit 9 Lesson 3 Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn about shipment-based freight order scenarios and how to configure the settings to enable shipment-based freight orders. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Create shipment-based freight orders
●
Configure settings to enable shipment-based freight orders
Shipment-Based Freight Order Scenarios
Figure 101: Inbound Shipment Integration
In the shipment-based freight order scenario, the transportation planning functions are carried out in SAP ERP or a third party logistics system and not in SAP TM. SAP ERP shipments are created as a result of this process. The SAP ERP shipment is then integrated with SAP TM for one or more of the following scenarios:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
184
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
●
To perform tendering functions
●
For freight costing and rating purposes
Note: There is a one-to-one relationship between an SAP ERP shipment and an SAP TM freight order. An SAP TM freight order must be synchronized with an SAP ERP shipment if it is used for freight costing purposes. To carry out the inbound shipment integration, do the following: ●
●
●
The shipment to be integrated to SAP TM must have the output created. The output should be set up to create IDOC of type SHPMNT05. SAP Integration system , SAP PI must be setup to process and map the SHPMNT05 to the appropriate message for SAP TM. Customizing must be established in both SAP ERP and SAP TM.
The interface shown in the figure, is based on services (inbound and outbound) in SAP TM and IDocs in SAP ERP. PIs are connected to an XI system integration process. These services and IDocs are not covered in this training. Inbound Shipment Integration Message Flow
Figure 102: Inbound Shipment Integration Message Flow
The figure, Inbound Shipment Integration Message Flow, shows the message flow between SAP ERP and SAP TM. When a shipment's tendering status New is Offer from the Carrier , the process is triggered. An output generates IDoc SHMPNT05, which is mapped to an SOA message TransportationOrderSCMRequest_In. In SAP TM, during the inbound proxy processing, a freight order is created. You can choose to trigger carrier selection from SAP TM. To do so, specify the means of transport for the freight order and set up the appropriate transportation lane. Once these settings are in place, you can trigger the tendering process if the freight order is set up as
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
185
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Relevant for Subcontracting. The tendering result can be passed to an SAP ERP shipment using the message TransportationOrderSCMTenderingResultNotification_Out, which can be mapped to SHPMNT.SHPMNT05. If you have found and accepted a carrier, the enterprise service sends the following data: ●
Carrier
●
Price
●
Confirmed dates and times
●
Tendering status
If you have not found a carrier, the enterprise service sends the corresponding tendering status. If the SAP ERP shipment document already contains a carrier, the carrier information is sent to SAP TM. Ensure that the carrier partner is CIFed from SAP ERP to SAP TM. Once SAP TM receives the shipment, a freight order is created and the tendering process can be carried out. During tendering, the carrier can submit a quotation to SAP TM. The price in this quotation can be passed back to SAP ERP and stored in the shipment document. Freight Costing and Cost Distribution
Figure 103: Freight Costing and Cost Distribution
To integrate SAP ERP shipments into SAP TM for freight costing and cost distribution purposes, create the necessary transportation charge management (TCM) master data, such as agreements and rate tables; and configure the system for cost distribution and settlement functions. To Create Shipment-Based Freight Orders 1. In SAP ERP, create a sales order using the data in the table.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
186
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
Table 6: Sale Order Data Field
Value
Order Type
ZT00
Sales Organization
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Sold-to-Party
CUST00-25
PO Number
TM310-GRP00-3.3
Product
PRODTM-00
Quantity
20
UoM
BOX
a) In SAP ERP, in theCommandfield, enter transaction code VA01 and press Enter. b) Enter the data provided in the table. Field
Value
Order Type
ZT00
Sales Organization
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
c) Press Enter. d) In theCreate TM100 Standard Order: Overview screen, enter the following data: (All other fields must be left with default values.) Field
Value
Sold-to Party
CUST00-25
PO Number
TM310-GRP00-3.3
e) On theAll Itemssection, enter the following data: Product
Quantity
UoM
PRODTM-00
20
BOX
f) Take note of the delivery date. g) ChooseSave. h) Record the sales order number. 2. Create deliveries for the sales order.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
187
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
a) In SAP ERP, on the SAP Easy Access screen, in Command the field, enter transaction code VL01N and press Enter. b) In theCreate Outbound Delivery with Order Reference screen, in theShipping Point field, enter3100. c) In theOrderfield, enter the sales order number. d) In theSelection Date field, enter the delivery date of the sales order and press Enter. e) Click Save. f) Record the deliver number. 3. Create a shipment for the delivery using the data in the table. Field
Value
Transport. Planning Point
3000
Shipment Type
T100
a) In SAP ERP, on the SAP Easy Access screen, in Command the field, enter transaction code VT01N and press Enter. b) Enter the data from the table. c) ChooseSelect Deliveries . d) In the dialog box, in the W. ref. toarea, in theOutbound Delivery field, enter the delivery number in the first field. e) ChooseExecute. f) Save the shipment and note the shipment number. g) Exit the function. 4. Send the shipment to SAP TM for tendering. a) In theCommandfield, enter transaction code VT02N and press Enter. b) Enter the shipment number and press Enter. c) On theProcessingtab, in theForwarding Agent field, enterCARR-00-01. d) In theStagestab, clickLeg determination . e) Click Continueto accept the proposal. f) On theStagestab, scroll to the right and enter Planned the Shipment Start and Planned Shipment End Date according to the delivery dates. g) Open theTendertab. h) In theTenderstatus field, choose New Offer from Shipper . i) Save the shipment. 5. In SAP TM, view the freight order created from the shipment.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
188
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
a) In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Freight Order Management → Road → Overview Road Freight Orders . b) Select the query All Created from ERP Shipment . c) ChooseRefresh. d) In the query list, use the ERP Shipmentcolumn, and locate the shipment number. e) The freight order number, is in the Documentcolumn on the same row. 6. Open the freight order. a) In the query list, select the row for the freight order. b) ChooseEdit. c) Open theGeneral Data tab. d) In theDocument Typefield, you will see the freight order type. e) In theCarrierfield, you see that the carrier information has been carried over from the shipment. f) Open theDocument Flow tab. Here you will see the predecessor documents. 7. Send the freight order for tendering. a) In the freight order, choose Subcontracting→ Automatic Tendering . b) In the dialog box, enter the following data: Field
Value
Tendering Manager
Your User ID
Tendering Profile
TM310-BROADCAST-1STEP
c) Save the freight order. d) Open theSubcontractingtab, and open the Tendering Overview tab. e) Note the RFQ numbers created for carriers CARR-00-01 and CARR-00-02. 8. Accept and award the tender to CARR-00-02. a) In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Freight Order Management → Road → Overview Tendering . b) In theFreight RFQsquery section, select Open. c) Click Refresh. d) Select the RFQ corresponding to carrier CARR-00-01. e) ChooseCreate Freight Quotation → Reject (other) . f) In the dialog box, click OK. g) Select the RFQ corresponding to carrier CARR-00-02. h) ChooseCreate Freight Quotation → Accept.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
189
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
i) In the dialog box, choose OK. j) Open or refresh the freight order. k) Open theSubcontractingtab. l) In theTendering Overview tab, select the RFQ for CARR-00-02. m) Look at theAward Status , it has changed to Awarded. Look at theCarrierfield, carrier CARR-00-02 has been assigned to the freight order now. Note: The quotations are evaluated by a background report which is scheduled to run every five minutes on this system. Therefore, it might take up to five minutes until the quotation is awarded and the new carrier is assigned. n) Review the changed carrier in the SAP ERP shipment.
Shipment-Based Freight Order Settings Configuring Inbound Shipment Integration Settings in SAP TM ●
Assign Freight Order Types to ERP Shipment Types
●
Maintain suitable output profile for the freight order
●
SpecifyFreight Order Typeas Relevant forSub-Contracting
●
SpecifyDocument Creation Relevance for Freight Order Type as Freight Order Created from SAP ERP Shipment .
Configuring Inbound Shipment Integration Settings in SAP ERP ●
Set necessary delivery types as relevant for transportation
●
Associate the necessary output type to the shipment type
●
Maintain condition types for service agents
Configuring Inbound Shipment Integration Settings in SAP NetWeaver XI ●
Set up the inbound integration scenario TM_ERPShipmentIntegration_In
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
190
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
Figure 104: Configuration for Multiple Processing
You can configure the SAP ERP shipment output for multiple processing so that critical changes are transferred to SAP TM. This is especially important when using SAP TM for freight costing and cost distribution purposes. To do this, set up a partner profile with consideration to the following settings: ●
Message Code 1. CRE/UPD for triggering creation or update of TM freight order 2. TND to receive tendering result notifications from SAP TM 3. CNC for triggering cancelations in SAP TM
●
Process Code 1. SD11 for all scenarios
To trigger the cancellation of freight orders after the shipment is canceled or deleted, activate SHIPPL.TPSSHP01. Depending upon your scenario, there are 2 variants for canceling the freight order. Variant 1 If you reset the tender status in shipments to CN and you want to delete shipments in ERP, use this variant. Depending on the type of freight order, this will either delete the freight order in SAP TM, or its status will be changedCanceled. to To configure this variant, proceed as follows: 1. Create a Business Add-In (BAdI) implementation for the BAdI BADI_LE_SHIPMENT in the method BEFORE_UPDATE. For this, use the source code that is described in the manual correction instructions 936359. When you delete the shipment or change its tender status to CN, the IDoc TPSSHT01 is created with the output type SHIPPL in the method. 2. Create a new database table to be able to determine the logical system for the IDoc TPSSHT01. Open transaction SE11 and create a new database table with the following fields:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
191
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Field
Key
Initial value
Data element Short description
MANDT
X
X
MANDT
Client
TPLST
X
X
TPLST
Transportation planning point
SHTYP
X
X
SHTYP
Shipment type
VTPARN
EDI_VTPARN
Partner number
VTPART
EDI_VTPART
Partner type
3. Modify the function module IDOC_OUTPUT_SHIPPL that is called in the BAdI implementation as described in the manual correction instructions 1298598. Variant 2 Use this variant if you only want to reset the tender status in the shipment to CN. Shipments are never deleted in SAP ERP in your process. Depending on the type of the freight order, this mean that, in SAP TM, the freight order deleted or the status is changed to canceled. With this output type, an IDoc is created with the basic type SHPMNT05 and the message variant CNC. This IDoc is used in SAP PI for a web service that deletes or cancels a freight order in SAP TM. You can create the output type, for example ZTND, using the settings listed below. Table 7: Output Configuration: General Data Field
Value
Output Type
ZTND
Access Sequence (on theGeneraltab)
Z001
Access to Conditions (on theGeneraltab)
Selected
Multiple Issuing (on theGeneraltab)
Selected
Dispatch Time (on the Default Valuestab)
Send Immediately (4)
Transmission Medium (on theDefault Values EDI (6) tab) Partner Function(on theDefault Valuestab)
SP
Table 8: Output Configuration: Processing Routines Field
Value
Program
RSNATED
From Routine
EDI_PROCESSING
Table 9: Output Configuration: Partner Functions Open thePartner Functionsfolder and create a new entry with the following data:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
192
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
Field
Value
Medium
EDI (6)
Function
SP
Name
Forwarding Agent
Variant 2 Output Procedure Table 10: Output Procedure: General Data In theControl Datafolder, create a new entry with the following data: Field
Value
Step
Numerical value
Counter
Numerical value
Output type
ZTND (TNDR)
Requirement
52
In Customizing for Logistics Execution, choose Logistics Execution→ Transportation → Basic Transportation Functions → Output Control→ Maintain Output Determination for Shipments → Maintain Output Types. You can customize your access sequence according to your business requirements. After the output type has been successfully created, assign it to the output determination procedure. In Customizing for Logistics Execution, choose Logistics Execution→ Transportation → Basic Transportation Functions → Output Control→ Maintain Output Determination for Shipments → Maintain Output Determination Procedure. To send the updates to SAP TM, create another output type, for example ZUPD. To prevent the message from being generated if the tender status has not changed, create a requirement. There is an example for a requirement in the manual correction instruction in SAP OSS note 1298755. To Configure Settings for Shipment-Based Freight Orders Note that, in this procedure, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the number assigned to you by your instructor 1. In SAP ERP, in Customizing for Logistics Execution create a shipment type for ERP Shipment Integration Inbound with the following information: Field
Value
Shipment type
T1##
Description
GRP## ShipInt Inbnd
NR int. assgnt
01
ShpmtComplType
Loaded Outbound Shipment
Shipping Type
01 (Truck)
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
193
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Field
Value
Service Level
Load
ProcessControl
Individual shipment using one mode of transport
Leg Indicator
Direct Leg
Adopt Route
Adopt All stages
Determine Legs
Legs determined according to departure point & itinerary
GR- RelevanceInd
Normal
Pick check
Shipment completion only for full picking
Weight Unit
LB
Volume Unit
CDM
Copy Routine
7 (Service Agent/Route)
a) In Customizing for Logistics Execution, choose Logistics Execution→ Transportation → Shipments→ Define Shipment Types. b) ChooseNew Entries . c) Enter the data provided in the table. d) Save the shipment type. 2. Assign the output determination procedure for shipment type using the following data: Field
Value
Shipment Type
T1##
Output Determination Procedure
ZSHIP1
a) In Customizing for Logistics Execution, choose Logistics Execution→ Transportation → Basic Transportation Functions → Output Control→ Maintain Output Determination for Shipments → Assign Output Determination Procedure . b) Navigate to your shipment type T1##. c) Save the assignment. 3. Assign the text determination procedure for shipment type using the following data: Field
Value
Shipment Type
T1##
Text Determination Procedure
03
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
194
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
a) In Customizing for Logistics Execution, choose Logistics Execution→ Transportation → Basic Transportation Functions → Text Control → Define and Assign Text Determination Procedure . b) ChooseShipment → Header. c) ChooseChange. d) In theDialog Structure , double-clickText Procedure Assignment . e) Navigate to your shipment type and assign the text determination procedure as shown in the table. f) Save the assignment. 4. Create condition records for shipments with the following data: Output Type
ShipmentCarrier Type
Function Partner Medium Date
Language
TNDR
T1##
CARR-00 LS -01
XI_00_8 00
6
4
EN
TNCN
T1##
CARR-00 LS -01
XI_00_8 00
6
4
EN
ZSHP
T1##
CARR-00 LS -01
XI_00_8 00
6
4
EN
a) In SAP ERP, in theCommandfield, enter transaction code VV71 and press Enter. b) Create condition records using the data in the table. c) Save the condition records. 5. Create a freight order type for Inbound ERP Integration by copying an existing freight order type. Use the following data: Field
Value
Freight Order Type
T1##
Reference Freight Order Type
T100
Description
TM120 ## For Inbound Integration
Default Type for ERP Shipment Integration Blank a) In Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation Management→ Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Freight Order→ Define Freight Order Types . b) Choose the row for T100. c) Choose
(Copy As).
d) Update theFreight Order Type,Descriptionand theDefault Type for EPR Shipment Integrationfields with the data in the table.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
195
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Caution: Do not change any other settings in the new freight order type but take over the settings from freight order type T100. e) ChooseCopy. f) Save the freight order type. 6. Map ERP shipment types to TM freight order types with the following data: Field
Value
ERP Shipment Type
T1##
Freight Order Type
T1##
a) In Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation Management→ Transportation Management → Integration→ ERP Logistics Integration→ Shipment Integration → Assign Freight Order Types to ERP Shipment Types. b) Create a new entry using the data provided in the table. c) Save the mapping. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Create shipment-based freight orders
●
Configure settings to enable shipment-based freight orders
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
196
Unit 9 Lesson 4 Communicating Freight Orders to Other Companies
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn about the different business scenarios for business-to-business communication. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Explain the business scenarios for business-to-business communication
Freight Order Communication
Figure 105: SAP TM Usage with Shippers and LSPs
When looking at shippers that use SAP TM, we talk about ERP logistics integration and planning that creates freight orders. When looking at LSP business in SAP TM, we talk about forwarding orders from customers. We can now put the perspectives of the shipper and the LSP together; a shipper using SAP TM communicates with an LSP using SAP TM. In this case, the shipper creates freight orders and sends them to the carrier assigned to the freight order. In the shipper‘s TM system, an XML message is created and sent to the middleware system that takes care of routing the message to the right business partner. In the LSP‘s TM system, when the shipper‘s XML message is received, a forwarding order is created based on the information in the shipper‘s freight order. If the LSP confirms the forwarding order, this confirmation is sent back to the shipper and the freight order is updated.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
197
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Freight Order Sending
Figure 106: Sending Freight Orders to Carriers
The freight order can be sent from the freight order UI as the figure shows. Send Choose to Carrier; the follow up activity depends on the technical setup of the system landscape. The SAP TM system creates an XML message with all information about the freight order and sends it to the assigned middleware. When the LSP sends a confirmation outside of the system (that is via E-mail, telephone, or fax), the confirmation can be entered in the freight order manually by choosing Set to confirmed by carrier . When the LSP sends a confirmation electronically, the confirmation is logged in the freight order automatically.
Note: In case of tendering processes, the freight RFQ of the shipper is again sent to the LSP‘s TM system, where a forwarding quotation is created. When the forwarding quotation is processed and responded to by the LSP, it is sent back to the shipper where the freight RFQ is updated.
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Explain the business scenarios for business-to-business communication
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
198
Unit 9 Learning Assessment
1. Which of the following statements is an example of the shipment outbound scenario? Choose the correct answer. X
A When transportation activities based on deliveries transferred from SAP ERP are planned in SAP TM.
X
B When transportation activities based on deliveries that are transferred from SAP ERP are booked in SAP TM.
X
C When transportation activities are booked and planned in SAP ERP.
X
D When transportation activities are booked and planned in SAP ERP.
2. Inbound integration of shipment processing enables you to do which of the following tasks? Choose the correct answers. X
A Transfer shipments from SAP ERP to SAP TM and create freight orders in SAP TM based on the shipments.
X
B Update shipment-based freight orders in SAP TM if the relevant shipment in SAP ERP changes or if a delivery within the shipment changes.
X
C Transfer the tendering result for a freight order from SAP TM to the shipment in SAP ERP.
X
D Cancel freight orders in SAP TM if the relevant shipment in SAP ERP is deleted or the tendering status is reset.
X
E Create shipments in SAP ERP based on the freight orders transferred from SAP TM to SAP ERP.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
199
Unit 9: Learning Assessment
3. In the outbound integration scenario, identify the order in which the following tasks are performed. Arrange these steps into the correct sequence. 0 Send ERP deliveries to SAP TM. 0 Plan the transportation process in SAP TM. 0 Tender the freight orders in SAP TM. 0 Send the freight orders to SAP ERP. 0 Shipments created in SAP ERP. 0 Transport execution in SAP ERP. 4. For freight order-based shipments, which of the following settings must be maintained in SAP ERP? Choose the correct answers. X
A Set up an external number range object that matches the freight order number range.
X
B Adopt route and determine legs.
X
C Maintain transportation planning point ‘1000’.
X
D Ensure that the delivery types are relevant for transportation execution.
X
E Set up shipment types.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
200
Unit 9 Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Which of the following statements is an example of the shipment outbound scenario? Choose the correct answer. X
A When transportation activities based on deliveries transferred from SAP ERP are planned in SAP TM.
X
B When transportation activities based on deliveries that are transferred from SAP ERP are booked in SAP TM.
X
C When transportation activities are booked and planned in SAP ERP.
X
D When transportation activities are booked and planned in SAP ERP.
That is correct. A shipment outbound scenario is when transportation activities based on deliveries transferred from SAP ERP are planned in SAP TM. 2. Inbound integration of shipment processing enables you to do which of the following tasks? Choose the correct answers. X
A Transfer shipments from SAP ERP to SAP TM and create freight orders in SAP TM based on the shipments.
X
B Update shipment-based freight orders in SAP TM if the relevant shipment in SAP ERP changes or if a delivery within the shipment changes.
X
C Transfer the tendering result for a freight order from SAP TM to the shipment in SAP ERP.
X
D Cancel freight orders in SAP TM if the relevant shipment in SAP ERP is deleted or the tendering status is reset.
X
E Create shipments in SAP ERP based on the freight orders transferred from SAP TM to SAP ERP.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
201
Unit 9: Learning Assessment - Answers
3. In the outbound integration scenario, identify the order in which the following tasks are performed. Arrange these steps into the correct sequence. 1 Send ERP deliveries to SAP TM. 2 Plan the transportation process in SAP TM. 3 Tender the freight orders in SAP TM. 4 Send the freight orders to SAP ERP. 5 Shipments created in SAP ERP. 6 Transport execution in SAP ERP. 4. For freight order-based shipments, which of the following settings must be maintained in SAP ERP? Choose the correct answers. X
A Set up an external number range object that matches the freight order number range.
X
B Adopt route and determine legs.
X
C Maintain transportation planning point ‘1000’.
X
D Ensure that the delivery types are relevant for transportation execution.
X
E Set up shipment types.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
202
UNIT 10 Transportation Event Monitoring
Lesson 1 Monitoring Transportation Events
204
Lesson 2 Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility
213
Lesson 3 Handling Events in the Collaboration Portal
223
UNIT OBJECTIVES ●
Monitor transportation events with SAP Event Management
●
Configure settings to enable transportation event visibility
●
Handle events in the Collaboration Portal
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
203
Unit 10 Lesson 1 Monitoring Transportation Events
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn how to monitor transportation events with SAP Event Management. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Monitor transportation events with SAP Event Management
Event Management Nowadays, supply chains are global and complex. End-to-end supply chain visibility is one of the key factors in efficient supply chain operation and control. SAP Event Management is the only application needed to provide this visibility, because it is available to all partners, including customers. SAP Event Management can also work with multiple SAP and non-SAP applications.
Figure 107: Visibility Across Business Partners And IT Environments
As companies expand their suite of IT products to handle more complex scenarios, they often have to add systems to their enterprise resource planning environment. This makes it difficult for business users and management to gain a complete view of end-to-end processes and to monitor potential service issues. Therefore, it is imperative to have a tool that can incorporate information from several systems and provide insight into the progress of order fulfillment. SAP Event Management makes processes, assets, and performance visible across the entire supply chain. Extensive tracking and tracing functions allow process monitoring, automated exception resolution, proactive alerting, as well as extensive reporting in a single solution.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
204
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
The event management system is designed to work with several SAP Enterprise Resource Planning (SAP ERP) instances, if necessary. It can communicate with SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM), where sales orders may be received, and this communication is processed back to the customer to support order fulfillment. SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) may be responsible for creating the replenishment plan. SAP ERP or SAP Manufacturing Execution (SAP ME) may be responsible for communication and tracking progress on the shop floor. SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) can be responsible for the picking and packing as part of the logistics execution. Event Management in SAP Transport Management (TM) SAP Event Management offers visibility processes to monitor transportation execution in connection with SAP Transport Management (SAP TM). The transportation execution visibility processes enable users in roles such as transportation dispatcher, shipper, or ordering party, to track and monitor planned events, or to report an actual event. Tracking and tracing is provided for the following business document types in SAP TM: ●
Freight unit
●
Freight order
●
Freight booking
●
Transportation unit
●
Resource
●
Instruction execution for standard operating procedures
In each case, the goal is to manage by exception, reduce time to action, and spend less time fire-fighting. Event Management Process
Figure 108: Related Events - SAP Event Management
The four cornerstones of SAP Event Management are monitor, notify, analyze, and adjust. They contribute to providing an adaptive solution. The monitoring process collects data from the various source systems. Notifications can be set up to be triggered, with alerts sent to the
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
205
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
parties responsible if a process deviates from its anticipated course. Based on the alerts, the appropriate parties can then simulate adjustments and make any necessary changes. Finally, in relation to analytics, SAP Event Management can be tied into the SAP Business Warehouse (SAP BW) environment to support transportation management reviews. Event Types
Figure 109: Monitoring Types Of Events
SAP Event Management can process several different types of events. Within a given process, you have events that you expect to happen, and events that actually happen. Typically, you want to compare the actual event with what you expected, as follows: ●
Regular Event The first type of event is an event that you expect to happen within a particular time frame, and it happens as expected. This is a regular event.
●
Overdue Event This is an event that you expect to happen within a particular time frame, and it happens outside the expected time frame. An overdue event can cause a subsequent event to be rescheduled, or it could just be recorded as an overdue event.
●
Unexpected Event The third type of event is one that is unexpected. This could be a truck that breaking down or a malfunction in a piece of equipment; something that could potentially have an effect on subsequent events, causing something to be rescheduled or another action to be taken. An unexpected event could trigger an alert or another type of notification.
●
Unreported Event In this case, you expect an event to occur within a particular time frame, but it is not reported. It is possible that something still needs to happen following this event, so you could set a time limit that sends a message or triggers something to happen when the event is unreported for a certain time period.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
206
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
Event Management Tool Features Event Management monitoring tools provide the following: 1. Expected events are coming from the application system, in this case SAP TM. The expected events are the activities planned in SAP TM planning. 2. The reported events are the events that are reported from the real-world operations. 3. Based on received events from operations or unreported events, the rules in SAP Event Management are triggered to respond to real-world activities happening in operations or execution. 4. Using SAP TM screens or the SAP Event Management Web front-end, expected and real events are made visible to user and target groups, such as (internal) customers, planners, and people in operations. This visibility is given from a transport order, or on the demandside by way of freight unit tracking, tracing, and monitoring and, for the operations-side, by way of freight orders and bookings tracking, tracing and monitoring. SAP Event Management can point out critical situations within your supply chain in good time by comparing expected events with the actual events, and can then, for example, actively notify those persons involved. An expected event is an event that can be defined before the corresponding business process has begun and that describes the normal flow of the business process. In the context of SAP TM integration, expected events are activities planned in SAP TM. Expected events include the following: ●
Cargo receipt
●
Onboard confirmation
●
Proof of delivery
The expected events are compared to actual events (also known as reported events). Reported events include the following: ●
Unloading truck
●
Late departure
●
Accident
●
No POD sent
Transportation Execution Visibility Process The transportation execution visibility process enables users and target groups, such as (internal) customers, planners, and people in operations, to monitor events or to report an actual event by way of SAP TM screens or the SAP Event Management web interface. SAP Event Management offers visibility processes to monitor transportation execution in connection with SAP TM. Tracking and tracing is provided for the following business document types in SAP TM: ●
Freight units
●
Freight orders
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
207
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
●
Freight bookings
●
Transportation unit
●
Resources
●
Instruction execution for standard operating procedures
Visibility Processes for Transportation Monitoring Transportation operations is an area in which transparency is crucial, especially in those cases where lengthy transportation times have to be considered, such as when shipping overseas. To ensure customer satisfaction, it is more important than ever to keep full control of events, even if parts of the business process may run outside the sphere of influence of your company. Visibility processes for transportation management offer preconfigured, out-of-the box content for transportation operations, supporting you in tracking relevant activities within and beyond the confines of your company. You can monitor different processes and business documents, such as freight units, freight orders, and freight bookings. Depending on your role, you can choose different layouts for the user interface, such as shipper and consignee, which result in a comprehensive and easy to understand view of transportation operations.
Figure 110: Visibility for Transportation Execution
The figure, Visibility for Transportation Execution, depicts a realistic scenario in which SAP TM and SAP Event Management can be integrated to monitor an end-to-end international order. In the first step of the process, the order is created in SAP ERP and sent to SAP TM. At this point, a freight unit is created and scheduling can begin. SAP TM provides the basis for tracking and tracing in SAP EM. In SAP TM, freight units, orders and bookings create the event handlers, and the planned activities in SAP TM are the expected events that SAP EM monitors. For real-world awareness and proactive monitoring, SAP TM relies on SAP EM. Actual events that occur during execution are reported in SAP EM. The reporting of events can happen in SAP TM and be sent to SAP EM, or happened in SAP EM and be sent to SAP TM.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
208
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
Visibility Processes for Transportation and Event Management — Process Flow
Figure 111: Visibility Processes for Transportation and Event Management — Process Flow
The figure, Visibility Processes for Transportation and Event Management - Process Flow, shows a typical scenario in which the SAP EM and SAP TM systems are updated to reflect accurately the real world progress of a freight order. Alerts During the loading process, SAP ERP or SAP EWM may send a signal (notification) that there is a delay in the loading process. This can trigger an alert. The transportation planner may have to adjust the schedule to ensure that the container makes it to the ship on time. Once the ship has left the departure port, GPS updates may indicate that the ship has not reached its midway point. This could be due to weather or mechanical issues. The customer service agent can be notified and can contact the customer to inform them of anticipated delays. Due to the alert system, the planning team does not have to watch over every order. They can spend most of their time managing exceptions.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
209
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
Standard Content For Transportation Monitoring
Figure 112: Event Management Content for SAP TM
The figure, Event Management Content for SAP TM, shows both expected and unexpected events. The expected events are planned activities in SAP TM. For example, when loading begins for a freight unit, SAP TM reports to SAP EM that this event has occurred. Unexpected events are events that are not planned, for example delays, damaged packaging material, and cancellations. Unexpected events can also be reported from SAP TM.
Mobile Tracking and Tracing
Figure 113: SAP TM Mobile Solutions
SAP TM Notifier is an app that provides event report functionality to Android-based mobile devices. It enables you to display a list of open and assigned freight orders along with their
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
210
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
details, for example, the stops for a freight order and freight units that are assigned to the stops. You can also report the delivery status. Additional features include the ability to display the map indicating the exact location of the freight order or freight unit in real-time (from the latest reported events). Each stop has a list of predefined events that you can use to report the status of your delivery, for example, start loading or finish loading. In addition to the predefined events, you can send a delay notification for an event. SAP TM Notifier
Figure 114: SAP Transport Tracker
With the SAP TM Notifier app, you can display freight order details and report the status of your delivery using predefined events on your mobile device. Mobile devices provide planning information for the driver, and execution information back to the planner from the driver. Mobile tracking enables users by being able to do the following: ●
Display open freight orders that are valid within a certain time frame
●
Display details of a freight order
●
Display details of a stop
●
Display freight units for a stop
●
Display events for a stop
●
Display information about a freight order on a map
●
Confirm an event for a stop after completing the corresponding activity
●
Report a delay for an event
Use Case for SAP TM Notifier App 1. Gather the relevant freight orders. 2. Review the tour data.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
211
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
3. Show data on the map. 4. Report potential problems or delays. 5. Execute part of the freight order or the whole freight order and report back the execution. The technical requirements for the SAP TM Notifier App are as follows: ●
SAP Transportation Management Release 8.0
●
SAP Event Management Release 7.1, Enhancement Package 1, SP05
●
SAP NetWeaver Release 7.02
●
SAP NetWeaver Gateway 2.0 Support Package 2
●
Sybase Unwired Platform 2.1
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Monitor transportation events with SAP Event Management
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
212
Unit 10 Lesson 2 Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn how to configure the settings to enable visibility to transportation events with SAP EM. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Configure settings to enable transportation event visibility
Event Creation Architecture Landscape
Figure 115: Creating Events: Architectural Landscape
In SAP TM, an application interface (AI) to SAP Event Management (SAP EM) configuration is required so that data is transferred from the SAP TM to SAP EM. Examples of configuration objects include function modules (codes) and extractors required to interface the data between the two systems. SAP TM must be configured so that programs (or extractors) can extract data (for example, expected events) from SAP TM and send the data via the application interface to SAP EM.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
213
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
Note: This configuration is not part of this course. To use the SAP EM features, configuration is also required in SAP EM. This may include visibility settings using the Web UI or SAP GUI. Additionally, roles and role assignment to users should be set up to enable access to visibility scenarios. In SAP EM, Business Application Programming Interface (BAPIs) are used to integrate with SAP TM and other non-SAP systems, via SAP Process Integration (SAP PI) or other methods. The BAPIs are as follows: ●
/SAPTRX/BAPI_EH_POST - for creation of event handlers
●
/SAPTRX/BAPI_EH_ADDEVENTMSG_02 - for reporting events
Integration Tools between SAP TM and SAP EM Non-TM systems use IDoc and Web Services to integrate into SAP EM. SAP TM is different from other SAP solutions (for example, SAP ERP) in the way that it interfaces with the application interface. In SAP ERP, this interface is triggered by BAdIs when a business document is saved. SAP TM uses the Post-Processing Framework (PPF) for this. The PPF is also used for printing and interfaces to SAP ERP and SAP Global Trade Services (SAP GTS). Therefore, before the integration can start, you need to check if this EM Interface is enabled in the PPF. In Customizing for Cross- Application Components, choose Reusable Objects and Functions for BOPF Environment→ PPF Adapter for Output Management → Maintain Output Management Adapter Settings .
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
214
Lesson: Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility
Event Types and Event Handler Configuration Settings
Figure 116: Creating Event Handlers and Expected Events in TM
In the integration between SAP TM and SAP EM, two different interfaces and functions are used, as follows: 1. Creation and update of the Event Handler with all expected events and other critical fields such as parameter and tracking IDs. 2. Sending or reporting of events from the SAP TM system, for example, loading or unloading events from freight unit or freight order. To be able to create event handlers in SAP TM, you must configure the application object types (AOTs). From the AOTs, the extractors are created. These extractors send the data to SAP EM and create SAP EM event handlers. Content of Application Object Types Application Object Types contain the following: ●
●
●
Expected events, with planned dates and times Tracking IDs that uniquely identify the trackable object or business document, for example, a freight order Information and system parameters that contain information about the object
Content of Extractors The extractors contain the following:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
215
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
●
A freight order
●
A freight booking
●
A freight unit
●
A transportation unit
●
Other objects
Event Handlers and Reporting Events in SAP EM An event handler represents a business document (for example, freight order, freight unit, or transportation unit) or a business process (for example, within a Transportation Execution) that is relevant to tracking or monitoring functions. SAP EM creates an event handler for each object. The event handler contains all of the information necessary to track this application object. It contains this information in a form that is independent of its origin, so that SAP EM can map and track business processes in a uniform way. The event handler information makes it possible to enable the monitoring of events that are reported to SAP EM for an application object, and to check if the actual events occur in line with the expected events. In SAP TM, event types are used to send or report events to SAP EM.
Figure 117: Reporting Events in SAP EM
Events When events are reported, SAP EM uses the tracking ID that is provided in the event message to find the corresponding event handler. Basic Fields in an Event An event contains the following basic fields:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
216
Lesson: Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility
●
Date
●
Time
●
Time zone
●
Tracking ID
●
Tracking code
●
Event code
All of these fields are configured or coded in the event types.
Visibility Process Configuration
Figure 118: SAP-Delivered Visibility Processes
To monitor SAP TM Execution events, you can use the visibility scenarios from the freight order, freight booking, resource, or freight unit in the standard. This means that the application object types (AOTs) and the event type configuration are already available and only need to be activated. You also need to assign the application (in this case, SAP TM) to the SAP EM system. Visibility Scenario Prerequisites To use the visibility scenarios for transportation execution in SAP EM, you will need to ensure that the following prerequisites are fulfilled: 1. An RFC destination between SAP TM and SAP EM in transaction SM59 is created. 2. All services below default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/saptrx/in transactionSICF for the SAP EM Web interface to work. 3. Business functionSCM_EM_TMCONTENT01is activated in SAP EM.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
217
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
Configuration in SAP TM Once the prerequisites are fulfilled, you can perform the following configuration in SAP TM: 1. Define SAP EM. 2. Define used business process types, application object types, and event type. a. Assign SAP EM to the application object types. b. Mark the event management relevance for the application object. c. Assign SAP EM to all required events types. d. Mark the event management relevance for all required events types. 3. Activate the application object types. Configuration in SAP EM Perform the following steps in SAP EM: 1. Define an application system. 2. Assign a parameter profile to the mapping area. 3. Assign user profiles to users or a role.
Hint: When you use SAP Event Management for the first time, all Web interface fields are not yet compiled. To avoid problems in the Web interface, open the configuration transaction Configure Fields for User Profiles once.
Settings in SAP Transportation Management
Figure 119: Configuration in SAP TM
Define the System Configuration The RFC connection to the SAP Event Management system and the definition of the logical system serve as base definitions for connecting to SAP EM. In SAP TM, define the system configuration as follows:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
218
Lesson: Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility
1. Define Logical System for SAP Event Management. In Customizing for Integration with Other SAP Components, choose Event Management Interface → Define System Configuration → Define Logical System . 2. Define RFC Destination to SAP Event Management. In Customizing for Integration with Other SAP Components, choose Event Management Interface → Define System Configuration → Define RFC Connection to SAP EM . 3. Define SAP Event Management System. In Customizing for Integration with Other SAP Components, choose Event Management Interface → Define System Configuration → Define RFC Connection to SAP EM . Define the Application Object Type SAP delivers a predefined application object type with the relevant functions and extractors. The application object type determines the SAP EM relevance of objects and processes in SAP TM. To define the application object type, in Customizing for Integration with Other SAP Components, choose Event Management Interface → Define Application Interface → Define Used Bus. Proc. Types, Appl. Obj. Types, and Evt Types . Define the Event Type SAP delivers a predefined event type with the relevant functions and extractors. The event type determines whether the change to an SAP TM object requires an event to be sent to the relevant event handler in SAP EM. To define the event type, in Customizing for Integration with Other SAP Components, choose Event Management Interface → Define Application Interface→ Define Used Bus. Proc. Types, Appl. Obj. Types, and Evt Types . Set Freight Unit Types and Freight Order Types for SAP EM Integration To track the execution status of a freight order or freight unit, Execution the Tracking Relevancefield in the freight order type and in the freight unit type must be Execution set to Tracking with External Event Management . You can define the freight order in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management. Choose Transportation Management → Freight Order Management→ Freight Order→ Define Freight Order Types . You can define the freight unit in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management. Choose Transportation Management → Planning → Freight Unit→ Define Freight Unit Types .
Settings in SAP Event Management
Figure 120: Configuration in SAP EM
The remote function call RFC connection to the SAP Event Management system and the definition of the logical system serve as base definitions for connecting to SAP EM.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
219
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
Parameter Mapping The mapping profile is used to unify parameters when data is coming from SAP TM and to determine event handler types. To define the parameter mapping, in Customizing for Event Management, choose Event Management → Event Handlers and Event Handler Data → Parameters → Define Parameter Mapping . To Configure Integration Between Freight Orders and Event Management 1. View the Event Manager Definition for the SAP TM logical system ZMTCLNT800. a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose Integration with Other SAP Components → Event Management Interface → Define Application Interface → Define SAP EM . b) In theInformationdialog box, choose Continue. c) In theDisplay View “SAP Event Manager Definitions”: Overview screen, look for the row with ZMTCLNT800 in theDest.field. d) Here you will see the various event manager definitions. Field
Value
Event Manager
Name or identification of an Event Manager
EM Log. System
The logical System ID of Event Manager
SAP EM Version
SAP Event Manager release used
Local
Do not select the checkbox
Dest.
Enter the standard name of an RFC destination. If the receiver is an SAP system, the name of the instance in the SAP system is displayed. (For example ZMTCLNT800)
Sync.
Select checkbox if the communication to the Event Manager occurs synchronously for all BAPIs. Deselect this checkbox to improve performance. Select this checkbox for test purposes only. In a productive environment, it is recommended that you use asynchronous communication.
e) Exit the function. 2. View the business process type settings in SAP TM. a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose Integration with Other SAP Components → Event Management Interface → Define Application Interface → Define Used Bus. Proc. Types, Appl. Obj. Types, and Evt Types . b) On theChange View “Define Used Business Process Types”: Overview screen, select the row for a business process type (for example, TMS_TOR). c) In theDialog Structure screen area, choose Define Application Object Types . d) On theChange View “Define Application Object Types”: Overview screen, select an application object type (for example, ODT30_T0).
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
220
Lesson: Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility
e) Choose
(Details).
f) On theChange View “Define Application Object Types”: Details screen, in theEvent Managerfield, ensure that the name of the Event Manager is entered (for example, EM_TM_800). g) Ensure that theEM Relevance of Appl. Obj. checkbox is checked. 3. View the event types. a) In theDialog Structure , chooseDefine Event Types . b) In theChange View “Define Event Types”: Overview screen, select an event type (for example, ODT_20_Scheduled). c) Choose
(Details).
d) In theChange View “Define Event Types”: Details screen, on theGeneral Data tab, in the Event Manager field, ensure that the Event Manager name is entered (for example, EM_TM_800). e) Ensure that theEM Relevance of Appl. Obj. checkbox is selected. f) Return toCustomizing. 4. Enable event management tracking in SAP TM for freight order. a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Freight Order → Define Freight Order Types . b) Choose a freight order type. c) Choose
(Details).
d) On theChange View “Freight Order Types”: Details screen, in theExecution Settings screen area, in the Execution Track Relev. field, chooseExecution Tracking with External Event Management . e) If you select the Immediate Processing checkbox, the life cycle status is automatically set toIn Processwhen a freight order is created. f) The Propagate Execution Info setting indicates whether an event that is reported for a freight order is to be propagated to the predecessor freight units. g) If severe execution checks are activated, the system only allows you to perform cargo management related activities on the freight order interface if the handling execution status of the related items is set to a value that allows such activities. h) In theEvent Management Settings section, in the Application Object Type field, select an application object type for freight orders (for example, ODT30_T0). i) In theLast Exp. Event field, select the last expected event, for example, POD (Proof of Delivery). If this event is reported from the destination stop of a freight order, the freight order is finished from an execution perspective and the system changes the execution status of the freight orderExecuted to . j) Save and exit the function. 5. Enable settings for event tracking in SAP EM.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
221
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose Event Management → General Settings in SAP Event Management → Define Application System . b) In theInformationdialog box, choose Continue. c) On theDisplay View "Application System Definition": Overview , screen in the logical System field, enter the name of the system that is integrated with SAP EM (for example, TM_00_800). d) Save and exit the function. 6. Enable Settings for the event handlers in SAP EM system. a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose Event Management → Event Handlers and Event Handler Data . b) Maintain additional settings for Event Handlers, Expected Events, and Parameters. For more information, refer to the guide Integration of SAP TM and SAP Event Management. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: ●
Configure settings to enable transportation event visibility
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
222
Unit 10 Lesson 3 Handling Events in the Collaboration Portal
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you learn how to monitor and handle events in the Collaboration Portal. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: ●
Handle events in the Collaboration Portal
Event Handling in the Collaboration Portal
Figure 121: SAP TM Collaboration Portal
The SAP Transportation Management collaboration portal for carriers (SAP TM Collaboration Portal) supports collaborative business processes. As a carrier working with several shippers that use the SAP TM collaboration portal, you have separate access to each of your shippers. In each case, you can work only with this one shipper. The main benefits of the SAP TM Collaboration Portal are as follows:
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
223
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
●
●
●
●
●
●
Small and mid size carriers do not need to have SAP TM installed. The SAP TM Collaboration Portal is a full browser-based solution, which means that the carrier does not need access to shipper’s network (for example, a VPN connection). All common browsers are supported (Internet Explorer 9, Mozilla Firefox, Safari, Google Chrome). The carrier does not have to install anything, but just log in into the collaboration portal with the access (logon and password) provided by the shipper as SAP TM Collaboration Portal owner or host. The carrier can see only request for quotations (RFQ) assigned to it, and the transmitted quotations. To increase the usability of the portal by the carrier, user settings in the portal are stored and are available after logging on again.
Event Notification and Handling
Figure 122: Event Notification and Handling
Since the introduction of the Collaboration Portal, new functionality has been added to the portal. One of the newer functionalities in the area of freight order management is event notification and handling. It enables carriers to report expected (planned) and unexpected events related to a freight order or the stops of a freight order, to the shipper.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
224
Lesson: Handling Events in the Collaboration Portal
Freight Orders for Execution
Figure 123: Freight Orders for Execution
Carriers enter the SAP Transportation Management Collaboration Portal on Homescreen. the This screen displays a worklist with the key performance indicators (KPIs) for the available areas in the form of tiles. From the tiles, shippers can navigate to the individual areas to continue their work. The area of freight order management has been enhanced with aEvent tile forHandling . The tile displays the open freight orders for execution, for which events still have to be reported, if necessary. The Freight Orders for Execution subscreen gives an overview of all of the freight orders assigned to the carrier. The list can be filtered by the freight order status, and the individual freight order for which an event should be reported can be selected. The locations where the events occur can be displayed on a map, or the sequence of locations can be displayed in a numbered list. The list supports sorting, searching for freight orders, and filtering. You can apply a quick filter in the toolbar to filter the freight orders by the status of the event confirmation to show only open freight ordersOpen ( ), freight orders for which all the planned events have already been reported (Closed), or freight orders that have been canceled by the shipper Canceled ( ). The next plannedOpen ( ) event is displayed for each freight order, together with the affected locations and the date and time. By selecting a single row in the list, the next open event can be directly reported.
©Copyright. All rights reserved.
225
Related documents
TM120 Optimizer Planning and Executio in SAP Transportation Managemet
233 Pages • 44,738 Words • PDF • 24.4 MB
2614758 - Important SICF services in SAP Transportation Management
2 Pages • 422 Words • PDF • 122.4 KB
PALMER, Maintenance Planning and Scheduling Handbook
861 Pages • 291,754 Words • PDF • 3.5 MB
2424664 - Master Data set-up for Tax Code in SAP TM and ERP
12 Pages • 972 Words • PDF • 965.1 KB
mucopolisacaridosis tipo i - sap 2008
8 Pages • 4,288 Words • PDF • 82.8 KB
Planning diario Aurelia y Nuskina
1 Pages • 25 Words • PDF • 8.2 MB
TREINAMENTO SAP CO - CONTROLLING-1
41 Pages • 4,303 Words • PDF • 1.7 MB
Revisiting SAP Business Workflo - Nieznany
35 Pages • 2,405 Words • PDF • 614.2 KB
Statistics and data analysis in geology - J. Davis - 2002
257 Pages • 82,838 Words • PDF • 11 MB
HiBy Music App Plug-in Update--Spatializer and SVirtualizer
7 Pages • 201 Words • PDF • 569.6 KB
2018 - LIVRO - MAITY - STATISTICAL METHODS IN HYDROLOGY AND HYDROCLIMATOLOGY
451 Pages • 166,893 Words • PDF • 6 MB
Guide to Investing in Gold and Silver-Mike Maloney
124 Pages • 67,395 Words • PDF • 1.1 MB